StructureGuide PDF

Structure
User's Guide
Version 2016 (11.0)

November 2016
Copyright
Copyright © 2000-2016 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2016. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2016 Telerik AD.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Structure User's Guide 2

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, ISOGEN, SmartSketch,
SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, Sapphire, and Intergraph Smart are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered
trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a
registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl,
ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are
trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc.
VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2013, All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a
trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.

Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 12
What's New in Structure ........................................................................................................................... 12
Structure ..................................................................................................................................................... 14
Structure Workflow ................................................................................................................................... 17

Structure Common Tasks ..................................................................................................................... 17
Selecting Objects .................................................................................................................................. 19
Members ............................................................................................................................................... 22
Frame Connections ............................................................................................................................... 24
Member Assembly Connections ........................................................................................................... 29
Slab Assembly Connections ................................................................................................................. 33
Place Linear Member Systems ................................................................................................................. 35

Place members using discrete placement ............................................................................................ 54
Place members using contiguous placement ....................................................................................... 55
Place a member using finish mode ....................................................................................................... 56
Edit member system properties ............................................................................................................ 57
Edit member part properties ................................................................................................................. 57
Edit a frame connection ........................................................................................................................ 57
Delete a member system ...................................................................................................................... 57
Convert a member part ......................................................................................................................... 58
Modify the cardinal point of a member .................................................................................................. 58
Modify the end releases of a member .................................................................................................. 58
Modify the angle of a member .............................................................................................................. 59
Modify the cross-section of a member .................................................................................................. 59
Modify the material of a member .......................................................................................................... 59
Modify the material grade of a member ................................................................................................ 59
Modify the type of member ................................................................................................................... 60
Move a member .................................................................................................................................... 60
Move one end of a member .................................................................................................................. 60
Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................ 61
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) .................................... 61
Relationship Tab............................................................................................................................. 63
Configuration Tab ........................................................................................................................... 64
Notes Tab ....................................................................................................................................... 65
Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 67
Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) ............................................... 67
Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) .............................................. 73
Designed Member Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 78
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 78
Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 82
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 84

Contents
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 85

Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ...................................................... 88
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box -
Designed Member) ......................................................................................................................... 89
General Tab .................................................................................................................................... 94
Plate Part Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 94
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 94
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 95
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 96
Weight & CG Tab ........................................................................................................................... 98
Extended User Attributes Tab ........................................................................................................ 98
Routing Tab .................................................................................................................................... 98
Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 99
General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................. 99
Place Curve Members ............................................................................................................................. 109

Place a curved member ...................................................................................................................... 110
Place Bracing ........................................................................................................................................... 113

Place vertical cross bracing ................................................................................................................ 117
Place horizontal cross bracing ............................................................................................................ 120
Place vertical chevron bracing ............................................................................................................ 121
Place horizontal chevron bracing ........................................................................................................ 124
Place Framing Members ......................................................................................................................... 127

Position framing members using best fit ............................................................................................. 132
Position framing members using count method .................................................................................. 133
Position framing members at equal spacing ....................................................................................... 135
Position framing members using number and spacing method .......................................................... 136
Copy framing members ....................................................................................................................... 136
Place Columns at Grid Intersections ..................................................................................................... 138

Place columns at grid intersections .................................................................................................... 140
Place Vessel Supports ............................................................................................................................ 142

Support vessels with 0 degree oriented lugs ...................................................................................... 146
Support vessels with 45 degree oriented lugs .................................................................................... 147
Place Can.................................................................................................................................................. 148

Place an in-line can ............................................................................................................................. 152
Place an in-line can on cross bracing ................................................................................................. 153
Place an end can ................................................................................................................................ 155
Place a stub-end can .......................................................................................................................... 156
Add a transverse member to a can ..................................................................................................... 157
Remove a transverse member from a can ......................................................................................... 158
Can Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 159
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 159

Contents
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 164

Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 170
Place Assembly Connection .................................................................................................................. 174

Place an assembly connection ........................................................................................................... 181
Edit assembly connection properties .................................................................................................. 182
Delete an assembly connection .......................................................................................................... 182
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection ................................................................................... 182
Edit assembly connection parts .......................................................................................................... 183
Place free end cuts ............................................................................................................................. 183
Edit free end cut properties ................................................................................................................. 183
Delete free end cut .............................................................................................................................. 184
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 184
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................. 184
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 189
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 189
Place Splits .............................................................................................................................................. 191

Split a member that intersects another member ................................................................................. 195
Split a cross brace .............................................................................................................................. 196
Split columns at a plane ...................................................................................................................... 197
Split a member at a point along member ............................................................................................ 198
Set member split priority ..................................................................................................................... 199
Remove a split .................................................................................................................................... 199
Split Connection Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 199
General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 199
Trim Members .......................................................................................................................................... 201

Cope a member web ........................................................................................................................... 202
Trim member to surface ...................................................................................................................... 203
Delete a member trim ......................................................................................................................... 203
Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box.................................................................................................... 204
Definition Tab (Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................... 204
Occurrence Tab (Feature Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 204
Place Fireproofing ................................................................................................................................... 207

Place fireproofing automatically .......................................................................................................... 210
Place fireproofing manually ................................................................................................................. 211
Modify fireproofing properties ............................................................................................................. 211
Place two types of fireproofing on a single member ........................................................................... 212
Delete fireproofing ............................................................................................................................... 212
Insulation Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 213
Occurrence Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................................... 213
Definition Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 217
Specification Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................... 219
Place Slabs ............................................................................................................................................... 220

Place a slab by selecting boundary objects ........................................................................................ 226

Contents
Place a slab by drawing 2-D boundaries ............................................................................................ 228

Place a slab by drawing 3-D boundaries ............................................................................................ 230
Place a slab by selecting objects and drawing 2-D boundaries ......................................................... 230
Place a slab by selecting objects and drawing 3-D boundaries ......................................................... 231
Solve ambiguous boundaries.............................................................................................................. 232
Edit slab object boundaries ................................................................................................................. 232
Edit 2-D drawn slab boundaries .......................................................................................................... 232
Edit 3-D drawn slab boundaries .......................................................................................................... 233
Edit slab properties ............................................................................................................................. 234
Delete a slab ....................................................................................................................................... 234
Slab Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 234
General Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................... 234
Layer Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................................... 241
Understanding Plane Methods ............................................................................................................ 241
Define Plane as Coincident .......................................................................................................... 242
Define Plane using Offset from Plane .......................................................................................... 242
Define Plane using Angle to Plane ............................................................................................... 242
Define Plane using Vector and Point ............................................................................................ 243
Define Plane using Three Points .................................................................................................. 243
Place Walls ............................................................................................................................................... 244

Place a wall by 2-D sketch .................................................................................................................. 248
Add end segment to existing wall using 2-D sketch ........................................................................... 250
Place split walls by 2-D sketch............................................................................................................ 251
Add fillet corner to existing wall using 2-D sketch............................................................................... 252
Add middle segments to existing wall using 2-D sketch ..................................................................... 254
Modify wall length using 2-D sketch.................................................................................................... 257
Create gap in existing wall using 2-D sketch ...................................................................................... 259
Rotate an existing wall using 2-D sketch ............................................................................................ 260
Place a wall by 3-D sketch .................................................................................................................. 261
Place split walls by 3-D sketch............................................................................................................ 262
Split an existing wall using 3-D sketch ................................................................................................ 263
Add end segment to existing wall using 3-D sketch ........................................................................... 263
Modify wall cross-section .................................................................................................................... 264
Edit wall properties .............................................................................................................................. 264
Edit multiple walls................................................................................................................................ 264
Delete a wall........................................................................................................................................ 265
Wall System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 265
General Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box) ...................................................................... 265
Layer Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 267
Section Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 267
Wall Part Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 269
General Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 269
Layer Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 273
Section Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 273
Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 274
Occurrence Tab (Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................... 274
Definition Tab (Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box).............................................................. 276

Contents
Toggle Wall Corner .................................................................................................................................. 277
Place Equipment ...................................................................................................................................... 278

Place equipment from the catalog ...................................................................................................... 282
Set positioning relationships for equipment ........................................................................................ 283
Place doors from the catalog .............................................................................................................. 284
Place windows from the catalog ......................................................................................................... 285
Edit equipment properties ................................................................................................................... 286
Edit equipment relationships ............................................................................................................... 287
Equipment Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 287
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................... 288
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 296
Connection Tab ............................................................................................................................ 297
Insulation Tab ............................................................................................................................... 297
Place Designed Equipment .................................................................................................................... 298

Place designed equipment .................................................................................................................. 301
Set positioning relationships for designed equipment ........................................................................ 302
Edit designed equipment properties ................................................................................................... 302
Edit designed equipment reference coordinate system ...................................................................... 303
Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 304
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 304
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 312
Insulation Tab ............................................................................................................................... 312
Place Designed Equipment Component ............................................................................................... 314

Place designed equipment component ............................................................................................... 315
Place Designed Solid .............................................................................................................................. 317

Create a basic solid ............................................................................................................................ 321
Import shape to designed solid ........................................................................................................... 322
Switch add, subtract, or suppressed shape ........................................................................................ 323
Order shapes in designed solid .......................................................................................................... 323
Solid Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 324
Occurrence Tab (Solid Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 324
Place Shape ............................................................................................................................................. 328

Place a shape ..................................................................................................................................... 331
Edit shape properties .......................................................................................................................... 332
Edit prismatic shape properties ........................................................................................................... 333
Shape Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 333
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 334
Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 334
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................... 335
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) ...................................................... 335

Contents
Creating Customized Shapes ................................................................................................................. 337

Place a prismatic shape ...................................................................................................................... 347
Define the path for a prismatic shape ................................................................................................. 349
Sketch the cross-section for a prismatic shape .................................................................................. 351
Define cross-sectional properties for a prismatic shape ..................................................................... 352
Modify a sketched cross-section ......................................................................................................... 353
Edit cross-section properties for a prismatic shape ............................................................................ 354
Add segments to a path ...................................................................................................................... 355
Move Segments of a Path ................................................................................................................... 357
Modify a straight segment in a path .................................................................................................... 359
Modify an Arc in a Path ....................................................................................................................... 359
Modify a turn in a path ........................................................................................................................ 360
Sketch Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 362
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 362
Place Imported Shape from File ............................................................................................................. 363

Place an Imported Shape ................................................................................................................... 364
Share imported shapes between models ........................................................................................... 366
Place Opening .......................................................................................................................................... 367

Place an opening by boundaries......................................................................................................... 371
Place an opening by shape ................................................................................................................. 372
Place an opening by drawing .............................................................................................................. 374
Place an opening on a sloped wall ..................................................................................................... 376
Place an opening on a leaning wall .................................................................................................... 378
Change a recess opening to a through opening ................................................................................. 380
Change a through opening to a recess opening ................................................................................. 380
Delete an opening ............................................................................................................................... 380
Opening Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................................... 381
General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 381
Place Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 383

Place a stair ........................................................................................................................................ 387
Edit stair placement ............................................................................................................................ 389
Delete a Stair ...................................................................................................................................... 389
Stair Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 389
Occurrence Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................. 389
Definition Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 397
Place Ladders .......................................................................................................................................... 398

Place a ladder ..................................................................................................................................... 401
Edit ladder placement ......................................................................................................................... 403
Edit ladder properties .......................................................................................................................... 403
Delete a ladder .................................................................................................................................... 403
Ladder Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 404
Occurrence Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 404
Definition Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................. 417

Contents
Place Handrails ........................................................................................................................................ 418

Place a handrail .................................................................................................................................. 420
Place a handrail as individual members ............................................................................................. 420
Split a handrail .................................................................................................................................... 421
Edit handrail placement ...................................................................................................................... 421
Edit handrail properties ....................................................................................................................... 421
Convert handrail to individual members ............................................................................................. 421
Delete a handrail ................................................................................................................................. 422
Handrail Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 422
Occurrence Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 422
Definition Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 457
Place Handrails by Member .................................................................................................................... 458

Place a handrail by member ............................................................................................................... 461
Edit handrail placement ...................................................................................................................... 462
Edit handrail properties ....................................................................................................................... 462
Delete a handrail ................................................................................................................................. 462
Place Footings ......................................................................................................................................... 463

Place a single footing .......................................................................................................................... 466
Place a single footing by point ............................................................................................................ 467
Place a single footing without an associated plane ............................................................................ 468
Place a combined footing .................................................................................................................... 469
Place a combined footing by point ...................................................................................................... 470
Add column to a combined footing...................................................................................................... 470
Remove column from a combined footing .......................................................................................... 471
Edit footing properties ......................................................................................................................... 472
Delete a footing ................................................................................................................................... 472
Footing Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 473
Occurrence Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 473
Definition Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 478
Place Equipment Foundations ............................................................................................................... 479

Place an equipment foundation (By Equipment) ................................................................................ 481
Place an equipment foundation (By Point) ......................................................................................... 482
Edit an equipment foundation ............................................................................................................. 483
Edit equipment foundation properties ................................................................................................. 483
Delete an equipment foundation ......................................................................................................... 483
Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 483
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box) ................................................ 484
Definition Tab (Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 487
Member Autoconnect .............................................................................................................................. 488

Apply axis-end frame connections to stacked columns ...................................................................... 489
Connect beams to columns ................................................................................................................ 490
Connect horizontal braces and beams to supporting beams ............................................................. 490
Connect members to slabs, walls, and plates .................................................................................... 491
Connect braces to members ............................................................................................................... 491

Contents
Connect Members to Grids ................................................................................................................. 492
Sketching in 3-D ...................................................................................................................................... 493

Define a path ....................................................................................................................................... 501
Add segments to a path ...................................................................................................................... 502
Add vertices to a path ......................................................................................................................... 503
Move segments of a path .................................................................................................................... 503
Modify a straight segment in a path .................................................................................................... 504
Modify an arc in a path ........................................................................................................................ 505
Modify a turn in a path ........................................................................................................................ 505
Sketch Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 506
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 506
Importing and Exporting Structure ........................................................................................................ 507

Export Structure .................................................................................................................................. 512
Export Structure Model ................................................................................................................. 512
Export Structure Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 512
Import Structure .................................................................................................................................. 516
Import structure model.................................................................................................................. 516
Preview a CIS File ........................................................................................................................ 517
Import Structure Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 517
Import Bocad ....................................................................................................................................... 526
bocad Import Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 527
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus ....................................................................................................... 529
Member Criteria ............................................................................................................................ 531
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus .................................................................................... 532
CIM Steel Export Key-in ............................................................................................................... 533
Exporting from Tekla Structures ......................................................................................................... 534
Export Structure Model from Tekla Structures ............................................................................. 534
Import Structure Model into Tekla Structures ............................................................................... 535
New Mapping File .................................................................................................................................... 535

Create a Mapping File ......................................................................................................................... 538
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 539
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 562

Preface
This document is a user's guide for the Structure functionality of Intergraph Smart TM 3D and
provides command reference information and procedural instructions.
Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).
What's New in Structure

The following changes have been made to the Structure task.
Version 2016 (11.0)
 The new Member Autoconnect (on page 488) command creates frame connections
between existing members in the model automatically using a predefined set of rules and
tolerances. When you import, move, copy and paste with a move, or mirror copy members in
the model, the frame connections are set as unsupported. But now with automatic
connection, the software finds the needed frame connections for you. (P2 CP:255984; P2
CP:267994)
 You can now place built-up members, including tapered members, in a plant model. Before
you were limited to placing built-up members only in a marine model. (P2 CP:136769)
 When placing members, the active coordinate system defined in the PinPoint ribbon is
honored. For example, this allows you to place columns with a 0-degree beta angle in a
rotated coordinate system and have the columns align correctly to the rotated coordinate
system. This feature is available in Place Linear Member Systems (on page 35), Place
Bracing (on page 113), Place Framing Members (on page 127), and Place Columns at
Grid Intersections (on page 138). In Place Vessel Supports (on page 142), the X-, Y-
coordinates of the selected equipment displays in the active coordinate system. (P2
CP:19956)
 You can now export marine plate objects to a CIS/2 file. (P2 CP:253427)
 You can now import bocad® models into Smart 3D. For more information, see Importing and
Exporting Structure (on page 507) and Import bocad (on page 526). (P2 CP:250191)
 When you convert handrails to members, the handrail posts are now automatically
connected to nearby structural objects with either the Axis-Along or Surface-Default frame
connections. This allows you to place assembly connections on the handrail posts to obtain
weld information and manufacture any base plates or attachments that are needed for the
connection. (P2 CP:250589)
 Added descriptions of molded conventions for the individual plates of a designed (built-up)
member. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box - Designed Member) (on page 89). (P2 CP:264474)
 Added a new locate filter, Construction Graphics. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 19). (P2 CP:271166)

Preface
 You can specify a new sketching plane when you edit an opening with a missing sketching
plane. For more information, see Place Opening (on page 367). (P2 CP:279815)
 You can now use the measure command to measure from fireproofing geometry to objects
in the model to check for clearance. (P2 CP:155070)
 Tapered and built-up members can now be exported to a physical CIMsteel file. (P3
CP:229011)
 Curved members can now be assigned Piecemark and Assembly Mark properties. (P3
CP:228984)
 You can now import CIS/2 files without having the software compare the GUIDs in the file
with the GUIDs in the model. This ability to import and ignore IDs allows you to import the
same CIS/2 file multiple times into the same model to create a unique copy each time the file
is imported. (P3 CP:249402)
 The Place Bracing (on page 113), Place Framing Members (on page 127), Place
Columns at Grid Intersections (on page 138), and Place Vessel Supports (on page 142)
commands now support the use of built-up sections. (P3 CP:147163)
 For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole,
Maintenance, and Operation aspects displaying in the 3D graphic view also display in the
Sketch 2D environment. For more information, see Format View Dialog Box in the Common
User's Guide, Place Opening (on page 367), and Place Slabs (on page 220). (P4 CP:
119768)

SECTION 1
Structure
The Structure task places and modifies structural objects. Using this task, you can place
beams, columns, braces, truss elements, cables, equipment foundations, column footings,
openings, slabs, walls, and connections in your model. You also can create custom section
shapes using 2D Symbols and place those custom sections in the model.
The Structure task also provides for traffic needs by placing stairs, ladders, and handrails.
Although not required, we recommend that you place grids using the Grids task
before placing structural members.
The Structure task has these commands:
Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting Objects
(on page 19).
Place Linear Member System - Places columns, beams, braces, and other linear
members in the model. For more information, see Place Linear Member Systems (on page
35).
Place Curve Member - Places a curved column, beam, or brace member in the model. For
more information, see Place Curve Members (on page 109).
Place X Bracing - Places vertical cross bracing or vertical chevron bracing in the model.
For more information, see Place Bracing (on page 113).
Place Framing Members - Places secondary framing members between two supporting
members that you specify. For more information, see Place Framing Members (on page
127).
Place Columns at Grid Intersections - Places columns at grid intersections. For more
information, see Place Columns at Grid Intersections (on page 138).
Place Vessel Supports - Places structural members that support vertical vessels directly
(typically four lugs that rest on the members) or that
support the grating around the vessel. For more information, see Place Vessel Supports (on
page 142).
Place Can - Places a can in the model. A can is a reinforcing connection piece on a
member to increase the surface area available for connections or to provide increased wall
thickness or both. For more information, see Place Can (on page 148).
Place Assembly Connection - Places assembly connections between linear member

systems. For more information, see Place Assembly Connection (on page 174).

Structure
Place Split - Divides a member system into multiple member parts while maintaining the
design intent of the original member system. For more information, see Place Splits (on
page 191).
Trim Member - Manually copes, snips, and planar trims member ends. For more
information, see Trim Members (on page 201).
Place Fireproofing - Places fireproofing on selected members. For more information, see
Place Fireproofing (on page 207).
Place Slab - Places slabs, plates, and grates in the model. For more information, see Place
Slabs (on page 220).
Place Wall - Places a wall in the model. For more information, see Place Walls (on page
244).
Toggle Wall Corner - When two separate walls join at a corner, one wall extends past the
other wall to form the corner. You can use this command to toggle which wall extends past
the other. For more information, see Toggle Wall Corner (on page 277).
Place Equipment - Places equipment in the model. In the Structure task, use this
command to place doors and windows. For more information, see Place Equipment (on
page 278).
Place Designed Equipment - Places equipment types that have been defined in the
reference data. For more information, see Place Designed Equipment (on page 298).
Place Designed Equipment Component - Places equipment components that have been
defined in the reference data. For more information, see Place Designed Equipment
Component (on page 314).
Place Designed Solid - Creates customized solids and equipment using shapes that add
material to or subtract material from the designed solid. For more information, see Place
Designed Solid (on page 317).
Place Shape - Adds additional shapes or equipment objects to an existing designed

equipment type. The icon displayed on the toolbar is the icon of the last shape selected
from the palette. For more information, see Place Shape (on page 328).
Place Imported Shape from File - Adds geometry to a designed equipment object that
was modeled with solid modeling software and saved to a format. For more information, see
Place Imported Shape from File (on page 363).
Place Opening - Places openings (holes) in slabs, walls, and linear member systems. For
more information, see Place Opening (on page 367).
Place Stair - Places stairs in the model. For more information, see Place Stairs (on page
383).
Place Ladder - Places ladders in the model. For more information, see Place Ladders (on
page 398).

Structure
Place Handrail - Places a handrail in the model following a path that you specify. For more
information, see Place Handrails (on page 418).
Place Handrail by Member - Places a handrail on selected members without having to

define a path. For more information, see Place Handrails by Member (on page 458).
Place Footing - Places a column footing in the model. For more information, see Place
Footings (on page 463).
Place Equipment Foundation - Places a foundation for selected pieces of equipment. For
more information, see Place Equipment Foundations (on page 479).
Member Autoconnect - Connects existing built-up or standard members using a pre-

defined set of rules and tolerances. For more information, see Member Autoconnect (on
page 488).
Import Structure - Imports a CIS/2 file into the model. This command is on the File menu.
For more information, see Import Structure (on page 516).
Export Structure - Exports the structural physical model to a CIS/2 or IFC file. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Export Structure (on page 512).
New Mapping File - Creates an XML mapping file for the section and material names used
in the software and third-party application. This command is on the File menu. For more
information, see New Mapping File (on page 535).

SECTION 2
Structure Workflow
All structure objects are placed in the model using information defined in the structure reference
data. Your first step should be to review, edit, and otherwise customize the delivered structure
reference data using the Catalog task. Refer to the Catalog documentation. If you prefer, you
can still review, edit, and create structure reference data using Microsoft Excel workbooks. Refer
to the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on editing reference data using
workbooks.
After the reference data is customized to suit your needs, consider going to the Systems and
Specifications task and defining the systems that you want in your model. While not absolutely
required that you create your systems first, doing so keeps you from having to edit your
structural objects after placement to assign them to the correct system. In addition, we
recommend that you create your elevations and grids using the Grids task before placing
structural objects.
After the structure reference data and the needed systems and grids are defined, you can begin
placing structural objects in your model.
In This Section
Structure Common Tasks .............................................................. 17
Selecting Objects ........................................................................... 19
Members ........................................................................................ 22
Frame Connections ....................................................................... 24
Member Assembly Connections .................................................... 29
Slab Assembly Connections .......................................................... 33
Structure Common Tasks

The following tasks are used frequently in the Structure task.
Customize Reference Data

Create new member types by editing the AllCodeLists.xls workbook. For more information, see
the Structural Reference Data Guide.
Review, add, and edit material information. For more information, see the Structural Reference
Data Guide.
Place Members
Place columns in the model. For more information, see Place Members using Discrete
Placement (on page 54).
Place beams in the model. For more information, see Place Members using Contiguous
Placement (on page 55).
Places braces in the model. For more information, see Place Vertical Cross Bracing (on page
117), Place Vertical Chevron Bracing (on page 121), and Position Framing Members at Equal
Spacing (on page 135).

Structure Workflow
Split member systems into member part as needed to resolve interferences, place column
splices, and other modeling issues. For more information, see Split a Member that Intersects
another Member (on page 195) and Split Columns at a Plane (on page 197).
Place assembly connections in the model. For more information, see Place an assembly
connection (on page 181).
Place Slabs
Place slabs in the model. The software provides great flexibility in placing slabs. For more
information, see:
Place a Slab by Selecting Boundary Objects (on page 226)
Place a Slab by Drawing 2-D Boundaries (on page 228)
Place a Slab by Drawing 3-D Boundaries (on page 230)
Place a Slab by Selecting Objects and Drawing 2-D Boundaries (on page 230)
Place a Slab by Selecting Objects and Drawing 3-D Boundaries (on page 231)
Place Walls
Place walls in the model. The software provides great flexibility in placing walls. For more
information, see:
Place a Wall by 2-D Sketch (on page 248)
Place a Wall by 3-D Sketch (on page 261)
Place Openings
Place openings in slabs, walls, and members in the model. You can define openings by
boundaries, by drawing the opening, or by selecting a shape from the catalog for the opening.
You can place doors and windows by selecting a door or window from the catalog.
For more information on placing an opening by boundaries, see Place an Opening by
Boundaries (on page 371).
For more information on placing an opening by drawing the opening, see Place an Opening by
Drawing (on page 374).
For more information on placing an opening by using a shape from the catalog, see Place an
Opening by Shape (on page 372).
For more information on placing doors, see Place Doors from the Catalog (on page 284).
For more information on placing windows, see Place Windows from the Catalog (on page 285).
Model Foundations
Place equipment foundations in your model. For more information, see Place an Equipment
Foundation (By Equipment) (on page 481).
Place column footings in your model. For more information, see Place a Single Footing (on page
466) or Place a Combined Footing (on page 469).
Provide for Traffic

Place stairs, or incline ladders, in your model. For more information, see Place a Stair (on page
387).
Place ladders in your model. For more information, see Place a Ladder (on page 401).

Structure Workflow
Place handrails in your model. For more information, see Place a Handrail (on page 420) and
Place a Handrail by Member (on page 461).
Exporting the Physical Model

When all the primary and secondary members are modeled, you may want to export the
physical model to a detailing application. For more information, see Export Structure Model (on
page 512).
Selecting Objects
All objects in the Structure task have properties
that you can edit. Using the Select command
on the vertical toolbar, you select the object that
you want to edit.
An important part of the Select command is the Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon.
The Locate Filter box contains the available, predefined filters for the Select command. When
you choose a filter in the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered
objects in a graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Member
Systems, you can select only member systems in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
The Structure task includes these filters:
Assembly Components
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to assembly
components placed by an assembly connection or by an assembly footing or foundation.
Cans
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to Cans. You can
place Can using Place Can (on page 148) (only available in marine mode).
Construction Graphics
Limits the selection of items to construction graphics.
Control Points
Limits your selection in a graphic view to control points.
Designed Members
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to designed members,
which are non-standard members comprised from a collection of individual plates.
Equipment
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to equipment.
Remember that doors and windows are considered pieces of equipment. You can place
doors and windows using Place Equipment . For more information, see Place
Equipment (on page 278).
Equipment Components
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to equipment
components.

Structure Workflow
Equipment Foundations
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to equipment
foundations. You can place equipment foundations using Place Equipment Foundation
. For more information, see Place Equipment Foundations (on page 479).
Footings
Allows you to select footings in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer. You can
place footings using Place Footing . For more information, see Place Footings (on page
463).
Frame Connections
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to frame connections.
For more information about these connections, see Frame Connections (on page 24).
Handrails
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to handrails. You can
place handrails using Place Handrail or Place Handrail by Member . For more
information, see Place Handrails (on page 418) or Place Handrails by Member (on page
458).
Insulation
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to fireproofing
insulation. You can place fireproofing using Place Fireproofing . For more information,
see Place Fireproofing (on page 207).
Ladders
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to ladders. You can
place ladders using Place Ladder . For more information, see Place Ladders (on page
398).
Member Assembly Connections
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to member assembly
connections. For more information about these connections, see Member Assembly
Connections (on page 29) and Place Assembly Connection (on page 174).
Member Parts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to member parts. One
or more member parts define a member system.
If you not sure whether to use Member Systems or Member Parts when you want
to edit properties, try Member Parts first.
Member Systems
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to member systems. A
member system contains one or more member parts. You can place member systems using
Place Linear Member or Place Curved Member . For more information, see Place
Linear Member Systems (on page 35) and Place Curve Members (on page 109).
Openings
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to openings (holes).
You can place openings using Place Opening . For more information, see Place

Structure Workflow
Opening (on page 367).

Shapes
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to shapes.
Slab Assembly Connections
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to slab assembly
connections. For more information about these connections, see Slab Assembly
Connections (on page 33).
Slabs
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to slabs. You can
place slabs using Place Slab . For more information, see Place Slabs (on page 220).
Solids
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to solids.
Split Connections
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to split connections.
For more information about these connections, see Place Splits (on page 191).
Stairs
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to stairs (incline
ladders). You can place stairs using Place Stair . For more information, see Place Stairs
(on page 383).
Structure
Allows you to select any object in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer that was
placed using the Structure task. Objects placed using other tasks, such as equipment,
cannot be selected using this filter.
Wall Assembly Connections
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to wall assembly
connections.
Wall Parts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to wall parts.
Wall Systems
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to wall systems. A
wall system contains one or more wall parts. You can place wall systems using Place Wall
. For more information, see Place Walls (on page 244).
All
Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.
Use the Inside fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence.
Use the Inside/Overlapping fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence
and those objects outside but touching the fence at some point.

Structure Workflow
Members
You can place linear and curved members. All linear members are placed using Place Linear
Member Systems (on page 35) . All curved members are placed using Place Curve Members
(on page 109) . Both commands provide options for selecting member type category, type,
section name, cardinal point, and other options during placement.
In addition, the software provides several member placement productivity commands in the
Structure task that, depending on what you are doing, might be a better choice than Place
Linear Member System. For example, to place a column at each grid intersection in one
operation, use Place Columns at Grid Intersections (on page 138) . If you want to place cross
bracing, use Place Bracing (on page 113) . Use Place Framing Members (on page 127)
to place secondary framing members in a bay. If you want to place support members around a
vertical vessel, use Place Vessel Supports (on page 142) . Before you start placing members
however, there are concepts that you need to know.
Although not required, we recommend that you place grid planes, elevations planes,
and grid lines using the Grids task before placing structural members.
Standard Member Systems

Member systems are logical collections of member parts that maintain the design basis and
physical alignment of the member parts for analysis, design, and manufacturing. For example, in
vertical cross-bracing, typically one of the vertical braces is split into two parts so that it does not
interfere with the other vertical brace in the cross. The member system for that split vertical
brace maintains the co-linear alignment of the two parts when you move either outside corner of
the vertical brace. Another example of a member system would be a jacket leg. The leg is
comprised of different parts, including cans that have different cross-section sizes, but you want
the entire leg to move as a single member. Use Place Splits (on page 191) to split member
systems into member parts.
Member systems connect to other member systems using Frame Connections. For more
information, see Frame Connections (on page 24).
Member Parts
Member parts are children of a standard member system and represent the physical parts in the
model. Member parts connect logically to other member parts using assembly connections. For
more information, see Member Assembly Connections (on page 29).
Designed Members
In marine mode and material handling mode, the software places a designed member,
composed of individual plates, in the same fashion as a standard rolled member. For example, a
designed member with a W-section has a plate for the top flange, a plate for the web, and a
plate for the bottom flange. These plates behave just like all other plates in the model, which
means you can detail and manufacture the plates in the Structural Detailing and Structural
Manufacturing tasks. You can even edit the properties of the individual plates to adjust the
plate thickness, for example, without affecting the designed member's cross-section. It is
important to know that if a designed member is placed in a lapped configuration (for example, as
a plate stiffener) on a plate system, no logical connections are created along the designed
member’s toe trace. If needed, the logical connections must be placed manually.

Structure Workflow
Because designed members are composed of plates, you can place members that are
prismatic, tapered, and non-prismatic in the model. Sections for designed members are
delivered in two section libraries: Built-Up-English and Built-Up-Metric. Use designed
members to place tapered, can, cone, haunch, and other specialty members in your model.
Member Type Category and Type

Member categories are broader groupings of member types. For example, the software delivers
a member type category called column. In the column type category are member types called
column and stud. When placing a member, you have to select a member type category and a
member type. You can define your own member categories and member types by editing the
Structural Member Type select list in the Catalog task. Refer to the Catalog User's Guide for
more information.
Member Local Coordinate System and Orientation

The software uses the following convention to determine the local coordinate system of a
member. The member's local x-axis is along the member axis from member start to member
end. The member's local z-axis is the strong axis of the member cross-section. The member's
local y-axis is determined by the right- hand-rule using the local x- and z-axes.
When placing members, the software sets the local z-axis of the member parallel to the global
Z-axis by default. However, if you rotate the member such that the local x-axis of the member
becomes parallel to the global Z-axis, then the software switches the local z-axis of the member
to be parallel to the positive global X-axis. When you select a member part, the software
indicates the member's x- and z-axes with arrows that display at the member part start end.
Discrete or Contiguous Placement Methods

When placing members in the model, you can use either discrete placement or contiguous
placement. The discrete placement method requires you to define both the start and the end
points of the member, which is useful when placing columns. The contiguous placement method
uses the end point of the previously placed member as the start point of the next member. This
method is useful when placing multiple beams, because in most cases the end of the previous
beam is where you want to start the next beam.
The Start and End commands on the ribbon are used to toggle between placement
methods.

Structure Workflow
Frame Connections
Frame connections describe the positioning relationship between member systems. This
positioning relationship defines the member orientation and offset of the supported member in
relation to the supporting member. Two frame connections are placed when you place the
member system, one at each end. Because frame connections define relationships between
member systems, the frame connection might prevent you from moving a member. For help in
moving members, see Move One End of a Member (on page 60) and Move a Member (on page
60). Refer to Members (on page 22) for important related information about member systems.
The types of frame connections are:
Align-Default/Lapped
An align frame connection places the end of the supported member system at the
intersection of three surfaces that you define. You can define offsets from all three surfaces.
This frame connection is useful, for example, when you want a column to move with a wall
or bulkhead on a lower floor or deck.
Axis Along
An axis along frame connection aligns the cardinal point on the supported member system
with the cardinal point on the supporting member system. Use this frame connection when
the member systems are different types (a beam framing into a column for example). Using
this frame connection, the beam will slide along the length of the column, but will not cause
the column to lengthen or shorten. You can specify an optional offset in all three directions.
Axis End
An axis end frame connection aligns the cardinal point on the supported member system
with the cardinal point on the supporting member system. Use this frame connection when
both member systems are of the same type (both members are columns, or both members
are beams). If you move one member system end, this frame connection automatically
moves the other member system end to maintain the connection. You can specify an
optional offset in all three directions. Use this frame connection for column splices.
The Axis End frame connection makes the members mutually editable.
For example, if you move one member, the other member will extend or shorten to maintain

Structure Workflow
the connection. Because of this, if you change the permission group of one member, the
software automatically changes the permission group of the other member to match.
Centerline
A centerline frame connection uses the supporting member's centerline to position the
supported member.
Flush
A flush frame connection uses the supporting member's top and bottom extent to position
the supported member. The supported member typically lies within the body of the
supporting member.
Seated
A seated frame connection uses the supporting member's top or bottom extent to position
the supported member. The supported member typically rests against the supporting
member, but can be offset.
Gap
A gap connection defines offsets between members to provide clearance for welding or
simply as a work point adjustment. Smart 3D can calculate the offset either axially along or
radially around the support member. You must use the More... option and select the gap
frame connection that you want to use. The software will not pick a gap frame connection
when using the By Rule connection option.
There are three members in a gap frame connection:
 The target member is the member always to move and is the owner of the frame
connection. The target member is shown as blue in the figure below.
 The primary member is the member to which the other two members are attached. The
primary member is shown as red in the figure below.

Structure Workflow
 The secondary member is the third member in the joint. The software does not require
the secondary member to be in the same plane as the target member. The secondary
member is shown as orange in the figure below.
There are four gap frame connections available:

 Radial Gap Single - Moves the target member radial around the primary member. The
gap is measured between the target and the secondary member.
 Radial Gap Both - Moves two target members radial around the primary member. The
gap is measured between the two target members. Both target members' frame
connection on that member end must be Radial Gap Both.
 Axial Gap Single - Move the target member axial along the primary member. The gap
is measured between the target member and the secondary member.
 Axial Gap Both - Moves two target members axial along a primary member. The gap is
measured between the two target members. Both target members' frame connection on
that member end must be Axial Gap Both. For example, for chevron bracing you must
define the Axial Gap Both frame connection for the ends of both braces for which you
want define the gap. Then edit the properties of the Axial Gap Both frame connection to
define the needed gap distance. The software recognizes the other brace frame
connection is also an Axial Gap Both frame connection and moves both brace ends half
the defined gap distance to achieve the gap.
Surface
A surface connection specifies the relationship between a supported member and the
surface of the supporting object.

Structure Workflow
Tangent
A tangent connection specifies a relationship between a supported member (1) and a
supporting member (2). A circle, whose radius you define (3), is projected out from the
centerline of the supporting member. The supported member is then made tangent to that
circle. You can also control the plane of the tangent circle.
Vertical Corner Brace

A vertical corner brace connection specifies the location of a vertical brace that frames into a
column-beam corner. You can define offsets in the X, Y, and Z-directions, and there are six
work points to select from when using this connection.
Unsupported
An unsupported connection allows you to place a member end in free space. The top ends
of columns have the unsupported frame connection.
Member Associativity
Members connected to other members using the Axis-Along, Seated, Centerline, Flush, and
Tangent frame connections use the Ratio option for Position Rule to maintain the position
relationship between the supported and supporting members.
A Surface frame connection maintains the current direction of the member if the opposite
member end (regardless of the frame connection at that end) is moved.

Structure Workflow
Selection of Frame Connections

During the placement of linear members, you can have the software determine frame
connections by selecting the By Rule option. The software uses these rules based on supported
member type category, type, permission group, and geometry as it connects to the supporting
member to select frame connections:
 When the member connects to non-member objects, the software selects the "Unsupported"
frame connection unless the non-member object is a surface, in which case Surface-
Default is chosen.
 When a member connects to a single member, the software selects Axis Along unless:
 The two members are end-matched and either the member being placed is a Brace
member type or the member types and categories are the same, then the software
selects Axis End.
 The member being placed has a member type of Girt or Purlin and the two members
are not parallel, then the software selects Seated-Top.
 When placing a member and you select another member's frame connection as the end
point, the software reads both the frame connection's member and its optional supporting
member. If the member being placed is coplanar with those two members, then the software
selects Vertical Corner Brace- WP2.
 When placing a member and you select a split connection as the end point, the software
reads the two members related to the split connection. If the member being placed is
coplanar with those two members, then the software selects Vertical Corner Brace-WP2.
Locating Frame Connections

Frame connections do not display in the model except during member placement. However, if
you set the Locate Filter to Frame Connections, you can locate and select frame connections
for review and editing. Frame connections are located near the ends of member systems and
appear as circles when you move the cursor over them.
When you select a frame connection, the software displays the frame connection type in the
ribbon. Select the Edit > Properties command to edit the frame connection properties. You
cannot copy a frame connection using the Edit > Copy command nor can you use a frame
connection to measure distance using the Tools > Measure command.
See Also
Members (on page 22)
Edit a Frame Connection (on page 57)

Structure Workflow

Member assembly connections are similar to frame connections, but define the necessary
trimming between member parts and the generation of parts such as base plates, gusset plates,
and clip angles. Assembly connections control member features including cutbacks, copes,
notches, bolt holes, and slots. Whether or not features are placed depends on the member
assembly connection type and the geometry of the connection between the members.
There are several basic assembly connections delivered with the software. You can create your
own assembly connections by editing the StructAssemblyConnections.xls workbook, and
then bulk loading the workbook. For more information on creating your own assembly
connections, see the Structure Reference Data Guide.
For very complex nodal connections, instead of writing a custom assembly
connection, you might want to try Trim Members (on page 201) in the Structure task.
The following general assembly connections are delivered with the software:
The base plate assembly connection places a plate at the end of an

unsupported member. This assembly connection requires an
unsupported frame connection on one member. For example, use this
assembly connection to place a base plate at the bottom of a column.
The corner gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical brace

to a beam and column intersection using a gusset plate. This assembly
connection requires a frame connection with three members, such as
vertical corner brace.
The fitted assembly connection connects two members. This assembly

connection requires a frame connection with two members, such as axis,
seated, or flush. Examples of this connection include a beam framing into
a column or a beam framing into another beam.
The gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical or horizontal

brace to a beam or a vertical brace to a column using a gusset plate. This
assembly connection requires a frame connection with two members,
such as axis.

Structure Workflow
The miter assembly connection connects two members that meet at an

angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection requires a frame
connection with two members, such as axis. In addition, the members
must be end connected.
The splice assembly connection connects two members that are collinear
and end connected. This assembly connection requires a frame
connection with two members, such as axis.
The general surface assembly connection connects a member end with a

nonmember surface such as a slab, a deck, or a hull plate. The member
is cut to surface and a base plate is placed on the member end.
End Cut Assembly Connections

The following end cut assembly connections are delivered with the software:
The end cut along assembly connection cuts the end of one member to
the sides or bottom of another member along the second member's
length.
The end cut bearing plate assembly connection connects the end of a
member along the axis of another member. This is typically used to
attach the end of a member to the flange of the supporting member. The
bearing plate connection works at any angle and provides circular,
rectangular, and triangular bearing plates depending on the supported
member's shape.
The end cut miter assembly connection connects two members that meet
at an angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection required a frame

Structure Workflow
The end cut split assembly connection connects two members that are
collinear and end connected. This assembly connection requires a frame
The end cut split long box assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are perpendicular to each other. The
supporting member is cut square to the supported member while an item
from the Axis category is placed on the supported member.
The end cut split seam angle assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are:
 member axes are collinear to each other
 have identical cross-section type and size
 have identical cardinal point and rotation values
The end cut split short box assembly connection is used when the
supported member is cut square to the supporting member while an item
from the Axis category is placed on the supporting member.
End Cut Assembly Naming Conventions

Each end cut assembly connection name consists of three parts:
[EndCutCase]_[WebCutType]_[FlangeCutType]
where:
 [EndCutCase]
 Axis - Supported member is bounded by the axis curve of the supporting member
 LongBox - End-to-end perpendicular supported member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supporting member
 ShortBox - End-to-end perpendicular supporting member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supported member
 Miter - End-to-end non-collinear
 Split - End-to-end collinear
 SeamAngle - End-to-end collinear where one end is extended
 [WebCutType]
The WebCutType is used to type of web cut that is to be applied at the top of the web and at
the bottom of the web. The following combinations are available (W indicates a straight cut,
C indicates a Cope cut, and S indicates a Snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#C#
 W#S#
 C#C#

Structure Workflow
 C#S#
 C#W#
 S#S#
 S#C#
 S#W#
 [FlangeCutType]
The FlangeCutType is used to type of flange cut that is to be applied at the left flange
section and at the right flange section. The following combinations are available (W
indicates a straight cut, C indicates a cope cut, and S indicates a snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#S#
 S#S#
 S#W#
You cannot apply different flange cuts when the supported member has both a top flange and a
bottom flange. In these cases, the same flange cut type is applied to both the top and bottom
flange.
You cannot apply different web cuts or flange cuts in the end-to-end cases. The end-to-end
cases place a web cut and flange cut on both the supported member and the supporting
member. For these cases, the same web cut and flange cut are applied to both the supported
member and the supporting member.
1 - Top left flange

2 - Top right flange
3 - Web top
4 - Web bottom
5 - Bottom right flange
6 - Bottom left flange
See Members (on page 22) in the Structure task for important related information.
Locating Assembly Connections

Assembly connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to
Member Assembly Connections in the Structure task, you can locate and select assembly
connections for review and editing. Assembly connections are located at the ends of member

Structure Workflow
parts and appear as circles when you move the cursor over them. Any assembly components,
such as gusset plates, associated with the assembly connection also highlight.
When you select an assembly connection, the software displays the assembly connection type
in the ribbon. Select the Edit > Properties command to edit the assembly connection
properties. You cannot measure distances using the assembly connection graphic as an end
point when using the Tools > Measure command.

Slab assembly connections are similar to member assembly connections, but define the
trimming and edges of slabs. Slab assembly connections are placed automatically when the
slab is created.
The slab assembly connections are:
 The Slab by Member Boundary assembly connection is placed by the software when you
select a member as a slab boundary.
 The Slab Free Edge Assembly connection is placed by the software when you select a grid
line as a slab boundary.
If a slab's bounding object (for example a member, a wall, or another slab) is deleted, then that
deleted object is replaced as a boundary by the slab assembly connection which is generated
from that deleted object. This behavior keeps the slab from going to the To Do List as missing a
boundary.
In addition, if you copy, move, or mirror a wall (including Model Data Reuse operations) and an
object which was connected to the wall is not in the copy set and the Delete optional option is
selected, the software changes the wall assembly connection for the missing object to be a Wall
Free Edge Assembly connection. This prevents the wall from going to the To Do List with a
"Wall is missing a boundary Select a valid boundary" message. Be aware that copying or
moving a wall with the Delete optional option selected can cause the geometry of the wall to
extend or shorten.

Structure Workflow
This geometry change impacts the use of the Validate Model Data Reuse
Results command because the geometry of the wall is different between the original wall and
the new wall.
Locating Slab Assembly Connections

Assembly connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to Slab
Assembly Connections, you can locate and select assembly connections for review and
editing. Assembly connections are located at the edges of slabs.
properties.

SECTION 3
Place Linear Member Systems

Places a linear member in the model. You can
place beams, columns, braces, truss elements, or
cable member types using this command. You can
place standard members (rolled shapes) or
designed members (built-up shapes). For
additional information, see Members (on page 22).
Use this command when you want to place
members by specifying the exact start and end
points.
 You can define custom member types by

editing the Structural Member Type select list
in the Catalog task.
 When a linear member system is connected
directly to another member, a frame connection
is created. If detailed trimming is needed in a
plant database, use the Trim Member or Place Assembly Connection . If detailed
trimming of the members is needed in a marine database, use Place Member Generic
Assembly Connection in the Molded Forms or Structural Detailing task.
 When a linear member system is connected to a plate system or edge reinforcement
system, the member is trimmed to the plate and a generic assembly connection is created.
In marine mode, the bounding ports can be modified with Place Member Generic
Assembly Connection in the Molded Forms or Structural Detailing task. For more
information, see Place Member Generic Assembly Connection.
Place Linear Member System Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the member that you are placing. When editing a member part, this
ribbon changes. For more information on the properties that are available when you are
modifying a member part, see Modify Linear Member Part Ribbon.
Member Properties
Activates the Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 61). You can use
this dialog box to specify additional member properties that you cannot set on the ribbon,
such as material, material grade, and end releases. Because changes made on the ribbon,
such as to the Type Category, can affect or reset properties in the dialog box, we
recommend that you set properties in this dialog box after you have made your selections
from the ribbon.
Start
Specify the start location of the member. After placing the first member, click Start to select
the discrete placement method. For more information about discrete placement, see
Members (on page 22).

End
Specify the end location of the member. After placing the first member, click End to select
the contiguous placement method. For more information about contiguous placement, see
Enter AMP
Activates the Advanced Member Positioning Ribbon, which you can use when you want to
place a member at the intersection of three objects and maintain the relationship to those
objects. For example, a column that needs to stay over two walls, or bulkheads, on a lower
level. You must select the Align-Default or Align-Lapped frame connections from the
Connection box to use the advanced member positioning options.
Finish
Click to place the member in the model. Finish is active only when Finish Mode is
selected.
Finish Mode
Specify whether or not Finish must be selected to place a member in the model. If the
Finish Mode is selected, the software places the member in tentative mode after you
identify the second end point. This tentative mode allows you to modify placement settings
such as the offset, cardinal point, or frame connection properties before you commit the
member to the model. If the Finish Mode is not selected, then the software automatically
places the member in the model after you identify the second end point.
Connection
Select the frame connection type to use for the member that you are placing. If you select
By Rule, the software determines the frame connection to use based on the geometry
between the member that you are placing and existing members in the model. If you select
More, all available frame connections display from which you can select the frame
connection to use. For more information about frame connections, see Frame Connections
(on page 24). This option is not available if you are editing an existing member. You can
change the frame connection later by editing the frame connection directly.
Connection Properties
Activates the Connection Properties dialog box, which is used to specify properties for the
active frame connection. The properties that appear in this dialog box are described under
the Connection Properties section.
System
Select the system to which the member belongs. You can define new systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box in Place
Linear Member Systems (on page 35).
Type Category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You
can define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in
the Catalog task.

Type
Specifies the type of member, such as a beam or column. The available member properties
change depending on the member type that you select. This property is a hierarchical child
of Type Category. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Type
select list in Catalog.
Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the member. If you know the section name, type it in. You can
use the asterisk [*] character wildcard to see all sections that contain that text. For example,
type W10X* to see all W10X sections in the catalog. Select More to browse the catalog for
the section to use. Sections are defined in the reference data. See Structure Reference
Data Guide for more information about reference data.
Cardinal Point
Displays the relative position of the structural cross-section to the
member placement line. Nine cardinal positions (1 -9) are available. The
location of cardinal points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center)
depend on the section shape. The local z-axis of the member and the
center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 11 and 14.
The local y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the
section define cardinal points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10 through 15
are unavailable for designed members or cans.
Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the cross-section is rotated about the
member axis. The zero-degree position is either the Z-axis or the X-axis of the active
coordinate system depending on the member orientation. The active coordinate system is
set using the Coordinate System control in PinPoint . The Angle property is not used
when placing members using the Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This
parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of
when to use this option would be when you want the flanges of a channel
section to point in the opposite direction. The Reflect property is not
available when editing members that have Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.

The Connection Properties appear only when
you have selected the Connection Properties
option. Connection properties change depending
on the frame connection specified in the
Connection option. To see the frame connection
properties for the start of the member, select .
To see the frame connection properties for the end
of the member, select . Click to see a
preview of the frame connection. The frame
connection type appears in the upper left corner of
the dialog box.
The supported member is the member that
you are placing. The supporting member is the
existing member in the model to which you are
connecting.
Seated, Flush, and Centerline Frame Connection Properties

Side
Select the side of the supporting member on which you want to place the supported
member.
Offset
Specify the distance to place the supported member from the supporting member. For
seated and flush frame connections, the offset is between the side of the supporting
member that you specified with the Side option and the supported member's side that you
specify with the Edge option. For centerline frame connections, the offset is between
centerline of the supporting member and the supported member's side that you specify with
the Edge option.
Edge
Specifies the side of the supported member's cross-section that is
mated to the supporting member. You can specify Top, Right,
Bottom, or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the
figure.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section of the supported member
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. For
example, when you place a supported member with an angle
cross-section using the left edge option and you want the angle
facing the other direction.
Axis Frame Connection Properties

X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Y Offset

Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values. Local is the local coordinate
system of the supporting member.
Supporting CP
Specifies to which cardinal point on the supporting member system to align the supported
member system's cardinal point. You can specify any cardinal point number, or select 0 to
use the cardinal point with which the supporting member was placed.
Surface Frame Connection Properties

X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values.
Vertical Corner Brace Frame Connection Properties

X Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Select whether the offset values are defined relative to the global coordinate system or the
member's local coordinate system.
Work Point
Specifies the work point location. There are six work point locations that you can select.

1 - Primary Center - Secondary Far Side

2 - Primary Center - Secondary Center
3 - Primary Center - Secondary Near Side
4 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Far Side
5 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Center
6 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Near Side
Modify Linear Member Part Ribbon

Displays the member part properties that you are editing when you select one or more linear
member parts.
Member Properties
Activates the Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 67). You can use this
dialog box to specify additional member part properties, such as material, material grade,
and end releases, which you cannot set on the ribbon.
Start
End
Convert
Translates a member part to have a single stand-alone member system. This option is only
available when you select a member part that belongs to a member system that has been
split.
When you place a member system, that member system has a single member part
associated with it (for more information, see Members (on page 22)). Using the Place Splits
(on page 191), you can split that single member part into multiple member parts that are
each still associated with the original single member system.
If you want to delete or modify only one of the member parts, you must delete the member
system and all the other member parts. Deleting a member part deletes its parent member
system which causes the sibling member parts to be deleted. However, using the Convert
option you can cause a member part to have its own, new parent member system. You can
then delete or otherwise modify that member part without affecting the other member parts
of the original member system.
The software automatically translates the relevant split connections into frame connections.
Permission groups of the original member system are used for the new member system.
System
workspace or the model. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box in Place

Type Category
the Catalog task.
Type
Section Name
Cardinal Point
Angle
Reflect
Advanced Member Positioning Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the member that you are placing using the advanced member
positioning option. When editing a member part, this ribbon changes. For more information on
the properties that are available when you are modifying a member part, see Modify Linear
Member Part Ribbon in Place Linear Member Systems (on page 35).
Member Properties

Activates the Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 61). You can use
this dialog box to specify additional member properties that you cannot set on the ribbon,
such as material, material grade, and end releases. Because changes made on the ribbon,
such as to the Type Category, can affect or reset properties in the dialog box, we
recommend that you set properties in this dialog box after you have made your selections
from the ribbon.
Start
End
Exit AMP
Exits the advanced member positioning ribbon, and returns you to the standard member
controls.
Activates the Connection Properties dialog box, which is used to specify properties for the
active frame connection. The properties that appear in this dialog box are described below
in the Connection Properties section.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available. For more information,
see [Product Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when
Programming Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the bounding object.
2
Specifies the align object.
3

Specifies the intersect object.
Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:
 - No background color when there is no input.
 - Yellow background when an input is selected.
 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:
When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.
 and - Yellow background when you change a value.
 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Bound Offset
Type an offset distance for the point from the bound surface. This offset is in addition to the
ratio you defined.
Bound Ratio
Type the ratio of the plate's thickness to the point position. Type 0 to place the point on the
molded-form surface. Type 1 to place the point on the anti-molded-form surface. Entering a
ratio of 0.5 centers the point between the two surfaces.
Bound Orient
Specifies how to interpret the bounding object for advanced member positioning. Select
Primary to evaluate along the primary axis. Select Secondary to evaluate along the
secondary axis. See Orient Options below.
Align Offset
Type an offset distance for the point from the align surface. This offset is in addition to the
ratio you defined.
Align Ratio
molded-form surface. Type 1 to place the point on the anti-molded-form surface. Entering a

Align Orient
Specifies how to interpret the align object for advanced member positioning. Select Primary
to evaluate along the primary axis. Select Secondary to evaluate along the secondary axis.
See Orient Options below.
Intersect Offset
Type an offset distance for the point from the intersect surface. This offset is in addition to
the ratio you defined.
Intersect Ratio
molded-form surface. Type 1 to place the point on the anti-molded-form surface. Typing a
Intersect Orient
Specifies how to interpret the intersect object for advanced member positioning. Select
Primary to evaluate along the primary axis. Select Secondary to evaluate along the
secondary axis. See Orient Options below.
Orient Options
Specifies if the profile is interpreted along its primary orientation or its secondary orientation. If
along the primary orientation, then 0.0 is the red surface and 1.0 is the black surface. If along
the secondary orientation, then 0.0 is the green surface and 1.0 is the blue surface.
Tee
Includes W, S, and M types and fabricated Ts
I-beams

Includes W and S types.
Angle
Includes equal and unequal leg angles.
Fabricated Angle

Flat Bar
Channel
Bulb

Rectangular Tube
Half Round and Round Bar
Round Tube (Pipe)

Round Tube has no faces defined along the secondary orientation.
The Connection Properties appear only when you have selected the Connection Properties
option. Connection properties change depending on the frame connection specified in the
Connection option. To see the frame connection properties for the start of the member, select
. To see the frame connection properties for the end of the member, select . Click to see
a preview of the frame connection. The frame connection type appears in the upper left corner
of the dialog box.
The supported member is the member that you are placing. The supporting member is
the existing member in the model to which you are connecting.
Align-Default/Lapped Frame Connection Properties

Side Justification
Select the side of the plane on which to place the member.
 None - Aligns the member axis so that it is placed on the surface.
 Seated - Sets the member on top of the surface. The selected Orientation Side is
nearest the surface.

 Center - The center of the cross-section is placed on the surface. The center is
calculated by the top-bottom, left-right bounds of the cross-section shape.
 Flush - Uses the alignment surface's top and bottom extent to position the supported
member. The supported member typically lies within the body of the alignment plane
with one edge of the member flush with the alignment surface but can be offset.
Orientation Control
If On, the member angle is controlled by the Orientation Angle value defined for the Align
frame connection. If Off, you can set the angle of the member independently of the align
surface by using the Rotation property for the member part.
Orientation Side
mated to the alignment surface. You can specify Top, Right, Bottom,
or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the figure.
Orientation Angle
When Orientation Control is On, this angle is added to the selected Orientation Side to
rotate the member. If the Align frame connection is used on both ends of the member and
you define a different angle value for each end, the angle defined at the start end of the
member is used.
Reflect
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. An
example of when to use this option is when you place a
supported member with an angle cross-section using the left
edge option and you want the angle facing the other direction.
Extend Distance
Specifies the offset distance from the bounding surface along the member's axis.
Side Clearance
Specify the offset distance perpendicular to the align surface to place the member axis.
Lateral Distance
Specifies the offset distance in the plane of the align surface to place the member axis.

Select System Dialog Box

This dialog box displays when you select the More... option in the System list. Use this dialog
box to select the system that you want. You can create new systems in the Systems and
Specifications task.
Look in
Specify where you want to look for the system. Select Workspace to look for the system in
your defined workspace only. Select Database to look for the system in the entire Model
database.
Select Section Dialog Box

Allows selection of the type of section to be placed. This dialog box appears when you click the
More option on the Section Name list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any

section in the Catalog database. After you select a section, the software returns you to the
model, where you can finalize placement.
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected section. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the section is placed, all properties on the dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected section. The image file must be assigned to the section in
the reference data.
Filter
Allows you to filter catalog data to help find the subset of data that you want to work with,
similar to Microsoft Excel.
Sort
Sorts the catalog data by column to help you find like items.
Customize Current View
Defines with columns in the data you want to see.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display sections in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display sections in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected section type or node. Use this command to navigate
through the hierarchy to the specific type that you need.

Forward
Sends you to the last selected section type or node that you moved away from by using the
Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific type that
you need.
Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the catalog hierarchy. Use this command to navigate
Address
Specifies your exact location within the displayed hierarchy.
What do you want to do?

 Place members using discrete placement (on page 54)
 Place members using contiguous placement (on page 55)
 Place a member using finish mode (on page 56)
 Edit member system properties (on page 57)
 Edit member part properties (on page 57)
 Edit a frame connection (on page 57)
 Delete a member system (on page 57)
 Convert a member part (on page 58)
 Modify the cardinal point of a member (on page 58)
 Modify the end releases of a member (on page 58)
 Modify the angle of a member (on page 59)
 Modify the cross-section of a member (on page 59)
 Modify the material of a member (on page 59)
 Modify the material grade of a member (on page 59)
 Modify the type of member (on page 60)
 Move a member (on page 60)
 Move one end of a member (on page 60)
 Move one end of multiple members

Place members using discrete placement

1. Click Place Linear Member System on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Connection box, select a frame connection type.
If you are unsure of which frame connection type to use, review Frame Connections
(on page 24). You can also select the By Rule option to allow the software to select
automatically a frame connection type.
3. In the Type category box, select the member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the member type to place.
5. Specify the start location, or first point, of the member.
You can use the frame connection of another member as the start or end location of
the member that you are placing.
6. Specify the end location, or second point, of the member.
7. Click Start to specify the start location of the next member.

8. Specify the start location of the next member.
 To find the intersection of grid lines easily, click Tools > Options to verify that the
SmartSketch Intersection option is selected.
 You can set the beta angle relative to your rotated coordinate system by activating PinPoint
and selecting the rotated coordinated system as the active coordinate system in the
Coordinate System box.

Place members using contiguous placement

(on page 24). You can also select the By Rule option to allow the software automatically to
select a frame connection type.
7. Click End to activate the contiguous placement mode.

8. Specify the end location of the next member.
To find the intersection of grid lines easily, click Tools > Options to verify that the
Place a member using finish mode

(on page 24). You can also select the By Rule option to allow the software to select
automatically a frame connection type.
3. Click Finish Mode to activate the Finish button.
4. Click Connection Properties to activate the Connection Properties dialog box.
9. Edit the start and end frame connection properties in the Connection Properties dialog
box.
10. Edit the member properties using the Member Properties dialog box.
11. Click Finish.
 To find the intersection of grid lines easily, click Tools > Options to verify that the
 You can set the beta angle relative to your rotated coordinate system by activating PinPoint
and selecting the rotated coordinated system as the active coordinate system in the
Coordinate System box.

Edit member system properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Members System in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the member system to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about properties, see Member System
Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 61).
Edit member part properties

2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the member part to edit.
5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about properties, see Member Part
Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 67).
Edit a frame connection

2. Select Frame Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the frame connection to edit.
4. Edit the frame connection as needed. For more information about frame connection
properties, see Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 99).
Delete a member system

2. Select Members System in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the members to delete.
4. Click Delete .
 All loads and boundary conditions placed in the Structural Analysis task on the deleted
member system are also deleted. This could affect any Analytical Models that have been
exported.
 All footings associated with the member system are also deleted.

 Ladders or stairs using the deleted member system as the defined top edge are sent to the
To Do List.
Convert a member part

3. Select a member part to have its own member system.
4. Click Convert on the ribbon.
Modify the cardinal point of a member

3. Select the member part to modify.
4. Using the Cardinal Point control on the ribbon bar, select a new cardinal point for the
member part.
There are 15 cardinal positions available. The location of cardinal
points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center) depend on the section
shape. The local z-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the
section define cardinal points 11 and 14. The local y-axis of the member
and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 12 and
13.
Modify the end releases of a member

3. Select a member to modify.
4. Click Member Properties on the ribbon.
5. Select the Member Part tab.
6. In the Category box, select End Releases.
7. Modify the member part end releases as required.

Modify the angle of a member

4. Using the Angle control on the ribbon bar, edit the member angle.
You can set the beta angle relative to your rotated coordinate system by activating
PinPoint and selecting the rotated coordinated system as the active coordinate system
in the Coordinate System box.
Modify the cross-section of a member

4. Using the Section name box on the ribbon bar, type the new cross-section name for the
member, or select More to select the cross-section from the Catalog.
Modify the material of a member

5. Select the Cross Section tab.
6. Select a new value for the Material property.
Modify the material grade of a member

5. Select the Cross Section tab.
6. Select a new value for the Grade property.

Modify the type of member

4. Using the Type Category and Type controls on the ribbon bar, change the type of the
member part.
If the member type category or type that you want to use is not available, you can add
it by editing the Structural Member Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and
bulkloading it into the Catalog database. For more information on editing the workbook and bulk
loading, see the Smart 3D Reference Data Guide.
Move a member
3. Select a member to move.
4. Click Move on the main ribbon.
5. Define the first point of a vector used to move the member.
6. Define the second point of the vector.
The frame connections might prevent you from moving the member as you would like.
For example, a supported member has a seated frame connection to a supporting member. The
seated frame connection prevents you from moving the supported member off of the supporting
member. You can, however, slide the supported member along the supporting member as long
as the seated frame connection is still valid. Consider copying and pasting a member that you
want to move, and then deleting the original.
Move one end of a member

2. Select Frame Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the frame connection that is near the member end to move.

4. In the Connection option, select By Rule.

5. Define the new location for the member end.
Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the standard member or designed member that you are editing. For
an explanation of the difference between a standard member and a designed member, see
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 61)
Relationship Tab (on page 63)
Configuration Tab (on page 64)
Notes Tab (on page 65)
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the properties for the member system.
Category
Select the properties to view for the member system.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the member system. The member system name is based on the
Name Rule selection. If you want to type a new name for the member system, in the Name
Rule box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the member system in the Name
box. If you change the Type Category of the member system after defining a custom name,
the name resets to the default name for the new member type.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this member system.
MemberSystemTypeNameRule - Names the member system using this method: <member
type>-<location>-<index number> where <member type> is the selected Type property,
<location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index number> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example: Purlin-1-0003.
Default Name Rule - Names the member system using this method: MemberSystem-
<location>-<index number> where <location> is the global workshare location ID and <index
number> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For example: MemberSystem-1-

0045.
Unique Name Rule - Names the member system using this method: <parent system>-
MemberSystem-<location>-<index number> where <parent system> is the name of the
parent system that the Member System belongs to, <location> is the global workshare
location ID, and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For example:
Structure System-MemberSystem-1-0001.
User Defined - Select this name rule to name the member system yourself using the Name
box.
Parent System
Select the system to which the member system that you are placing belongs.
Type category
the Catalog task.
Type
Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object system. Smart 3D uses the priority to group
objects. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Priority select list in
Catalog.
Continuity Type
Indicates the way in which the object system reacts when the system intersects another
object system (your automatic splitting preference). The list is defined by the
StructContinuity codelist.
Continuous indicates that the object system should split the other object system.
Intercostal indicates that the object system should be split by the other object system.
You cannot split objects that have a Continuity Type setting of Continuous.
Continuity Priority Number
Specifies the priority when two profile systems that have the same Continuity setting
intersect. The profile system with the lowest continuity priority number penetrates the other
system. For example, two profile systems intersect and the Continuity setting of each set to
Continuous. The profile system with the lowest Continuity Priority number splits the other
profile system. You can only modify this property at the root system.
Align
Indicates whether the software copies offsets from the frame connection at the member
system end to the unsupported frame connection at the other member system end.
True indicates that Smart 3D copies the offsets.
False indicates the Smart 3D does not copy the offsets.

Start East / Start X

Displays the X-coordinates of the start of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
Start North / Start Y
Displays the Y-coordinates of the start of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
Start Elevation / Start Z
Displays the Z-coordinates of the start of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
End East / End X
Displays the X-coordinates of the end of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
End North / End Y
Displays the Y-coordinates of the end of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
End Elevation / End Z
Displays the Z-coordinates of the end of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
Relationship Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, appear on this tab.
Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:
 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object. To change the options on the list, edit the Weld Type select list
in Catalog.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Plant
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the filters and surface style rules.
Approval State
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your
access level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by
the ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date when the object was last modified.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location with which the current permission group is associated. All
of the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group with which the selected objects are currently
associated. If all of the objects in the select set do not belong to the same permission group,
this box appears blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a global
workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one
or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you specify a
value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups to which you have
write access in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the New location box,
this list includes all permission groups to which you have write access in all locations except
the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any permission
groups at any locations other than the current one.
We strongly recommend that administrators follow naming convention rules that
include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.
Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on
an object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.

Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component.
It is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in
this version.
Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the member part of the standard member that you are editing. For an
explanation of the difference between a member system and a member part, see Members (on
page 22).
Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 67)
Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 73)
Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the properties for the member.
Category
Select the properties to view for the member. Member part properties are divided into
several different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, Fabrication and Construction,
Surface Treatment and Coating, Responsibility, and End Releases. You select which
category that you want to define values for by using the Category option.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the member part. The member part name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you want to type a new name for the member part, in the Name Rule box,
select User Defined, and then type a name for the member part in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this member part.
 Member Part Type Name Rule - Names the member part using this method: <member
type>-<location>-<index number> where <member type> is the selected Type property,
<location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index number> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example: Beam-1-0003.
 Default Name Rule - Names the member part using this method:
MemberPartPrismatic-<location>-<index number> where <location> is the global
workshare location ID and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at
0001. For example: MemberPartPrismatic-1-0045.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the member part using this method:
MemberPartPrismatic-<location>-<index number> where <location> is the global
workshare location ID and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at
0001. For example: MemberPartPrismatic-1-0045.
 User Defined - Select this name rule to name the member system yourself using the
Name box.
If you plan to export this model to Tekla Structures using CIMsteel, you must
know that Tekla limits part names to 21 characters. If you use a Smart 3D naming rule that
creates a member part name that is longer than 21 characters, Tekla truncates the name

during the CIMSteel import into Tekla. This truncation can cause all your member parts to
have the same name in Tekla because Smart 3D naming rules have the unique index at the
end of the name.
Parent System
Specifies the name of the parent system. You can define new systems in the Systems and
Type category
the Catalog task.
Type
the Catalog task.
Priority
Catalog.
Length
Displays the length of the member without cutbacks applied. You cannot change this value.
Cut Length
Specifies the length of the member with cutbacks applied. You cannot change this value. A
cutback is that part of a member removed by an assembly connection or by a manually
placed trim (a cope, for example).
Reporting Requirements
Specify whether this object is reported.
Reporting Type
Select the reporting requirements code for the object. Valid codes are defined in Catalog in
the Reporting Type select list.
Piece Mark
Specifies the piece mark of the member. Piece marks are typically used when importing and
exporting member through CIMsteel. If a piece mark displays, the mark is usually the
identity of the manufactured part from the other software package.
Assembly Mark
Specifies the assembly mark of the member. If the member was imported through CIMsteel,
the assembly mark is usually the identity of the manufactured assembly to which this
member belongs.
Seam Angle
Defines the location of the seam. This angle is measured clockwise from orientation vector

of the member looking down the member from the start end.
Seam Angle is only available on cross-sections that use the Has Seam definition. Refer to
the Smart 3D Symbol 2D User's Guide and Symbol 2D Reference Data Guide for more
information about cross-sections.
Weight and CG
Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the selected object. The center-of-gravity
locations are displayed relative to the active coordinate system along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
The weight value that is displayed in the properties dialog box is calculated as the material
density multiplied by the object's solid volume. Therefore, the material of the object affects the
weight value that is displayed here. Check the material assigned to the object if the weight
displayed is an improbable value. For the most accurate weight calculation, use the Tools >
Run Reports command.
Dry Weight
Specifies the dry weight of the object.
Wet Weight
Specifies the wet weight of the object.
For equipment, the Weight and CG property Wet Weight is the sum of Dry
Weight and Water Weight. The dry weight and water weight values are catalog properties
entered on the part sheet for the equipment.
Dry CG X
Specifies the X-axis location of the dry center-of-gravity.
Dry CG Y
Specifies the Y-axis location of the dry center-of-gravity.
Dry CG Z
Specifies the Z-axis location of the dry center-of-gravity.
Wet CG X
Specifies the X-axis location of the wet center-of-gravity.
Wet CG Y
Specifies the Y-axis location of the wet center-of-gravity.

Wet CG Z
Specifies the Z-axis location of the wet center-of-gravity.
Dry WCG Origin
Specifies the way in which the dry weight center-of-gravity location is defined. The list is
defined by the WCGOrigin codelist.
Computed indicates that the software calculates the origin location.
Defined indicates that you want to manually define the dry weight center-of-gravity location
relative to the active coordinate system.
Wet WCG Origin
Specifies the way in which the wet weight center-of-gravity location is defined. The list is
Defined indicates that you want to manually define the wet weight center-of-gravity location
Fabrication and Construction

Fabrication Requirement
Specifies the fabrication requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Fabrication Type select list in Catalog.
Fabrication Type
Specifies the type of fabrication for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Fabrication Type select list in Catalog.
Construction Requirement
Specifies the construction requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Construction Requirement select list in Catalog.
Construction Type
Specifies the type of construction for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Construction Type select list in Catalog.
Surface Treatment and Coating

Exterior Coating Requirement
Specifies the coating requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Coating Type select list in Catalog.
Exterior Coating Type
Specifies the type of coating for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Coating Color
Specifies the color of the object coating. To change the options on the list, edit the Coating
Color select list in Catalog. Smart 3D includes this property in the painting area report.
Exterior Coating Area

Specifies the area of the coating for the object.
Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for cleaning the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Cleaning Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Design Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for designing the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Design Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Fabrication Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for fabricating the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Fabrication Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Installation Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for installing the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Installation Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Painting Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for painting the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Painting Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Requisition Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for ordering the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Requisition Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Supply Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for delivering the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Supply Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Testing Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for testing on the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Testing Responsibility select list in Catalog.
End Releases
Start Member Release
Select the directions to release at the start of the member part. Directions are defined in the
local coordinate system of the member system. If the combination of directions is not
available, select the User Defined option and define the releases yourself.
Start X Displacement
Defines if the X direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Y Displacement
Defines if the Y direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Z Displacement
Defines if the Z direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.

Start X Rotation
Defines if the X moment direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Y Rotation
Defines if the Y moment direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Z Rotation
Defines if the Z moment direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
End Member Release
Select the directions to release at the end of the member part. Directions are defined in the
local coordinate system of the member system. If the combination of directions is not
available, select the User Defined option and define the releases yourself.
End X Displacement
Defines if the X direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Y Displacement
Defines if the Y direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Z Displacement
Defines if the Z direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End X Rotation
Defines if the X moment direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Y Rotation
Defines if the Y moment direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Z Rotation
Defines if the Z moment direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
See Also
Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 67)

Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the properties for the cross-section of a standard member part.
Section Standard
Specifies the section library from which you selected the section name. Sections are defined
in the reference data.
Member Section Name
Cardinal Point
Angle
Defines the angle by which the section is rotated about the member axis.
Reflect
Material
Select a material for the member. Materials are defined in the AllCommon.xls workbook or
in the Catalog task.
Grade
Select a material grade for the member. Material grades are defined in the AllCommon.xls
workbook or in the Catalog task.
Centroid X
Displays the location of the centroid along the local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Centroid Y
Displays the location of the centroid along the local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit

workbook.
Moment of Inertia about X (Ixx)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Moment of Inertia about Y (Iyy)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
Warping Statical Moment (Sw)
Displays the warping statical moment. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about X (Sxx)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
Elastic Section Modulus about Y (Syy)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
Torsional Moment of Inertia (J)
Displays the torsional moment of inertia for the section. This property is read- only. To edit
workbook.
Warping Constant (Cw)
Displays the warping constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Flexural Constant (H)
Displays the flexural constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
Polar Radius of Gyration about Shear Center (ro)
Displays the polar radius of gyration about the shear center. This property is read-only. To
Radius of Gyration about X axis (Rxx)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
Radius of Gyration about Y axis (Ryy)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To

Radius of Gyration about Principle XY (Rxy)
Displays the radius of gyration about the principle xy-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about X (Zxx)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
Plastic Section Modulus about Y (Zyy)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only.
Is Hollow
Displays True if the cross-section is hollow, such as a tube or can. Displays False if the
cross-section is solid, such as a bar, or open, such as an I-beam.
Is Symmetric About X
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local x-axis of the cross-section.
Is Symmetric About Y
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local y-axis of the cross-section.
Flange Gage (gf)
Displays the bolt gage for the flange. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog
task or in the corresponding workbook.
Web Gage (gw)
Displays the bolt gage for the web. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog
task or in the corresponding workbook.
Section Name
Specifies the section name. This name displays when you label members. This property is
read-only. To edit this value, edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
Short Name
Displays the short name for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
Alternate EDI Name
Displays the Electronic Data Interchange name for the section. This name is used when
translating sections through CIMsteel. This property is currently not used.
Description
Specifies the description. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the

cross- section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.

Area
Specifies the cross-section area for the object. This property is read-only. To change this
value, edit the object properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Depth
Displays the depth for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Width
Displays the flange width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
Perimeter
Displays the outside perimeter distance for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the weight of the section. The unit weight is defined in mass per length pound per
foot (lbm/ft). This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-
section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Theoretical Maximum Yield Stress (Fy''')
Displays the maximum yield stress for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this
value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
Statical Moment at Point in Flange (Qf)
Displays the first moment of area for the flange. This property is read- only. To edit this
Statical Moment at Mid Depth of Section (Qw)
Displays the first moment of area for the web. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Normalized Warping Function (Wno)
Displays the normalized warping function. The function is defined in square inches or square
millimeters. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-
Beam Buckling Factor (X1)
Displays the beam buckling factor. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Beam Buckling Factor (X2)
Displays the beam buckling factor. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
Web Thickness (tw)

Displays the web thickness for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Web Depth (d)
Displays the web depth. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the
cross- section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Flange Thickness (tf)
Displays the flange thickness for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
workbook.
Flange Width (bf)
Displays the width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
Distance to Web Toe Fillet (kdetail)
Displays the distance from the outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet of the rolled
shape or the equivalent distance on welded section. This property is read-only. To edit this
Distance to Web Toe Fillet (kdesign)
Displays the distance from the outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet of the rolled
shape or the equivalent distance on the welded section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
Group Id
Displays the material group identification for the section. This property is read-only. To edit

Designed Member Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the designed member that you are editing. For an explanation of the
difference between a standard member and a designed member, see Members (on page 22).
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 78)
Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 82)
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the select designed member.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the member. Only Standard properties are
available for designed members.
Show Dimensional Legend
Displays a graphic indicating the different dimensions that can be specified for the selected
designed member.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the designed member. The designed member name is based on the
Name Rule selection. To type a new name for the designed member, select User Defined
in the Name Rule box, and then type a name for the designed member in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this designed member. You can select one of the
listed rules or select User Defined and type the designed member name in the Name box.
Parent System
Section Standard
Member Section Name

Defines the cross-section for the member. If you know the section name that you want, you
can type it. You can use the asterisk [*] character wildcard to see all sections that contain
that text. For example, type BUIH* to see all W10X sections in the catalog. Select More to
browse the catalog for the section to use. Sections are defined in the reference data. For
more information about reference data, see Structure Reference Data Guide.
Cardinal Point
Angle
Reflect
when to use this option is when you want the flanges of a channel section to
point in the opposite direction.
Type category
the Catalog task.
Type
Priority
Catalog.
Centroid X
workbook.
Centroid Y
workbook.

workbook.

workbook.
Is Hollow
Is Symmetric about X
Is Symmetric about Y
Area
Depth
Width
Perimeter
workbook.

Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the properties for the cross-section of a designed member.
Name
Displays the cross-section name for the designed member. Sections are defined in the
reference data. For more information about reference data, see Structure Reference Data
Guide.
Centroid X
workbook.
Centroid Y
workbook.
workbook.


workbook.
Is Hollow
Flange Gage (gf)
Displays the bolt gage for the flange. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Web Gage (gw)
Displays the bolt gage for the web. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to

Plastic Neutral Axis (xp)
Displays the distance from the designated edge of the cross-section's plastic neutral axis
(PNA) along the local x-axis.
Plastic Neutral Axis (yp)
Displays the distance from the designated edge of the cross-section's plastic neutral axis
(PNA) along the local y-axis.
Section Name
Specifies the section name. This name displays when you label members. This property is
read-only. To edit this value, edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
Area
Depth
Width
Perimeter
workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the weight of the section. The unit weight is defined in mass per length pound per
foot (lbm/ft). This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system of the designed member that you are
editing. A designed member contains multiple plate systems that you can individually edit.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.

Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.
 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 85)
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 88)
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box - Designed Member)
(on page 89)
General Tab (on page 94)
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the nonlinear extruded plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from
a copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1

YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1

Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box.
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system name>-
<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned
to Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system.
When a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also
updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified

at the root system.

Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the
same value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property
can only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf
system, and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In
addition, because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve
such invalid connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the
active state, select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system
explicitly. For information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace
Explorer in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:
This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different
from the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the nonlinear extruded plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties

For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:
This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different
from the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties

Dialog Box - Designed Member)
Specifies the plate orientation rules for the plate system of the designed member that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. A plate on a designed member can be
Flange Plate, Web Plate, or Tube Plate. Plate system types are defined by the designed
member cross-section. You cannot change the type.
Flange Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.
Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.
Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.
Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.
Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.
Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed

members.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.
Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.
Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.
Profiles Secondary Orientation

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.
Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.
Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.
Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.
Non-axial Profiles
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.
Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed

member.
Web Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.
Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.
Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.
Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.
Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.
Offset
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.
In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.
Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Axial Profiles
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.
Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the

member plate web.
Non-axial Profiles
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.
Tube Plate Molded Conventions

Plates
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.
Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.
Offset
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Ring Profiles
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.
Axial Profiles
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.
Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis

of the designed tube member.
General Tab
The General tab displays the properties that were selected by you or automatically determined
by the software at creation. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
The properties displayed duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. You can
edit the properties on these tabs.
Plate Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the plate part that you are editing.
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 94)
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 95)
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 96)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 98)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 98)
Routing Tab (on page 98)
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the plate part.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object.
PlatePartRule - Creates a name based on the parent root plate system name, the location
within the parent root plate system, and the parent assembly name.
User Defined - Name the plate part yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the plate part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.

Parent System
Displays the parent system for the object.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Specification
Specifies the specification for the object. This property is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
Tightness
Specifies the water tightness of the object. It is inherited from the parent system.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the material properties for the plate part that you are editing. The material properties
are inherited from the parent system.
Material
Grade
Actual Thickness

Displays the material thickness for the object.
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies general properties of the plate part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
Category: Standard
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 94).
PlateTightness
Specifies the water tightness of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateTightness
codelist.
PlateType
Specifies the type of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateType codelist.
Thickening Technique Requested
Specifies the technique requested to thicken the plate part.
This property affects only the behavior of plate parts derived from systems. The property
defaults to Procedural at creation. Changing the value of this property can affect the
geometry of the part as described below.
Standalone plate parts initially display nothing for this property. You can change the value,
but those changes do not change the part or its geometry. Smart 3D thickens all standalone
plate parts, including collars, using procedural thickening.
Undefined (blank) indicates that Smart 3D selects the appropriate technique. Smart 3D
automatically changes this value to Procedural.
Procedural indicates the part is thickened using the standard thickening method provided
by the ACIS modeler. This works for the vast majority of parts, and you should not change
this value unless there is a specific reason to try a different technique.
If the thickening fails using ACIS, and the part is a hull part, the software
automatically tries the NonProcedural thickening technique. This option only controls which
method the software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used
from the Thickening Technique Used property.
Procedural with slit is used for parts that have internal slits or discontinuities in the surface
of the system that form part of the boundary of parts on the system. The currently-supported
example of this is a surface with a combination of split and bent knuckles joined end to end.
Because Smart 3D does not support splitting knuckles and changing the properties of
different segments, these surface must be constructed with the correct geometry to reflect
the bent and split portions. Parts that are bounded by the slit, and potentially parts on the
system that are within half a meter of the slit, must have this value set to assure a proper
trim. Setting this attribute on parts that do not need it should not cause a failure but may
cause the part to take more time to detail. The following pictures show an example of this
type of surface, first the full surface and then a close-up in the region of the slit or
discontinuity.

The plate system in these pictures is split into three parts by the knuckle (shown as white)
and the two black seams. You must be sure that a single part does not touch both sides of
the slit.
NonProcedural is an infrequently used option. Historically, a much higher percentage of

parts failed to thicken with the ACIS modeler, and many designers used a specific hull form
definition tool that produced a surface with very specific characteristics. NonProcedural
thickening provided a tool that would thicken almost any part on this type of surface, even if
the ACIS modeler failed. The ACIS modeler has improved greatly, and the NonProcedural
thickening method has not been enhanced to handle the surfaces produced by many of the
hull form tools currently in use. Setting this option may solve a failure-to-thicken problem on
a hull part.
If NonProcedural thickening fails for a hull shell part, Smart 3D automatically
tries to thicken the part using Procedural thickening. This option only controls which method
the software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used from the
Thickening Technique Used property.
Thickening Technique Used
Displays the technique used to thicken the plate part. This is blank for a standalone plate
part, although Procedural is always used for these parts. It displays one of the values
defined for Thickening Technique Requested for a system-derived part. The meaning for
these values is the same as defined for Thickening Technique Requested.
Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all
available values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically
Vertical Drop, Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the
BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.

Weight & CG Tab

Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the part.
Type
Displays the type of weight: Dry Weight or Wet Weight.
Weight
Displays the weight of the plate part pertaining to the weight type.
CoG X
Displays the position of center of gravity along the X-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Y
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Y-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Z
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Z-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use to measure the center of gravity.
Extended User Attributes Tab

Displays the user attributes that have been bulkloaded on the report data object related to the
part. Changes to these attributes do not cause the related manufacturing part to go out-of-date.
The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value
appears on the right side of the grid.
Routing Tab
Specifies routing properties for the part. By default, no routing properties are set.
Create
Sets routing properties for the part.
Delete
Deletes the routing properties for the part.
Rule
Specifies a predefined rule set or a user-defined rule that is applicable to the part.
Workcenter
Select an assembly workcenter where the part is produced from a facility-defined rule set.
The list contains all available workcenters regardless of their level in the workcenter
hierarchy. Examples of workcenters include docks, shops, bays, and panel lines.
Workcenters may also be areas and zones where a block is assembled from multiple
assemblies.
Stage Code
Specifies the workcenter code.

No. Of Actions
Specifies the number of actions required to produce the part.
Action
Specifies the name of the action.
Machine
Specifies the type of machine used to perform the required operation.
Code
Specifies the machine code.
Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the frame connection that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 99)
Frame Connections (on page 24)
Edit a Frame Connection (on page 57)
General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the frame connection.
The supported member is the member that you are placing. The supporting member is
the existing member in the model to which you are connecting.
Category
Select the type of properties to view for the selected frame connection.
Type
Displays the type of frame connection. This box is read-only. See Frame Connections (on
page 24) for more information about the different types that are available.
Property
Displays all properties associated with the selected frame connection. The list of available
properties depends on what was defined in the reference data for the frame connection
type.
Value
Specifies the values for the frame connection properties.
Name
Specifies the frame connection name.
Name rule
Specifies the naming rule used to name the frame connection.

 Default Name Rule - Names the frame connection using the format "<frame connection
type>-<location>-<index>" where <frame connection type> is what you select in the
Type box on the ribbon, <location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index> is a
unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, Axis-Along-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select this rule to name the frame connection yourself using the Name
box.
Position rule
Defines how the frame connection is to behave when the supporting member is moved. You
can select one of three options:
 Intersection - The member system lengthens or shortens to maintain the connections
with the supporting member. The end of the supported member system slides to a new
location on the supporting member.
 Ratio - The member system lengthens or shortens to maintain the connection with the
supporting member. The end of the supported member system stays in the same
relative position (that you can define) along the supporting member system. This option
is similar to the Distance option except that you define a percentage ratio from the
supporting member end.
 Distance - The member system lengthens or shortens to maintain the connection with
the supporting member. The end of the supported member system stays in the same
position (that you can define) along the supporting member system. This option is
similar to the Ratio option except that you define an actual distance from the supporting
member end.
Original Position:
Intersection Position Rule:
Ratio and Distance Position Rule:

Distance along
Type the distance from the supporting member end that the supported member is
positioned. You must include the units of measurement when defining this distance. The
supporting member end that is measured from, is defined using the End option. This option
is available when you set Position Rule to Distance.
Ratio
Type the ratio of the supporting member length that the supported member is positioned.
For example, type .25 if you want the supported member a fourth of the way along the
supporting member. Type .333 if you want the supported member a third of the way, and so
forth. Which supporting member end that is measured from is defined using the End option.
This option is available when you set Position Rule to Ratio.
End
Specifies which end of the supporting member that the ratio or the distance-along distance
is measured. You can select Start, End, or Auto. Start is the first member end that was
placed. End is the second member end that was placed. If you select Auto, the software
automatically selects the supporting member end that is closest to the frame connection.
The Auto setting is recommended so that you do not have to worry whether the supporting
member was modeled left-to-right, right-to-left, top-to-bottom, or bottom-to-top.
Align Frame Connection Properties

Side Justification
Select the side of the plane on which to place the member.
 None - Aligns the member axis so that it is placed on the surface.
 Seated - Sets the member on top of the surface. The selected Orientation Side is
nearest the surface.
 Center - The center of the cross-section is placed on the surface. The center is
calculated by the top-bottom, left-right bounds of the cross-section shape.
 Flush - Uses the alignment surface's top and bottom extent to position the supported
member. The supported member typically lies within the body of the alignment plane
with one edge of the member flush with the alignment surface but can be offset.
Orientation Control
If On, the member angle is controlled by the Orientation Angle value defined for the Align

frame connection. If Off, you can set the angle of the member independently of the align
surface by using the Rotation property for the member part.
Orientation Side
mated to the alignment surface. You can specify Top, Right, Bottom,
or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the figure.
Orientation Angle
When Orientation Control is On, this angle is added to the selected Orientation Side to
rotate the member. If the Align frame connection is used on both ends of the member and
you define a different angle value for each end, the angle defined at the start end of the
member is used.
Reflect
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. An
example of when to use this option is when you place a
supported member with an angle cross-section using the left
edge option and you want the angle facing the other direction.
Extend Distance
Specifies the offset distance from the bounding surface along the member's axis.
Side Clearance
Specify the offset distance perpendicular to the align surface to place the member axis.
Lateral Distance
Specifies the offset distance in the plane of the align surface to place the member axis.
Axis Frame Connection Properties

X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values. Local is the local coordinate
system of the supporting member.
Supporting CP
Specifies to which cardinal point on the supporting member system to align the supported
member system's cardinal point. You can specify any cardinal point number, or select 0 to
use the cardinal point with which the supporting member was placed.

Gap Frame Connection Properties

There are three members in a gap frame connection:
 The target member is the member always to move and is the owner of the frame connection.
The target member is shown as blue in the figure below.
 The primary member is the member to which the other two members are attached. The
primary member is shown as red in the figure below.
 The secondary member is the third member in the joint. The software does not require the
secondary member to be in the same plane as the target member. The secondary member
is shown as orange in the figure below.
Actual Gap Distance (G)
Displays the actual gap distance between the target and secondary member. This distance
is shown as G in the figures below.
Actual Centerline Distance (X)
Displays the actual gap between the center line of the target member and the center line of
the secondary member. This distance is shown as X in the figures below.
Actual Overlap Distance (L)
Displays the distance between the lowest point of the target and secondary member saddle
on the primary member to the point where the target and secondary member intersect. This
distance is shown as L in the figures below.
Actual Overlap Distance (A)
Displays the amount of overlap between the target and secondary member. This distance is
shown as A in the figures below.
Allowable Centerline Distance
Displays the calculation of the primary member diameter times the Centerline Design
Factor. The centerline distance should be less than or equal to this value.
Allowable Overlap Distance (Fmin  B)
Specify the minimum overlap distance (A) that is acceptable.
Allowable Overlap Distance (Fmax  B)
Specify the maximum overlap distance (A) that is acceptable.
Design Passed (Centerline)
Display True if the centerline design passed. Displays False if the centerline failed. The
centerline design pass/fail is calculated by comparing actual centerline distance with the
allowable centerline distance.
Design Passed (Overlap)
Display True if the overlap design passed. Displays False if the overlap failed. The overlap
design pass/fail is calculated by (Min. Factor  B) < A < (Max. Factor  B) and then
comparing that value to the Allowable Overlap Distance (Fmin  B) and the Allowable
Overlap Distance (Fmax  B) values. You define the minimum and maximum design
factors using the Overlap Design Factor (Fmin) and Overlap Design Factor (Fmax)
properties. The B distance is shown in the figures below.

Direction
Select the direction to calculate the gap.
 Axially Along Surface - Select this mode when you want to define the offset as the
distance between the center lines of the target and secondary members. This distance
is measured parallel to the primary member centerline.
 Axially and Flush Along Surface - This option is currently not available. Select this
mode when you want to define the offset as the distance between the center lines of the
target and secondary members and you want the target member to be flush with the
outside of the primary member. The axially distance is measured parallel to the primary
member centerline. Use the Flush Direction and Flush Offset options to refine exact
flush placement.
 Radially Along Surface - Select this mode when you want to define the offset as the
distance between the closest points on the hull of the target and secondary members.
This distance is measured around the hull of the primary member.
Offset Required
Type the gap distance that you want between the target and secondary member. Select how
you want to define this distance using the Offset Type box.
Centerline Distance Roundoff
Type the distance to which the centerline gap should be rounded off.
Centerline Design Factor
Type the ratio of the primary member section size to use in calculating whether the
centerline design passed or failed. The default value is 0.25, which specifies that the primary
member diameter be divided by 4 (D/4).
Flush Direction
This option is currently not available. Specify which direction you want the target member
to move to become flush with the primary member.
Flush Offset
This option is currently not available. Specify the distance from the primary member hull
edge to the target hull edge. An offset of zero indicates that the two member edges are
perfectly flush.
Offset Along
Defines if the target member moves along the primary member or along the secondary
member to create the gap. This property is only available for Gap Single Axial gap
connections.
Offset Type
Select how you want to specify the Offset Required value.
 Gap - The Offset Required distance is between the two closest points of the target
member hull and the secondary member hull. This is shown as G in the figures below.
 Centerline - The Offset Required distance is between the center line of the target
member and the center line of the secondary member. This is shown as X in the figures
below.

 Overlap - The Offset Required distance is between the lowest point of the target and
secondary member saddle on the support member to the point where the target and
secondary member intersect. This is shown as L in the figures below.
Overlap Design Factor (Fmin)
Defines the minimum design factor for the calculation: Min B < A < Max B. The default
value is 0.3. This calculation is used to determine if Design Passed (Overlap) passes or
fails. The A and B distances are shown in the figures below.
Overlap Design Factor (Fmax)
Defines the maximum design factor for the calculation: Min B < A < Max B. The default
value is 0.5. This calculation is used to determine if Design Passed (Overlap) passes or
fails. The A and B distances are shown in the figures below.
Axially Along Surface:
Radially Along Surface:
Seated, Flush, and Centerline Frame Connection Properties

Side
Select the side of the supporting member on which you want to place the supported
member.
Offset
Specify the distance to place the supported member from the supporting member. For
seated and flush frame connections, the offset is between the side of the supporting
member that you specified with the Side option and the supported member's side that you
specify with the Edge option. For centerline frame connections, the offset is between

centerline of the supporting member and the supported member's side that you specify with
the Edge option.
Edge
mated to the supporting member. You can specify Top, Right,
Bottom, or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the
figure.
Reflect
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. For
example, when you place a supported member with an angle
cross-section using the left edge option and you want the angle
facing the other direction.
Surface Frame Connection Properties

X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values.
Tangent Frame Connection Properties

Offset Distance
Type the distance (3) from the centerline of the supporting member (2) to the tangent
connection point. This distance is the radius of the circle to which the supported member (1)
is made tangent.

Side
Select Left or Right to define on which side of the supporting member the supported
member is placed. To determine left and right, image you are standing on the start end of
the member with your head towards positive global Z looking down the length of the
member. Your left and right determine the direction of Left and Right.
Tangent Plane
Controls the plane on which the tangent circle is drawn. You can select:
 Horizontal - The tangent circle is parallel to the X-Y plane (normal to global Z)
regardless of the slope of any of the members. For example, you are creating a tangent
connection between the sloping green beam and the sloping red column, or between
the sloping blue beam and the sloping red column.
 Vertical - The tangent circle is parallel to global Z and is aligned with the centerline of
the supported member (green member in the left figure, blue member in the right figure).
 Normal to Supporting - The tangent circle is normal to the supporting member (the
sloping red column).

 In Plane of Supported - The tangent circle is parallel to the centerline of the supported
member and normal to the supporting member centerline (green member in the left
figure, blue member in the right figure).
Vertical Corner Brace Frame Connection Properties

X Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Select whether the offset values are defined relative to the global coordinate system or the
member's local coordinate system.
Work Point
Specifies the work point location. There are six work point locations that you can select.
1 - Primary Center - Secondary Far Side

2 - Primary Center - Secondary Center
3 - Primary Center - Secondary Near Side
4 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Far Side
5 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Center
6 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Near Side
See Also
Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 99)

SECTION 4
Place Curve Members

Places a curved member in the model. You can place
beams, columns, or braces member types using this
command. For additional information, see Members (on
page 22). Use this command when you want to place
curved members by specifying the exact start and end
points.
You can define custom member types by editing the
Structural Member Type select list in the Catalog task.
You cannot place loads on curved members or define frame connection offsets for
curved members.
Place Curve Member Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the curved member that you are placing.
Member Properties
Activates the Member Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional member properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on
the ribbon.
Path
Activates the Create Path Ribbon with which you define the curved member path.
Finish
Click to place the member in the model.
System
workspace or the model. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box.
Type Category
the Catalog task.
Type

Place Curve Members
Section Name
Cardinal Point
Angle
member axis. The zero-degree position is either the global Z-axis or the global X-axis
depending on the member orientation.
Reflect
Place a curved member

1. Click Place Curve Member on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select an end location of the curved member.
You can select an existing member's frame connections to define the location, or
define the location using a SmartSketch relationship such a Point Along.

Place Curve Members
3. Set Path Type to Arc by End Points .

4. Optionally, set the Plane option to match the plane of your curved member.
5. Select the opposite end location of the curved member.
6. Select a point along the curved member or define the radius or sweep of the curved
member.
7. Click Finish.
8. Select a system for the curved member.
9. Select a member type and type category for the member.
10. Select a section size and cardinal point.

Place Curve Members
11. Click Finish.
See Also
Define a Path (on page 501)
Sketching in 3-D (on page 493)

SECTION 5
Place Bracing
Places cross bracing between members that you select in the model. You can place cross
braces or chevron braces in a vertical plane, a horizontal plane, or any other non-orthographic
plane. Although the two cross bracing members are placed at the same time, after placement
the two members can be edited or deleted individually if needed. For additional information
about members, see Members (on page 22).
Vertical X Bracing
At a minimum, you must select two columns to define the cross bracing
location. The two columns must be co-planar, but they do not need to be
the same length or have the same starting or ending elevation. In this
case, both ends of the braces are connected to the columns using the
Axis-End frame connection. (For more information about frame
connections, see Frame Connections (on page 24).) In addition, the
cross brace members are always placed with the starting end of the
brace member at the lower elevation.
If you select two columns and a beam to define the cross bracing
location, the bracing is placed at the intersection of the beam and the
two columns to the two column bases. Again, the two columns must be
co-planar, but they do not need to be the same length or have the same
starting or ending elevation. In this case, the upper ends of the braces
are connected to the columns and the beam using the Vertical Corner
Brace frame connection. The bottom ends of the braces are connected
to the column using the Axis-End frame connection. Again, the cross
brace members are always placed with the starting end of the brace
member at the lower elevation.
If you select two columns and two beams to define the cross bracing
location, the bracing is placed in the intersection of the four members.
Again, the two columns must be co-planar, but they do not need to be
the same length or have the same starting or ending elevation. In this
case, both ends of the braces are connected to the columns and the
beams using the Vertical Corner Brace frame connection. Again, the
cross brace members are always placed with the starting end of the
brace member at the lower elevation.

Place Bracing
Vertical Chevron Bracing

At a minimum, you must select two columns and one beam to define the
vertical chevron bracing location. The two columns must be co-planar,
but they do not need to be the same length or have the same starting or
ending elevation. The chevron braces are connected to the columns
using the Vertical Corner Brace frame connection. The beam mid-point
is located to position the braces.
Optionally, you can select two columns and two beams to define the
vertical chevron bracing location. The two columns must be co-planar,
but they do not need to be the same length or have the same starting or
ending elevation. The chevron braces are connected to the columns
using the Vertical Corner Brace frame connection. The beam mid-point
is located to position the braces.
Horizontal X Bracing
At a minimum, you must select two members to define the cross bracing
location. The two members must be co-planar, but they do not need to
be the same length or have the same starting or ending location. In this
case, both ends of the braces are connected to the select members
using the Axis-End frame connection.
If you select two side members and a third member to define the cross
bracing location, the bracing is placed at the intersection of the third
member and the two side member to the two member ends. Again, the
two side members must be co-planar, but they do not need to be the
same length or have the same starting or ending locations. In this case,
the upper ends of the braces are connected to the side members and
the third member using the Vertical Corner Brace frame connection. The
bottom ends of the braces are connected to the side members using the
Axis-End frame connection.

Place Bracing
If you select two side members and a third and fourth member to define
the cross bracing location, the bracing is placed in the intersection of the
four members. Again, the two side members must be co-planar, but they
do not need to be the same length or have the same starting or ending
location. In this case, both ends of the braces are connected to the side
members and the third and fourth members using the Vertical Corner
Brace frame connection.
Horizontal Chevron Bracing

At a minimum, you must select two side members and one other
member to define the point of the chevron bracing location. The two side
members must be co-planar, but they do not need to be the same length
or have the same starting or ending location. The chevron braces are
connected to the side members using the Axis-End frame connection.
The third member's mid-point is located to position the braces.
Optionally, you can select two side members and a third and fourth
member to define the chevron bracing location. The two side members
must be co-planar, but they do not need to be the same length or have
the same starting or ending location. The chevron braces are connected
to the side members using the Axis-End frame connection. The third
member's mid-point is located to position the braces.
Place Bracing Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the cross braces members that you are placing or editing.
Member Properties
additional member properties; such as material, material grade, and end releases; which
you cannot set on the ribbon.
Select First Member
Select the first member that you want the cross bracing between. If you are placing vertical
bracing, this member should be a column. If you are placing horizontal bracing, this member
should be a beam.
Select Second Member
Select the second member that you want the cross bracing between. This member must be

Place Bracing
coplanar with the first member that you selected.

Select First Beam
Select the first beam that you want the cross or chevron bracing between.
Select Second Beam
Select the second beam that you want the cross or chevron bracing between.
Finish
Click to place the cross or chevron bracing members in the model.
Bracing Type
Specifies the type of bracing to place. Select Cross to place two braces that cross. Select
Chevron to place two braces as a chevron brace.
Connection
System
Select the system to which the cross bracing members belong. You can define new systems
in the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see "Select System Dialog Box" in Place
Type Category
the Catalog task.
Type
Section Name

Place Bracing
Cardinal Point
Angle
Offset
Defines the distance to place the supported members (the braces) from the supporting
members.
Reflect

 Place vertical cross bracing (on page 117)
 Place horizontal cross bracing (on page 120)
 Place vertical chevron bracing (on page 121)
 Place horizontal chevron bracing (on page 124)
Place vertical cross bracing

1. Click Place X Bracing on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Bracing Type box, select Cross.
3. In the Type category box, select the cross bracing member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the cross bracing member type to place.
5. Set the Section Name, Cardinal Point, and Angle options as required.

Place Bracing
6. Select the first column to support the cross bracing.
7. Select the second column to support the cross bracing.

Place Bracing
8. Optionally, select one or two beams to support the cross bracing.
9. Click Finish.

Place Bracing
Place horizontal cross bracing

2. In the Bracing Type box, select Cross.
3. In the Type category box, select the cross bracing member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the cross bracing member type to place.
6. Select the first member to support the cross bracing. This member is one of the "side"
members to which the bracing connects.
7. Select the second member to support the cross bracing. This member is the other "side"
member to which the bracing connects.
8. Optionally, select one or two members to define the extent of the cross bracing. If you do not
select these members, the software uses the end locations of the two selected members as
the end locations of the cross bracing.

Place Bracing
9. Click Finish.
Place vertical chevron bracing

2. In the Bracing Type box, select Chevron.
3. In the Type category box, select the chevron bracing member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the chevron bracing member type to place.

Place Bracing
6. Select the first column to support the chevron bracing.
7. Select the second column to support the chevron bracing.

Place Bracing
8. Select one beam to support the chevron bracing.
9. Optionally, select a second beam.

Place Bracing
10. Click Finish.
Place horizontal chevron bracing

2. In the Bracing Type box, select Chevron.
3. In the Type category box, select the chevron bracing member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the chevron bracing member type to place.

Place Bracing
6. Select the first member to support the chevron bracing. This member is the first "side"
member to which the bracing connects.
7. Select the second member to support the chevron bracing. This member is the second
"side" member to which the bracing connects.
8. Select a member to support the chevron bracing. The mid-point of this member is used to
define the location of the chevron bracing point.

Place Bracing
9. Optionally, select a second member. This member defines the end location for the wide part
of the chevron bracing. If you do not select this optional member, the software uses the end
location of the first and second members that you selected for the ending location of the
chevron braces.
10. Click Finish.

SECTION 6
Place Framing Members

Places framing, secondary members, between two main
supporting members typically to support a floor. The two
supporting member must be coplanar but are not required
to be of equal length or even the same member type thus
providing lots of flexibility during placement. After
placement, the framing members can be edited or deleted
individually if needed.
For additional information about members, see Members
(on page 22).
Place Framing Members Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the framing members that you
are placing or editing.
Member Properties
the ribbon.
Select Supporting Member 1
Select the first supporting member for the framing members. If the two supporting members
are different lengths, you will get better results if you select the shorter of the two members
as supporting member 1.
Select Supporting Member 2
Select the second supporting member for the framing members.
Select Start Point
Select the location of the first framing member along the first supporting member. This
option is available only when you set Placement to Number and Spacing.
Finish
Click to place the framing members in the model.

Placement
Select how to place the framing members between the two supporting members.
 By Count - Select this option if you want to specify the exact number of framing
members to place. Type the number of framing members in the Count box. The spacing
between the framing members is determined by the length of the supporting member
divided by the number of framing members plus one.
Example of By Count set to 2.
Example of By Count set to 4.
 Equal Spacing - Select this option to have the software determine the number of
framing members to place based on the length of the supporting members and the
value you specify in the Maximum Spacing box. The software places as many framing

members as needed so that the spacing between the framing members does not
exceed the Maximum Spacing value. All framing members are equally spaced.
Maximum Spacing set to 3ft.
 Best Fit - Select this option to have the software determine the number of framing
members to place based on the length of the supporting members and the value you
specify in the Maximum Spacing box. The software places all framing members except
for the first and the last with spacing equal to the Maximum Spacing value you

specified. The spacing for the first and last framing member is automatically determined
by the software.
 Number and Spacing - Select this option to place the exact number of framing
members that you specify in the Count box the same distance apart that you define in
the Maximum Spacing box. In addition, you can optionally specify the location of the
first framing member along the first selected supporting member using Select Start
Point . The supporting member end to measure from is the nearest end when you
selected the supporting member.
Maximum Spacing
Type the framing member spacing. If Placement is set to Equal Spacing, then this value is
the maximum spacing that you will allow between the framing members. If Placement is set
to Best Fit or Number and Spacing, then this value is used as the exact spacing between
the interior framing members. This option is not available when Placement is set to By
Count.
Count
Type the number of framing members to place. This option is available only when
Placement is set to By Count or Number and Spacing.
Connection

System
Select the system to which the framing members belong. You can define new systems in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see "Select System Dialog Box" in in Place
Type Category
the Catalog task.
Type
Section Name
Cardinal Point
Reflect
Offset
Specifies the framing member's offset from the supporting member's plane. This option is
only available when Connection is set to a flush, seated, or centerline frame connection.
Position
Select how to position framing members if the two supporting members are not of equal

length or are not parallel. You can make the framing members perpendicular to the first
supporting member that you selected, or to skew the framing members by the ratio
difference of the two supporting members.
Perpendicular By Ratio
Side
Select to flip the framing members to the opposite side.

 Position framing members using best fit (on page 132)
 Position framing members using count method (on page 133)
 Position framing members at equal spacing (on page 135)
 Position framing members using number and spacing method (on page 136)
 Copy framing members (on page 136)
Position framing members using best fit

1. Click Place Framing Members on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Placement box, select Best Fit.
3. In the Max Spacing box, type the distance to separate the interior framing members. The
distance for the first and last framing members is determined by the software.
4. In the Type category box, select the member type category for the framing member being
placed.
5. In the Type box, select the member type for the framing member being placed.
6. Set the Section Name.

7. Select the first supporting member.
8. Select the second supporting member.
9. Set the Reflect, Cardinal Point, and Offset options as required.

10. Click Finish.
Position framing members using count method

2. In the Placement box, select By Count.
3. In the Count box, type the number of framing members to place.

placed.
9. Set Reflect, Cardinal Point, and Offset as required.

10. Click Finish.

Position framing members at equal spacing

2. In the Placement box, select Equal Spacing.
3. In the Max Spacing box, type the maximum distance that you will allow between the
framing members. The distance between the framing members will be equal to or less than
this distance.
placed.
9. Set Reflect, Cardinal Point, and Offset options as required.

10. Click Finish.
Position framing members using number and spacing

method
2. In the Placement box, select Number and Spacing.
3. In the Count box, type the number of framing members to place.
4. In the Maximum Spacing box, type the distance between the framing members.
placed.
7. Set the Section Name, Cardinal Point, and Offset options as required.
8. Select the first supporting member. If you are going to define a starting location for the
framing members, select the first supporting member near the end from which you want to
define the framing member's starting location.
10. Optionally, select the starting location of the first framing member along the first supporting
member.
11. Click Finish.
Copy framing members

2. Select Member Systems in the locate filter.
3. Select the framing members to copy. Press CTRL as you select the members.
4. Press CTRL+C or click Edit > Copy to copy the members to the clipboard.
5. Select a reference point (a from-point) for the members being copied.
6. Press CTRL+V or click Edit > Paste to paste the members from the clipboard.

The Paste dialog displays.

7. In the Paste dialog box, select new systems and dependencies for the paste members. If
you do not select new dependencies for the pasted members in the Paste dialog box, the
pasted members are placed in the same location as the copied members.
8. Click OK on the Paste Special dialog box.
Assembly Connections are not copied to the pasted members.

SECTION 7
Place Columns at Grid Intersections

Places columns between two selected elevations at selected grid intersections. You must
have two elevation planes and one grid plane defined before you can use this command. Use
the Grids task to create the planes. After placement, the columns can be edited or deleted
individually if needed. For additional information about members, see Members (on page 22).
Place Columns at Grid Intersections Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the columns that you are placing or editing.
Member Properties
the ribbon.
Select Elevation Plane 1
Specify the bottom elevation for the columns.
Select Elevation Plane 2
Specify the top elevation for the columns.
Select Grid Intersections
Drag a fence around all the grid intersections where you want columns placed. You can
drag multiple fences if needed.
Finish
Click to place the columns in the model.
Cancel
Clears the selected grid intersections.
System
Select the system to which the columns belong. You can define new systems in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see "Select System Dialog Box".

Type Category
the Catalog task.
Type
Section Name
Cardinal Point
Angle
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This parameter affects
both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of when to use this option would be
when you want the flanges of a channel section to point in the opposite direction. The
Reflect property is not available when editing members that have Seated, Flush, or
Centerline frame connections.

Place columns at grid intersections

1. Click Place Columns at Grid Intersections on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the bottom elevation plane for the columns.
6. Select the top elevation plane for the columns.
7. Drag a fence around the grid intersections where you want columns.

8. Click Finish.

SECTION 8
Place Vessel Supports

Places structural members that support vertical
vessels directly (typically four lugs that rest on the
members) or that support the grating around the
vessel. This command considers the vessel diameter
and clearance, or the bolt circle diameter (lug-hole to
lug-hole diameter) to determine member positions.
Based on the cross-section type chosen (I-section or
channel), the command also considers the gage (the
distance to the bolt hole location) in positioning the
member. Because the equipment is often not centered
within the main framing of the opening, the command
accommodates such conditions and displays
appropriate messages if the framing is not feasible. In
general, the four supporting members must form a
square.
This command is currently limited to configurations
where the lugs are positioned North, South, East, and
West, or at 45 degrees to these axes. This command
only supports the placement of W, M, HP, S, C, MC,
BUI, BUC, BUTee, BUIUE, and BUBoxFM sections.
For additional information about members, see Members (on page 22).
Place Vessel Supports Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the vessel support members that you are placing or editing.
Select Vessel
Select the vessel around which to place the support members.
Select Members
Select the primary supporting members from which the vessel support members are placed.
Finish
Click to place the vessel support members in the model.
Lug Orientation
Select the orientation of the vessel lugs relative to the coordinate system north.

Select 0 Degrees if the vessel lugs are located like those in the figure below:
Select 45 Degrees if the vessel lugs are located like those in the figure below:
Easting
Specifies the easting coordinate of the vessel center. If you select a vessel, the software
automatically finds this value for you. If you are placing supports before the vessel is
modeled, type the easting coordinate of the vessel in this box. This coordinate is relative to
the active coordinate system defined in the PinPoint ribbon.

Northing
Specifies the northing coordinate of the vessel center. If you select a vessel, the software
automatically finds this value for you. If you are placing supports before the vessel is
modeled, type the northing coordinate of the vessel in this box. This coordinate is relative to
the active coordinate system defined in the PinPoint ribbon.
Vessel Diameter
Specifies the vessel diameter. If you select a vessel, the software automatically enters the
diameter for you. If you are placing supports before the vessel is modeled, type the vessel
diameter in this box. This option is only available when Lug Orientation is set to 0
Degrees.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the vessel support members and the vessel itself. This
option is only available when Lug Orientation is set to 0 Degrees.
A=Vessel Diameter
B=Clearance
Bolt Circle
Specifies the distance between the bolts on the opposite sides of the vessel. This value is
used to calculate the member line location (red dot in figure below, figure shows cardinal
point 8 being used for the I-beam and cardinal point 7 for the channel). This option is only
available when Lug Orientation is set to 45 Degrees.
A=Vessel Centerline
B=Bolt Circle divided by 2
C=Bolt Gage divided by 2
D=Bolt Gage

System
Select the system to which the vessel support members belong. You can define new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined
in the workspace or the model. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box.
Type Category
the Catalog task.
Type
Section Name
Data Guide for more information about reference data. This command only supports the
placement of W, M, HP, S, C, MC, BUI, BUC, BUTee, BUIUE, and BUBoxFM sections.
Cardinal Point

 Support vessels with 0 degree oriented lugs (on page 146)
 Support vessels with 45 degree oriented lugs (on page 147)

Support vessels with 0 degree oriented lugs

1. Click Place Vessel Supports on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the vessel around which to place the supports.
-OR-
Key in the Easting and Northing coordinates of the vessel's center.
3. Set Lug Orientation to 0 Degrees.

4. Key in the clearance between the side of the vessel and the support members being placed.
5. Select a system, type, section, and cardinal point for the support members. This command
only supports the placement of W, M, HP, S, C, MC, BUI, BUC, BUTee, BUIUE, and
BUBoxFM sections.
6. Select the four main support members in clockwise order.

7. Click Finish.
Support vessels with 45 degree oriented lugs

1. Click Place Vessel Supports on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the vessel around which to place the supports.
-OR-
Key in the Easting and Northing coordinates of the vessel's center.
3. Set Lug Orientation to 45 Degrees.
4. Key in the bolt circle diameter.
5. Select a system, type, section, and cardinal point for the support members. This command
only supports the placement of W, M, HP, S, C, MC, BUI, BUC, BUTee, BUIUE, and
BUBoxFM sections.
6. Select the four main support members in clockwise order.
7. Click Finish.

SECTION 9
Place Can
Places a can in the model. A can is a reinforcing connection piece on a member to increase
the surface area available for connections or to provide increased wall thickness or both. You
can place cans anywhere along a linear member (the support leg) including the end of the
member. There are three can types:
 Inline can - This can is placed anywhere along the length of a support leg. The support leg is
split into two parts and the can is placed between those parts.
 End can - This can is placed at the end of the support leg. As a
general rule, the end of the support leg does not frame into another
member.
 Stub-end can - This can is also placed at the end of the support
leg, which generally does frame into another member.
The software calculates the can length based on any transverse members that you select and
the L2 and L3 parameters that you define.
Can Limitations
 SmartSketch precision placement commands such as Point Along and PinPoint are not
available when placing an in-line can. The in-line can's location is determined by where you
select the supporting member or by the location of any transverse members assigned to the
can.
 Stub-in and end cans locations are determined by the frame or split connection that you
select during placement.
 The linear member that you select to be the supporting leg must be a designed member with
a BUTube cross-section. You cannot select curved members for the supporting leg or for the
transverse members.

Place Can
Place Can Ribbon

Can Properties
Activates the Can Properties dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify additional
properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on the ribbon. For
more information, see Can Properties Dialog Box (on page 159).
Select Primary Member

Select the support leg on which to place the can. The support leg is split at the location you
specify and highlights in red during can placement. If you are placing an inline can, you can
select a BUTube designed member. You cannot select a curved member as the primary
member. If you are placing an end can, you must select an unsupported frame connection. If
you are placing a stub-end can, you can select any split connection or frame connection
except unsupported frame connections.
If you are modifying an existing can, this option is not available.
Select Member Part
Select the member part on which to place the stub-end can. This option is only available
with the Can Type is set to a stub-end can and you have selected a split connection for the
can's location.
Select Transverse Members

Select the transverse members with which you want to base the can length. All transverse
members that are related to the can highlight in blue. You can select any member systems,
except curved members, that are connected to the primary member. You can use Cancel
to clear selected transverse members and Accept to confirm the transverse members
that you selected are the ones you want to use.
If you are modifying more than one existing can, this option is not available.
Finish
Click to place the can in the model.
Cancel
Rejects the transverse members that you have selected.
Accept
Confirms the transverse members that you have selected.
Primary Member Information

Activates a small dialog box that displays the name, outside diameter, inside diameter, and
plate thickness of the selected primary member. This information is useful when selecting an
appropriate can type from the Catalog or when defining custom can specifications.
If you are modifying an existing can, this dialog box displays the name, outside diameter,
inside diameter, and plate thickness of the support legs on either side of the selected can.
Can Type
Specifies the type of can to place: stub-end, inline, or end can. When you select a can type,
the defaults settings from the Catalog are loaded.

Place Can
Tube / Cone Parameters
Click to swap between defining cone parameters and defining tube parameters .
Tube Parameters
Outer/Inner Diameter
Specifies the can outer diameter or the can inner diameter depending on the can type you
have selected.
 If you selected a pre-defined can from the Catalog, the diameter value from the Catalog
is displayed.
 If you selected a Custom Can-OD Match from the Catalog, the outer diameter of the
selected primary member is displayed.
 If you selected a Custom Can-ID Match from the Catalog, the inner diameter of the
selected primary member is displayed.
 If you selected a Custom Can-User Defined from the Catalog, you must type a diameter
value in this box.
Can Thickness
Select the plate thickness for the can plate.
Computation Method
Specifies how you want Smart 3D to measure the L2 and L3 minimum distances.
 If you select Hull-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can times
the value you type in the Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 and L3
distances which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the
transverse member hull closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Hull-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the Length box
for L2 and L3, which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point
on the transverse member hull closest to that end of the can.
L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Hull Extension Method
 If you select Centerline-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can
times the value you type in the Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 and
L3 distances, which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to the
centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of the can.

Place Can
 If you select Centerline-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the
Length box for L2 and L3, which are measured from the corresponding end of the can
to the centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of can.
L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Centerline Method
Factor
Specifies the factor to use in the extension method calculation. The default value is 0.5.
Length
Specifies the absolute distance to use in the extension method calculation. If you type a
length that is shorter than the American Petroleum Institute's minimum allowable length, a
message displays that one or more specified parameters are invalid.
Cone Parameters
Cones By
Specifies how you want to define the length of the cone transitions.
 If you select Angle the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the
can diameter, the support member cross-section, and the angle specified in the Cone
Angle box. This is shown as Angle in the figures above.
 If you select Length the length of the transition is defined explicitly in the Cone
Length box. This distance is shown as L1 and L4 in the figures above.
 If you select Slope , the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the
can diameter, the support member cross-section size, and the slope value specified in
the Cone Slope box (the denominator of the slope). This is shown as Slope in the
figures above.
During placement, both cone transitions are placed using one set of values. If you
want the cone transitions on either end of the can to have different lengths or different
angles, you can change these values independently on the Can Properties Dialog Box (on
page 159) after placement.
Cone Angle
Specifies the angle of the cone transition. The length of the cone is adjusted so that the
entered angle is obtained. The software does not create a cone if the angle you specify is
less than 1 degree or greater than 89.0 degrees.
Cone Length
Specifies the length of the cone transition from the end of the support member to the start of
the can. This distance is shown as L1 and L4 in the figures above.

Place Can
Cone Slope
Specifies the slope of the cone transition. The length of the cone is adjusted so that the
entered slope is obtained. The software does not create a cone if the slope you specify is
greater than 100 (1/100) or less than 1-6.
Cone Thickness
Select the plate thickness for the cone.

 Place an in-line can (on page 152)
 Place an in-line can on cross bracing (on page 153)
 Place an end can (on page 155)
 Place a stub-end can (on page 156)
 Add a transverse member to a can (on page 157)
 Remove a transverse member from a can (on page 158)
Place an in-line can

1. Click Place Can on the vertical ribbon.
2. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the in-line can rule to
place from the Catalog.
Select one of the Custom Inline Can types to change individual can parameters.
3. Select the location of the in-line can along the supporting leg member.
4. Click Primary Member Information on the ribbon.

The software displays the name, outside diameter, inside diameter, and plate thickness of
the selected supporting leg.

Place Can
5. Select the transverse members that participate in the can. Transverse members are used in
calculating the can length.
6. Click Accept .
7. If you are placing a Custom Inline Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone parameters on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a
predefined can from the Catalog, these settings are read-only.
8. Click Finish.
Place an in-line can on cross bracing

1. Click Place Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Place box, select By Object.
3. In the Split Status box, select Split First.
4. Select the cross brace to split.
5. Click Accept .

Place Can
6. Select the other cross brace.
7. Click Finish.

9. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the in-line can rule to
Select one of the Custom Inline Can types to change individual can parameters.
10. Select the cross brace you selected in step 6 (the cross brace that you did not split) near the
intersection of the two cross braces.
The software prompts you to select the transverse members.

11. Select the cross brace that you split (the cross brace you selected in step 4).
12. Click Accept .

13. If you are placing a Custom Inline Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone parameters on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a

Place Can
14. Click Finish.
Place an end can

2. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the end can rule to place
from the Catalog.
Select one of the Custom End Can types to change individual can parameters.
3. Select the unsupported frame connection at the member end where you want the end can.
End cans are only placed on unsupported frame connections.

the selected supporting member.
5. Select the transverse members, if any, that participate in the can. Transverse members are
used in calculating the length of the can.

Place Can
6. Click Accept .
7. If you are placing a Custom End Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone settings on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a
8. Click Finish.
Place a stub-end can

2. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the stub-end can rule to
Select one of the Custom Stub End Can types to change individual can parameters.
3. Select the frame connection at the member end where you want the stub-end can.
Stub-end cans cannot be placed on unsupported frame connections.
or
Select the split connection where you want to place the stub-end can.
4. If placing the stub-end can at a split connection, select the member part on which to place
the stub-end can.

the selected supporting member.
6. Select the transverse members, if any, that participate in the can. Transverse members are
used in calculating the can length.

Place Can
7. Click Accept .
8. If you are placing a Custom Stub End Can type, change the diameter, thickness,
computation method, factor, and cone settings on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are
placing a predefined can from the Catalog, these settings are read-only.
9. Click Finish.
Add a transverse member to a can

2. Select the can to contain the new the transverse member.
3. Select Transverse Members on the ribbon.

4. Select the member to add to the can.
5. Click Accept .

Place Can
6. Click Finish.
Remove a transverse member from a can

2. Select the can containing the transverse member you want to remove.
3. Select Transverse Members on the ribbon.

4. Select the member to remove from the can.
5. Click Accept .

Place Can
6. Click Finish.
Can Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the can that you are editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) (on page 159)
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) (on page 164)
Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) (on page 170)
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the select can.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the member. Currently, only Standard
properties are available for BUCan designed member.
Preview
Displays a graphic indicating the different dimensions that can be specified for the selected
designed member.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the can. The can name is based on the Name Rule selection. If you
want to type a new name for the can, in the Name Rule box, select User Defined, and then
type a name for the can in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this can. You can select one of the listed rules or
select User Defined to specify the can name yourself in the Name box.
 Default Rule - Names the can using the syntax: BUCan<Can Type>-<site ID>-<Index>
where: <Can Type> is the can type selected from the Catalog, <site ID> is the location
ID defined in Project Management, and <Index> is a 4-digit unique index number that
starts at 0001.

Place Can
Parent System
Section Standard
Cardinal Point
Angle
Reflect
Type category
the Catalog task.
Type
Priority
Select the priority to assign to the designed member. The priority is used to group members.
Centroid X
workbook.
Centroid Y
workbook.

Place Can

workbook.

Place Can

workbook.
Is Hollow
Diameter - Start
Displays the diameter of the start cone.
Diameter - End
Displays the diameter of the end cone.
Length - Start Cone
Displays the length of the start cone, which is the cone closest to the start of the supporting
member.
Length - End Cone
Displays the length of the end cone.
Section Properties
Displays how section properties are defined.
Area
Displays the cross-section area for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
workbook.
Depth
edit the cross- section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Width

Place Can
need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Perimeter
Unit Weight
Displays the unit weight.
Length Extension
Displays the length extension, which is the minimum distance between the transverse
member and the end of the tube part of the can.
Can Length
Displays the length of the can. This dimension includes the chamfer length.
Uncut Length
Displays the uncut length of the can. This dimension includes the chamfer length.
Can Type
Displays the can type that was selected from the Catalog.
L2 Hull Length
Displays the calculated L2 hull length. This dimension is measured from the outside hull of
the supporting member to the start of the chamfer on the tube section.
L2 Centerline Length
Displays the calculated L2 centerline length. This dimension is measured from the center of
the supporting member to the start of the chamfer on the tube section.
L3 Hull Length
Displays the calculated L3 hull length.
L3 Centerline Length
Displays the calculated L3 centerline length.
Chamfer1 Length
Displays the calculated Chamfer1 length.
Chamfer2 Length
Displays the calculated Chamfer2 length.

Place Can
Diameter - Tube
Displays the outside diameter of the tube part of the can.
Dimensions for Stub End Cans
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the selected can rule.
Diameter Rule
Select how you want to define the diameter of the tube. You can select:
 Outer Diameter - Select this option to match the outside diameter of the tube with the
outside diameter of the supporting leg.
 Inner Diameter - Select this option to match the inside diameter of the tube with the
inside diameter of the supporting leg.

Place Can
 User Defined - Select this option to specify the diameter of the tube yourself. Cones are
created if you define a diameter that is significantly larger than the cross-section of the
supporting leg.
Can Outside Diameter
Specifies the outside diameter of the can.
Can Inside Diameter
Specifies the inside diameter of the can.
Can Thickness
Specifies the plate thickness of the can plate.
Cone 1 Thickness
Specifies the plate thickness of cone 1.
Cone 1 Material
Select the material for cone 1.
Cone 1 Grade
Select the material grade for cone 1.
Can Material
Select the material for the can.
Can Grade
Select the material grade for the can.
Minimum Extension Distance
Specify the minimum distance between the transverse member and the end of the can. If
you type a distance that is less than the minimum extension distance that is defined in the
Catalog, the software uses the distance defined in the Catalog, not the smaller distance that
you specified here.
L2 Computation Method
Specifies how you want Smart 3D to measure the L2 minimum distance.
the value you type in the L2 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 distance,
which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the transverse
member hull closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Hull-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L2 Length
box for L2, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the

Place Can
times the value you type in the L2 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2
distance, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the centerline of
the transverse member closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Centerline-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L2
Length box for L2, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the
centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of can.
L2 Factor
Type the factor to use to calculate L2. The default is 0.25.
L2 Length
Type the L2 distance. This is the minimum distance that L2 can be. If there is no cone
defined for that end of the can, then the L2 distance is the longer of the two chamfer lengths
between the can and the support leg.
L3 Computation Method
Specifies how you want Smart 3D to measure the L3 minimum distance.
the value you type in the L3 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 distance
which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the transverse
member hull closest to that end of the can.

Place Can
 If you select Hull-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L3 Length
box for L3, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the
times the value you type in the L3 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L3
distance, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the centerline of
the transverse member closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Centerline-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L3
Length box for L3, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the
centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of can.
L3 Length
Type the L3 distance. This is the minimum distance that L3 can be. If there is no cone
defined for that end of the can, then the L3 distance is the longer of the two chamfer lengths
between the can and the support leg (see L2 Length above for an illustration).
L3 Factor
Type the factor to use to calculate L3. The default is 0.25.
Cone 1 is the cone nearest the start end of the supporting leg that the can is placed
on.
Cone 1 Length Method
Specifies how you want to define the length of the first cone transition.
 If you select Angle, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section, and the angle specified in the Cone 1
 If you select Distance, the length of the transition is defined explicitly in the Cone 1
Length box. This distance is shown as L1 in the figures above.

Place Can
 If you select Slope, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section size, and the slope specified in the Cone 1
Slope box. This is shown as Slope in the figures above.
Cone 1 Length
the can tube. This distance is shown as L1 in the figures above. This option is available
when Cone 1 Length Method is set to Distance.
Cone 1 Slope
Specifies the slope of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the slope
you specify is greater than 100 (1/100) or less than 1-6. This option is available when Cone
1 Length Method is set to Slope.
Cone 1 Angle
Specifies the angle of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the angle
you specify is less than 1 degree or greater than 89.0 degrees. This option is available when
Cone 1 Length Method is set to Angle.
Cone 2 is the cone nearest the end of the supporting leg that the can is placed on.
Cone 2 Length Method
Specifies how you want to define the length of the end cone transition.
 If you select Angle, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section, and the angle specified in the Cone 2
 If you select Distance, the length of the transition is defined explicitly in the Cone 2
Length box. This distance is shown as L4 in the figures above.
 If you select Slope, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section size, and the slope specified in the Cone 2
Slope box. This is shown as Slope in the figures above.
Cone 2 Length
the can tube. This distance is shown as L4 in the figures above. This option is available
when Cone 2 Length Method is set to Distance.
Cone 2 Slope
Specifies the slope of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the slope
you specify is greater than 100 (1/100) or less than 1-6. This option is available when Cone
2 Length Method is set to Slope.
Cone 2 Angle
Specifies the angle of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the angle
you specify is less than 1 degree or greater than 89.0 degrees. This option is available when
Cone 2 Length Method is set to Angle.
Chamfer Slope
Specifies the slope of the chamfer located at the end of the can where the can's tube
transitions into the can's cone. The chamfer length, which is determined by the defined
sloped, contributes to the length of the can part of the overall can. The value you type here

Place Can
is used for both ends of the can.
Roundoff Distance
Type the distance to round off the total can length. The length of the can is rounded up to
the next increment of this value.
Cone 2 Thickness
Specifies the plate thickness of cone 2.
Cone 2 Material
Specifies the plate material of cone 2.
Cone 2 Grade
Specifies the plate material grade of cone 2.
Inline Can

Place Can
Stub Can
End Can
Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the can properties as they are defined in the reference data. The property name
appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right
side of the grid. If you selected more than one can and then selected the properties command,
only the common properties between the selected cans display.
The properties that display depend on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the member. Currently, only Standard
properties are available for BUCan designed member.

Place Can
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the designed member.
Symbol Definition
Displays the symbol ProgID.
Definition
Specifies the definition rule for the part class. Do not change the default value.
Parameter Rule
Specifies the parameter rule for the part class. Do not change the default value.
Centroid X
workbook.
Centroid Y
workbook.
workbook.

Place Can

workbook.
Is Hollow
Diameter - Start
Displays the diameter of the start cone.

Place Can
Diameter - End
Displays the diameter of the end cone.
Length - Start Cone
Displays the length of the start cone, which is the cone closest to the start of the supporting
member.
Length - End Cone
Displays the length of the end cone.
Section Properties
Displays how section properties are defined.
Section Name
Type the section name. The section name must be unique across the catalog.
Short Name
Type the short name for the section.
EDI Name
Type the Electronic Data Interchange name for the section. This name is used when
translating sections through CIMsteel. This property is currently not used.
Area
Depth
Width
Perimeter
workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the unit weight.
Length Extension
Displays the length extension, which is the minimum distance between the transverse
member and the end of the tube part of the can.
Diameter - Tube
Displays the outside diameter of the tube part of the can.

SECTION 10
Place Assembly Connection

Places an assembly connection or free end cut at the selected
frame connection. Assembly connections define the necessary
trimming between member parts and provide for the generation of
parts such as base plates, gusset plates, and clip angles. Assembly
connections also control cutbacks, copes, notches, bolt holes, weld
preparations, and slots.
This command places member assembly connections or a free end
cut on the member. The software automatically places slab assembly connections when you
place the slab.

Member assembly connections are similar to frame connections, but define the necessary
trimming between member parts and the generation of parts such as base plates, gusset plates,
and clip angles. Assembly connections control member features including cutbacks, copes,
notches, bolt holes, and slots. Whether or not features are placed depends on the member
assembly connection type and the geometry of the connection between the members.
There are several basic assembly connections delivered with the software. You can create your
own assembly connections by editing the StructAssemblyConnections.xls workbook, and
then bulk loading the workbook. For more information on creating your own assembly
connections, see the Structure Reference Data Guide.
For very complex nodal connections, instead of writing a custom assembly
connection, you might want to try Trim Members (on page 201) in the Structure task.
The following general assembly connections are delivered with the software:
The base plate assembly connection places a plate at the end of an

unsupported member. This assembly connection requires an
unsupported frame connection on one member. For example, use this
assembly connection to place a base plate at the bottom of a column.
The corner gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical brace

to a beam and column intersection using a gusset plate. This assembly
connection requires a frame connection with three members, such as
vertical corner brace.

The fitted assembly connection connects two members. This assembly

connection requires a frame connection with two members, such as axis,
seated, or flush. Examples of this connection include a beam framing into
a column or a beam framing into another beam.
The gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical or horizontal

brace to a beam or a vertical brace to a column using a gusset plate. This
assembly connection requires a frame connection with two members,
such as axis.
The miter assembly connection connects two members that meet at an

angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection requires a frame
The splice assembly connection connects two members that are collinear
and end connected. This assembly connection requires a frame
The general surface assembly connection connects a member end with a

nonmember surface such as a slab, a deck, or a hull plate. The member
is cut to surface and a base plate is placed on the member end.
End Cut Assembly Connections

The following end cut assembly connections are delivered with the software:
The end cut along assembly connection cuts the end of one member to
the sides or bottom of another member along the second member's
length.

The end cut bearing plate assembly connection connects the end of a
member along the axis of another member. This is typically used to
attach the end of a member to the flange of the supporting member. The
bearing plate connection works at any angle and provides circular,
rectangular, and triangular bearing plates depending on the supported
member's shape.
The end cut miter assembly connection connects two members that meet
at an angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection required a frame
The end cut split assembly connection connects two members that are
collinear and end connected. This assembly connection requires a frame
The end cut split long box assembly connection is used when the
supporting member is cut square to the supported member while an item
from the Axis category is placed on the supported member.
The end cut split seam angle assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are:
 member axes are collinear to each other
 have identical cross-section type and size
 have identical cardinal point and rotation values
The end cut split short box assembly connection is used when the
supported member is cut square to the supporting member while an item
from the Axis category is placed on the supporting member.
End Cut Assembly Naming Conventions

Each end cut assembly connection name consists of three parts:
[EndCutCase]_[WebCutType]_[FlangeCutType]
where:
 [EndCutCase]
 Axis - Supported member is bounded by the axis curve of the supporting member
 LongBox - End-to-end perpendicular supported member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supporting member
 ShortBox - End-to-end perpendicular supporting member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supported member

 Miter - End-to-end non-collinear

 Split - End-to-end collinear
 SeamAngle - End-to-end collinear where one end is extended
 [WebCutType]
The WebCutType is used to type of web cut that is to be applied at the top of the web and at
the bottom of the web. The following combinations are available (W indicates a straight cut,
C indicates a Cope cut, and S indicates a Snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#C#
 W#S#
 C#C#
 C#S#
 C#W#
 S#S#
 S#C#
 S#W#
 [FlangeCutType]
The FlangeCutType is used to type of flange cut that is to be applied at the left flange
section and at the right flange section. The following combinations are available (W
indicates a straight cut, C indicates a cope cut, and S indicates a snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#S#
 S#S#
 S#W#
You cannot apply different flange cuts when the supported member has both a top flange and a
bottom flange. In these cases, the same flange cut type is applied to both the top and bottom
flange.
You cannot apply different web cuts or flange cuts in the end-to-end cases. The end-to-end
cases place a web cut and flange cut on both the supported member and the supporting
member. For these cases, the same web cut and flange cut are applied to both the supported
member and the supporting member.

1 - Top left flange

2 - Top right flange
3 - Web top
4 - Web bottom
5 - Bottom right flange
6 - Bottom left flange
See Members (on page 22) in the Structure task for important related information.
Locating Assembly Connections

Assembly connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to
Member Assembly Connections in the Structure task, you can locate and select assembly
connections for review and editing. Assembly connections are located at the ends of member
parts and appear as circles when you move the cursor over them. Any assembly components,
such as gusset plates, associated with the assembly connection also highlight.
properties. You cannot measure distances using the assembly connection graphic as an end
point when using the Tools > Measure command.
Place Assembly Connection Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the assembly connection that you are placing or editing.
Assembly Connection Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to

specify additional properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 184).
Select Member/Connection
Activated automatically by the software so that you can select the frame connection or the
member for which you want to place assembly connections.
Finish
Click to place the assembly connection the model.
Cancel
Rejects the selected object.
Accept
Confirms that the selected members, is the member to place assembly connections for. The
software displays in tentative mode the results of the assembly connection.
Condition
Specifies how you want the software to handle existing assembly connections when you try
to place a new assembly connection at the same location. Select Retain existing to keep
the existing assembly connection. Select Update existing to replace the existing assembly
connection with the new assembly connection.
By Rule
Select to allow the software to select the assembly connection to use based on the selected
member parts and their orientation to each other.
Type
Select the assembly connection type to use. If you select By Rule, the software determines
the correct assembly connection to use based on the geometry between the member parts,
and this option is unavailable. If you select More, all available assembly connections display
from which you can select the assembly connection to use. For more information about
assembly connections, see Member Assembly Connections (on page 29).
Member Part Parent
Select to make the member part the parent object of the assembly connection. Clear this
option to specify a generic system, using the System box, to be the assembly connection
parent. Assembly connections created using member parts as their parents can be edited to
have a system parent later if needed.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection belongs. You can define new systems
in the Systems and Specifications task. This option is unavailable if you select Member Part
Parent. Assembly connections created using a system as their parent can be edited to have
a member part as their parent later if needed.
Name
Specify the name of the assembly connection.
Modify Auxiliary Parts Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to add auxiliary parts to the selected assembly connection.

Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection before the assembly connection is
committed to the database. For more information, see Assembly Connection Properties
Dialog Box (on page 184).
Assembly Connection Smart Item
Displays valid smart items for the selected assembly connection.
Add/Delete Auxiliary Parts

Select the parts that can be connected to the selected assembly connection and do not
already have an existing assembly connection. Parts that do not have common geometry
with the selected assembly connection cannot be selected.
Accept
Adds parts from selected parts to the assembly connection and saves the changes to the
database.
Reject
Removes any selected parts from the auxiliary parts list. Only selections made after the last
commit are removed.

 Place an assembly connection (on page 181)
 Edit assembly connection properties (on page 182)
 Delete an assembly connection (on page 182)
 Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection (on page 182)
 Edit assembly connection parts (on page 183)
 Place free end cuts (on page 183)
 Edit free end cut properties (on page 183)
 Delete free end cut (on page 184)

Place an assembly connection

1. Click Place Assembly Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the By Rule option if you want the software to automatically select the type of
assembly connection to place. Clear the By Rule option to select the assembly connection
type yourself.
3. Select the frame connection nearest the member end to which to apply the assembly
connection.
4. If you are selecting the assembly connection type yourself, use the Type option.
5. Click Accept .
The software automatically selects the assembly connection and displays the results.
6. Click Finish.
For more information about the types of assembly connections, see Member
Assembly Connections (on page 29).

Edit assembly connection properties

2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the assembly connection to edit.

5. Edit the assembly connection properties as needed. For more information, see Assembly
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 184).
Delete an assembly connection

3. Select the assembly connection to delete.
4. Click Delete .
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection

This command supports adding parts to an existing assembly connection by selecting an
adjacent plate, profile or member parts that have overlapping geometry.
1. Select an existing assembly connection.
2. Click Select Auxiliary Parts on the ribbon bar.
The Select Auxiliary Parts is enabled for any assembly connection. You
can only add valid auxiliary parts to an assembly connection.
3. Click Accept to add all intersecting parts on the selected parts to the assembly
connection.

Edit assembly connection parts

1. Select an assembly connection, and click Select Auxiliary Parts on the ribbon bar.
2. Select the parts not already connected to the selected assembly connection that have
intersecting geometry.
3. To remove a single part, re-select it from the graphic view or Workspace Explorer.
4. To remove the auxiliary parts added in the current command execution, click Reject on
the ribbon bar.
5. Click Accept to add all intersecting parts on the selected parts to the assembly
connection.
Place free end cuts

1. Click Place Assembly Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the unsupported frame connection nearest the member end to which you want to
apply the free end cuts.
If you select a member part, the software automatically places free end cuts at the
unsupported frame connections.
3. Click Accept.
The software automatically selects the free end cuts and displays the results.
4. Click Finish.
Edit free end cut properties

2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the free end cut to edit.
5. Edit the free end cut properties as needed. For more information, see Free End Cut
Properties Dialog Box.

Delete free end cut

3. Select the free end cut to delete.
4. Click Delete .
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the member assembly connection that you are editing.
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 184)
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 189)
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 189)
See Also
Edit assembly connection properties (on page 182)
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog

Box)
The Occurrence tab displays the member assembly connection properties that you can edit or
that are automatically determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on
the left side of the grid, and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the
grid. If you selected more than one assembly connection, and then selected the properties
command, only the common properties between the selected assembly connections display.
When viewing properties for a single assembly connection, the following properties display.
More properties may display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on properties.
Name
Displays the name of the assembly connection. The assembly connection name is based on
the Name Rule selection. To type a new name for the assembly connection, in the Name
Rule box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the assembly connection in the
Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this assembly connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <assembly
connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <assembly connection> is the name of
the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location> is the global workshare
location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at 0001. For example,
GussetPlateAsmConn_1-1-0045.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <parent
system name>-<assembly connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <parent

system name> is the parent System selected for the assembly connection, <assembly
connection> is the name of the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location>
is the global workshare location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at
0001. For example, Structure System-GussetPlateAsmConn_1-1-0045.
 User Defined - Select to specify the assembly connection name yourself in the Name
box.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection that you are placing belongs. You can
create new systems in the Systems and Specifications task.
Base Plate Assembly Connection Properties

Depth Clearance
Specify the clearance between the flange of the member and
the edge of the base plate. This is dimension C in the figure.
Width Clearance
Specify the clearance between the flange of the member and
the edge of the base plate. This is dimension D in the figure.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Plate Category
Select the plate category.
Plate Type
Select the plate type.
Miter Assembly Connection Properties

Top Distance
Specifies the distance between the top flange of the member section and the top of the
plate.
Bottom Distance
Specifies the distance between the bottom flange of the member section and the bottom of
the plate.
Left Distance
Specifies the distance between the left edge of the member section and the left edge of the
plate.
Right Distance
Specifies the distance between the right edge of the member section and the right edge of
the plate.
Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the

first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
With Plates
Specifies whether or not a plate is inserted between the member ends. Select False to not
place the plate. Select True to place the plate.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the member ends.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Slab by Member Boundary

Clearance
Type a clearance distance between the edge of the slab and the member.
Port Face Position
Select the location on the member at which the slab is to stop. You can select the outmost
plane, the centerline, or the in-most plane on the member.
Detailed Connection
Select True to trim the slab using the boundary member as the cutting edge. Select False to
not trim the slab.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected Port Face Position and the edge of the slab. A
negative value moves the edge into the body of the slab. A positive value moves the edge
out from the body of the slab.
Slab by Slab Assembly

Trim Type
Defines the type of trimming.
 By Whole Slab - Trim by the slab boundary geometry before trim.
 By Lateral Face - Trim by the slab boundary geometry after trim.
 By Extended Lateral Face - Trim by the extension of the lateral face of the slab
boundary.
Trim Excess Material
Specify whether to trim the exceeding part.
Trim Excess Material Offset
Specify the offset applied on the lateral face used to trim.
Slab Free Edge Assembly

Reference Direction
Select the reference direction for the angle:

Normal
The angle is measured from a vector perpendicular to the slab edge.
 Horizontal - The angle is measured from the global XY plane in the model.
 Vertical - The angle is measured from the Z-Axis in the model.
Angle
Type a slope for the slab edge represented by the assembly connection. If the slab was
place using the Face Position Top, the side face rotates about the top slab edge. If the slab
was placed using the Face Position Bottom, the side face rotates about the bottom slab
edge.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected boundary object and the edge of the slab.
Splice Assembly Connection Properties

Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the
first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the ends of the members.
Splice With
Select the plates that you want to use in the splice.
Web Plate Position
Select a web plate position.
Distance from flange gage line
Specifies the distance from the flange gage line.
Distance from web gage line
Specifies the distance from the web gage line.
Flange Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Length
Specifies the length of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Width
Specifies the width of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Category
Select the plate category for the flange plates.
Flange Plate Type

Select the plate type for the flange plates.

Web Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the web plates
Web Plate Length
Specifies the length of the web plates.
Web Plate Width
Specifies the width of the web plates.
Web Plate Category
Select the plate category for the web plates.
Web Plate Type
Select the plate type for the web plates.
General Surface Assembly Connection Properties

With Pad
Select True to place a steel pad between the member end and the surface. Select False to
have the member end connect directly to the surface.
Pad Type
Select the shape of the pad.
Sizing Rule
Select whether you want to the software to automatically size the pad or if you want to size
the pad.
Offset
Type the distance between the end of the member and the face of the surface.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 184)

Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the member assembly connection properties as they are defined in
the reference data. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than
one assembly connection and then selected the properties command, only the common
properties between the selected assembly connections display.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 184)
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the member assembly connection. Assembly connection rule
selections affect the selections available for other smart occurrence objects that are children of
the assembly connection.
 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when
you select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question
Displays questions asked by the rule.
Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or
answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.

If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.
1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.
 The available questions, answers, and results vary depending upon the detailed parts
associated with the connection.
 The questions in each Selection tab represent the default rules delivered with the software.
Customized rules may have different questions.

SECTION 11
Place Splits
Divides a member system (created in
the Structure task) into multiple member
parts. The resulting member system is a
set of continuous member parts that move
as a single entity. This splitting is useful
when you want to resolve the interference
between two intersecting structural objects,
such as pair of cross braces, or when you
want to split the columns in your model at
certain elevations. You can split member
systems at another member system, at a point along the member system, a grid plane, an
elevation plane, deck, bulkhead, or plate system.
Only member systems can be split using the command. However, the object used to split the
member system can be another member system, a grid plane, an elevation plane, deck,
bulkhead, or plate system.
To reconnect a split member system, delete the split connections. The split connects are child
objects of the member system that they are splitting.
If after you split a member system into multiple member parts you want to delete an individual
member part, you will need to create a member system parent for that member part using the
Convert option. Set the locate filter to Parts and select the member part, then click Convert
on the modify ribbon. For more information, see Modify Linear Member Part Ribbon in Place
Member End Releases

If a column is split, the upper end of the lower column and the lower end of upper column has all
end releases fixed. The lower end of the lower column and the upper end of the upper column
do not change.
For beams and braces that are split, end releases on either side of the split are pinned for
rotation (RY and RZ). The free end of a cantilevered beam or brace has fully fixed member end
releases.
Boundary Conditions
Boundary Conditions remain on the ends for which they were defined. For example, if end 1 of
the original member was fully supported (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ) and end 2 was supported only in
RX and RZ, then end 1 of new member 1 gets fully supported and end 2 of new member 2 gets
the RX and RZ support. The new interior ends (end 2 for member 1 and end 1 for member 2) do
not have any supports defined.
For more information about boundary conditions, refer to the Structural Analysis task
documentation.

Place Splits
Loads
Concentrated loads stay where they were placed (the physical location along the original
member part length). The absolute or relative placement value is recalculated based on the new
member part length.
Distributed loads are split into two distributed loads with the same magnitude (one distributed
load for each new member part).
Partially distributed loads do one of two things based on the split location. If the split location is
between the partially distributed load's end points, the load is split into two partially distributed
loads - one on each new member part on either side of the split location.
If the split location is outside of the partially distributed load's end points, the load is unaffected
other than having the end points' absolute or relative placement values recalculated based on
the new member part length.
For more information about loads, refer to the Structural Analysis task documentation.
Fireproofing
When a member with fireproofing is split, Smart 3D creates new fireproofing on the two new split
members with the same setback references as the original member's fireproofing. In addition,
the software adjusts the setback distances so that the fireproofing maintains the same geometric
start and end position and looks solid throughout.
If you delete a split, the fireproofing is merged using the properties from the existing fireproofing.
You must edit the resulting fireproofing and adjust the setbacks and other properties as needed.
Designed Members
When splitting designed members, you need to be aware of these limitations:
 You can split designed members only by a rolled member, a specified point, a grid plane, or
another designed member.
 If you split the designed member by a rolled member, then each plate in the designed
member has a logical connection to the rolled member.
 If you split the designed member by a grid plane, then the plate parts on one side of the grid
plane have a logical connection to the designed member part on the other side of the grid
plane.
 The split always places a square end-cut on the designed member. This square cut is
replaced by the appropriate end-cut when the designed member is detailed.
 Hangers, sketched boundaries, openings, features, chamfers, detailed plate parts,
intersection seams connected to the designed member's plate systems before the split are
deleted when the split is complete. Child plate systems and other plate systems referencing
a designed member's plate system are put on the To Do List. You must redefine the
reference relationships to remove them from the To Do List.
 Plate systems bounded by the designed member's plate systems before the split become
unbounded when the split is complete. Stiffeners and edge reinforcements on these plate
systems are also deleted upon completion of the split.

Place Splits
Locating Split Connections

Split connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to
Connections, you can locate and select split connections for review and editing. Split
connections are located at the ends of member parts where the split is located and appear as
circles when you move the cursor over them.
When you select a split connection, the software displays the parent member system of the split
connection in the ribbon. Select the Edit > Properties command to edit the split connection
properties. You cannot measure distances using the split connection as an end point when
using the Tools > Measure command.
Place Split Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the split that you are placing or editing.
Split Properties
Activates the Split Properties dialog box. For more information, see Split Connection
Properties Dialog Box (on page 199).
Place
Select how to define the split location.
 Select By Object to split the member system by another model object that you identify.
 Select By Point to split the member system at a point along the member system that
you identify.
Finish
Splits the member systems using the options that you have specified.
Cancel
Clears the selected objects.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects and moves you to the next step in the command.
By Object Options
Split Members
Select the members to split. Remember, if you set Split Status to By Rule then you cannot
split members that have Continuous set for the Continuity Type. You can split only
members set to Intercostal.

Place Splits
Splitting Members
Select the objects at which to split the member systems. The objects can be another
member system, a grid plane, an elevation plane, deck, or a bulkhead.
Split Status
Specifies the method to determine which member system splits another member system.
 By Rule - The software looks at the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority Number
values defined on the Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 61) to determine which member system to split. Member systems
set to Continuous split the other member system. Member systems set to Intercostal
are split by the other member system. The Continuity Priority Number is used to
select which member system is split when two member systems intersect, but both have
Intercostal for the Continuity Type. Member systems with a lower continuity priority (1,
2, 3, for example) split member systems with a higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9, for
example).
 Split First - The member systems that you identified during the Split Members step
are split by the member systems that you identified during the Splitting Members
step.
 Split Second - The member systems that you identified during the Splitting
Members step are split by the member systems that you identified during the Split
Members step.
 Split Both - All member systems that you have identified in both steps are split against
each other.
 Split None - No member systems are split, but the interference between the two objects
is suppressed.
By Point Options
Split Member
Select the member to split.
Splitting Point
Defines the split location point.
Location Definition
Specifies how the split location is calculated. The location can be defined as Ratio or
Distance.
 A ratio location can be thought of as a distance percentage along the member. For
example, a split placed at a relative distance of 0.333 is located at one-third the member
length measured from the member start. A split placed at a relative distance of 0.5 is
located at the middle of the member.
 A distance value is the actual distance from the start or end of the member. The
software verifies that the absolute distance that you specify is not past the end of the
member.
Offset Reference
Select whether to measure the split location from the start or the end of the member.

Place Splits
Offset Value
Specify the position of the split as either the ratio distance along the member or the absolute
distance (as defined by Location Definition.)

 Split a member that intersects another member (on page 195)
 Split a cross brace (on page 196)
 Split columns at a plane (on page 197)
 Split a member at a point along member (on page 198)
 Set member split priority (on page 199)
 Remove a split (on page 199)
Split a member that intersects another member

If the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority Number values have been set for
the member systems, you can use the By Rule option to have the software automatically
determine which member system to split. For more information, see Place Split Ribbon in
Place Splits (on page 191).
4. Select the member to split.
5. Click Accept .

Place Splits
6. Select the splitting member.
7. Click Finish.
Split a cross brace

4. Select the cross brace to split.
5. Click Accept .

Place Splits
6. Select the other cross brace.
7. Click Finish.
Split columns at a plane

2. In the Split Status box, select By Rule.
3. Select the columns to split.
4. In the Workspace Explorer, select the elevation plane at which to split the columns.

Place Splits
You can also select the elevation plane by selecting it on the Z-axis ruler. Select
View > Rulers to turn on rulers.
5. Click Accept .
6. Click Finish.
Use the Grids task to create elevation planes.
Split a member at a point along member

2. In the Place box, select By Point.
3. Select the member to split.
An arrow indicates the split point.
4. In the Location Definition box, select Distance or Ratio.

5. Define the location for the split using the Offset Reference and Offset Value boxes.
6. Click Finish.

Place Splits
Set member split priority

2. Set the Locate Filter to Members System.
3. Select the member system to edit.
4. Click Properties .
5. Set the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority Number options as required. See
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 61) for
information on these two properties.
6. Click OK.
Remove a split
2. Set the Locate Filter to Split Connections.
3. In a graphic view, select the split to remove.
4. Click Delete .
Split Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the split connection that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 199)
General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the split connection.
Category
Select the type of properties to view for the selected split connection.
Name
Specifies the name of the split connection.
Name Rule
Select the name rule to use to name the split connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the split connection using the format: <split status>-
<location>-<index> where <split status> is the Split Status that was used to create the
split connection, <location> is the global workshare location, and <index> is a unique
index number that starts at 0001. For example, Split First-1-0004.

Place Splits
 Unique Name Rule - Names the split connection using the format: <split status>-
<location>-<index> where <split status> is the Split Status that was used to create the
split connection, <location> is the global workshare location, and <index> is a unique
index number that starts at 0001. For example, Split First-1-0004.
 User Defined - Select this name rule to name the split connection yourself in the Name
box.
Parent
Displays the parent member system to which the split belongs.
Split Parent Status
Specifies the method Smart 3D uses to determine the member system that splits another
member system. The list is defined by the SplitStatus codelist.
By Rule indicates that the software looks at the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority
Number values defined on the Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 61) to determine the member system to split. Member systems set to
Continuous split the other member system. Member systems set to Intercostal are split by
the other member system. The Continuity Priority Number specifies the member system
that is split when two member systems intersect, but both have Intercostal for the
Continuity Type. Member systems with a lower continuity priority (1, 2, 3, for example) split
member systems with a higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9, for example).
Split First indicates that the member systems that you identified during the Split
Members step are split by the member systems that you identified during the Splitting
Members step.
Split Second indicates that the member systems that you identified during the Splitting
Members step are split by the member systems that you identified during the Split
Members step.
Split Both indicates that all member systems that you have identified in both steps are split
against each other.
Split None indicates that no member systems are split, but the interference between the
two objects is suppressed.
Offset
Specify the offset from the intersecting plane or surface to place the split. You can specify a
positive or negative number. This option is only available after the split connection is placed
when defining a split using a grid plane, elevation plane, or surface as the splitting object.
See Also
Split Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 199)

SECTION 12
Trim Members
Manually copes and snips member parts based on objects and planes that you specify. Use
this command when assembly connections are not sufficient to resolve the interference conflicts
due to the position, orientation, and complexity of the intersecting members. You can place a
trim and an assembly connection at the same member end. However, the results of the trim
might be overwritten by the assembly connection results making the trim redundant. Both the
trim and the assembly connection are listed in the Workspace Explorer under the member part.
Trim Member Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the trim that you are placing or editing.
Trim Feature Properties
Activates the Trim Feature Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see Trim
Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 204).
Select Members
Select the members that you want to cut.
Select Cutters
Select the objects to use to cut the members.
Finish
Trims the members using the cutters you have defined.
Cancel
Rejects the selected objects.
Accept
Confirms that the selected objects are the one you want use.
Trim Feature
Select the type of trim you want to place. Click More to select from all available trimming
types defined in the catalog.
Name
Specify the name of the trim feature.

 Cope a member web (on page 202)
 Trim member to surface (on page 203)
 Delete a member trim (on page 203)

Trim Members
Cope a member web

1. Click Trim Member on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Trim Feature box on the ribbon, click More.
3. In the tree view, expand Member End Trim Feature > Web Corner Cope Feature.
4. Select Web Cope 1/2in Clearance in the Name column.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the member whose web you want to cope.
7. Click Accept .
8. Select the plane that defines the cut into length of the web.

Trim Members
9. Click Finish.
Trim member to surface

1. Click Trim Member on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Trim Feature box on the ribbon, click More.
3. In the tree view, expand Member End Trim Feature > Surface Trim Feature.
4. Select SurfaceTrim_1 in the Name column.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the member to trim.
7. Click Accept .
8. Select the surface to trim the member.
9. Click Finish.
Delete a member trim

2. Select Structure in the Locate Filter.
3. In the Workspace Explorer, expand the member prismatic part branch.
4. Select the trim feature node under the member part branch to delete.
5. Click Delete .
You can also use the Tools > Select by Filter command to select the member trims
to delete. Define your filter using the Object Type tab and the Structure > Features > Surface
Trim Feature or Structure > Features > Web Corner Cope Feature objects.

Trim Members
Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the trim feature that you are placing.
See Also
Definition Tab (Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 204)
Definition Tab (Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the trim feature properties as they are defined in the reference data.
appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one trim feature and then
selected the properties command, only the common properties between the selected trim
features display.
See Also
Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 204)
Occurrence Tab (Feature Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays the feature properties that you can edit or that are automatically
determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on the left side of the grid
and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more
than one feature, and then selected the Properties command, only the common properties
between the selected feature display.
When you view properties for a single feature, the following properties display. More properties
may display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the Structure
Reference Data Guide for more information on properties.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the feature. The feature name is based on the Name Rule selection. If
you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User Defined.
Name Rule
Specifies the naming rule that you want to use to name this feature. You can select one of
the listed rules or select User Defined to specify the feature name yourself in the Name
box.
System
Displays the name of the parent system.
SurfaceTrim_1 Options
Clearance
Displays the clearance value.

Trim Members
Squared End
Specifies whether the end of the member is squared or skewed when
the two members are not perpendicular. Set this option to 0 if you
want the member end to look like end A in the figure. Set this option
to 1 if you want the member end to look like end B in the figure.
Flange Angle
Displays the angle between the normal to the cutting surface and the member axis in the
horizontal plane with respect to the member (the flange plane).
Web Angle
Specifies the angle between the normal to the cutting surface and the member axis in the
vertical plane with respect to the member (the web plane).
Trim End
Specifies which member end is being trimmed. Type 1 for the start. Type 2 for the end.
Web Cope 1/2 in Clearance Options

Min Cope Length Clearance
Specifies the distance between the flanges. This is dimension B in the figure.
Min Cope Depth Clearance
Specifies the distance between the web and the flange. This is dimension C in the figure.
Rounding Increment

Trim Members
Specifies the value by which to increment the cope dimension. For example, if you set the
Increment to 2" (inches), the cope dimension is always
divisible by 2 (2", 4", 6", 8", 10", and so on). Similarly, if you
set the Increment to 3", the cope dimension is always divisible
by 3 (3", 6", 9", 12", and so on). Setting the Increment value
to 0 causes the cope to be the exact length needed to clear.
Cope Radius
Specifies the radius of the cope at the intersection of the cope
length clearance and cope depth clearance. These are
corners A in the figure.
Cope Radius Type
Specifies the type (Radius (1), Chamfer (2), or None (0)) for the cope radius.
Web Radius
Specifies the web radius of the member being coped. These are corners F in the figure.
Web Radius Type
Specifies the type (Radius (1), Chamfer (2), or None) (0) for the web radius.
Cope End
Used for reporting. Leave blank.
Cope Length
Specifies the cope length. This is dimension D in the figure.
Cope Depth
Specifies the cope depth. This is dimension E in the figure.
Cope Edge
Used for reporting. Leave blank.

SECTION 13
Place Fireproofing
Places fireproofing on selected members. Fireproofing is placed in the Insulation aspect,
which is automatically turned on for you when insulation is placed. You can use the Format >
View command to turn the insulation display on and off in the model as needed.
You can define fireproofing setback distances from each member end, apply multi-segmented
fireproofing along a single member, and apply fireproofing to the entire model in one operation
while still maintaining placement rules for different member types.
The material, grade, thickness, and rating of the fireproofing are controlled by the fireproofing
specifications defined in the catalog.
 You cannot place fireproofing on slabs, walls, plates, marine profiles, or surfaces.
 You cannot copy fireproofing directly from one member to another. However, fireproofing will
copy and move with its parent member.
Encasement Rules
You can edit the fireproofing encasement rules in the catalog without any need for custom
programming. Two encasement rules, Member Concrete and Member Fibrous, are delivered by
default with the software under the Structure > Objects > Insulation > Fireproofing node in
the Catalog task.
Fireproofing is specification-driven with user-modifiable encasement rules:
 Encasement rules can be applied to any cross-section, any member type, or any
combination of cross-section and member type.
 Sets of encasement rules can be driven by a fireproofing specification. Therefore, you can
create specifications based on a particular project or a particular client.
The standard encasement shapes (block, block-top exposed, contour, contour- top exposed,
and round) are provided. You can define custom encasement shapes using the 2D Symbols
editor.

Place Fireproofing
Block Block-Top Exposed Contour Contour-Top Exposed
Encasements can be placed on members using the encasement rules or can be selected
manually for placement on a member.
Relationship to the Parent Member

Fireproofing must be in the same permission group as the member it is placed on. Therefore,
the software automatically maintains this relationship by changing the fireproofing permission
group when you change the parent member permission group. Similarly, if you change the
fireproofing permission group, the software automatically changes the member permission
group to match.
A similar situation is maintained for the approval status. The member's approval status cannot
be "less" than the fireproofing approval status. Setting the member to a lesser approval status
(from Approved to In Review for example) will cause the fireproofing to be set to the same
status. Similarly, increasing the fireproofing status increases the approval status of the member.
Place Fireproofing Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the fireproofing that you are placing or editing.
Insulation Properties
Activates the Insulation Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see Insulation
Select Members
Activated automatically by the software so that you can select the members on which you
want to place fireproofing/insulation.
Finish
Click to place the fireproofing on the selected members.
Cancel
Accept
Confirms that the selected members are the members on which to place fireproofing. The
software displays fireproofing in tentative mode.
By Rule
Allows the software to select the fireproofing to use based on the selected member and the
encasement rules defined in the catalog. You can edit encasement rules by going to the
Catalog task and navigating to the Structure > Objects > Insulation > Fireproofing node.
Condition
Specifies how you want the software to handle existing fireproofing when you try to place a

Place Fireproofing
new fireproofing on the same member. Select Retain to keep the existing fireproofing.
Select Add to add additional fireproofing to a member that already has fireproofing.
Insulation Specification
Select the insulation specification that you want to use. You can edit existing or define new
insulation specifications in the Catalog task by navigating to the Structure > Object
Specifications > Insulation > Fireproofing node.
Encasement
Select the encasement that you want to use from the Catalog. Available encasements
depend on the insulation specification that you have selected. If you select the By Rule
option, then the encasement option is not available because the Encasement item is
selected by the encasement rule.
Reference 1
Select the reference point from which to cut back the fireproofing. If you select the By Rule
option, then the Reference 1 option is not available because the Reference 1 value is
defined in the encasement rule.
 Part Start - The start of the member part, which takes into account any assembly
connection cutbacks or other features which may change member length.
 Part End - The end of the member part, which takes into account any assembly
 Axis Start - The start of the member part's axis, which will remain unaffected by
member part features.
 Axis End - The end of the member part's axis, which will remain unaffected by member
part features.
Distance 1
Specifies the distance between the reference 1 location and that end of the fireproofing. If
you select the By Rule option, then this option is not available because the Distance 1
value is defined in the encasement rule.
Reference 2
Select the reference point from which to cut back the fireproofing. If you select the By Rule
option, then this option is not available because the Reference 2 value is defined in the
encasement rule.
part features.
Distance 2
Specifies the distance between the reference 2 location and that end of the fireproofing. If
you select the By Rule option, then this option is not available because the Distance 2

Place Fireproofing
value is defined in the encasement rule.

 Place fireproofing automatically (on page 210)
 Place fireproofing manually (on page 211)
 Modify fireproofing properties (on page 211)
 Place two types of fireproofing on a single member (on page 212)
 Delete fireproofing (on page 212)
Place fireproofing automatically

1. Click Place Fireproofing on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the By Rule option to use the fireproofing properties defined in the encasement rules.
3. Select the member to which you want to apply the fireproofing.
You can select more than one member by dragging a selection fence around the
members.
4. Set Condition to Add.

Set Condition to Retain if members in the selection set already have fireproofing
and you do not want additional fireproofing to be placed on them.
5. In the Insulation Spec box, select the insulation specification to use.
6. Click Accept .
The software tentatively displays the fireproofing using the settings that you have specified.
7. Click Finish to place the fireproofing.

Place Fireproofing
Place fireproofing manually

2. Clear the By Rule option to set the fireproofing properties yourself.
3. Select the member to which you want to apply the fireproofing.
4. Set Condition to Add to create additional fireproofing on members that already have
fireproofing. Set to Retain to skip members that already have fireproofing.
5. In the Insulation Spec box, select the insulation specification to use.
6. In the Encasement box, select the encasement to use.
7. Define any fireproofing setbacks that you need using the Reference 1, Distance 1,
Reference 2, and Distance 2 boxes.
8. Click Accept .
The software tentatively displays the fireproofing using the settings that you have specified.
9. Click Finish to place the fireproofing.
Modify fireproofing properties

2. Set the Locate Filter to Insulation.
3. Select the fireproofing to modify.
4. Edit the fireproofing properties as needed using the ribbon or properties dialog box.

Place Fireproofing
Place two types of fireproofing on a single member

2. Clear the By Rule option to set the fireproofing properties.
3. Select the member to which you want to apply the different types of fireproofing.
4. Set Condition to Add.
5. In the Insulation Spec box, select the first insulation specification to use.
6. In the Encasement box, select the first encasement to use.
7. Define the fireproofing setbacks that you need for this fireproofing using the Reference 1,
Distance 1, Reference 2, and Distance 2 boxes.
8. Click Accept .
9. Verify the fireproofing is where you want it on the member. Adjust the setback properties if
needed.
10. Click Finish to place the first fireproofing type.
11. Visually verify that the member is still selected (yellow highlighted). If it is not highlighted,
select the member again.
12. Change the insulation specification and encasement as needed for the second type of
fireproofing that you want to place on the member.
13. Define the fireproofing setbacks for the second type using the Reference 1, Distance 1,
Reference 2, and Distance 2 boxes.
14. Click Accept .
15. Verify the fireproofing is where you want it on the member. Adjust the setback properties if
needed to keep it from overlapping the first fireproofing that you placed.
16. Click Finish to place the second fireproofing type.
Delete fireproofing
2. Set the Locate Filter to Insulation.
3. Select the fireproofing to delete.
You can delete fireproofing from more than one member by dragging a selection
fence around the members on which you want to delete the fireproofing.
4. Click Delete .

Place Fireproofing
Insulation Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the insulation that you are editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 213)
Definition Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 217)
Specification Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 219)
Occurrence Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays the insulation properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one insulation, and then selected the Properties command, only the common properties
between the selected insulation display.
When viewing properties for a single insulation type, the following properties display. More
properties may display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on properties.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the insulation. The insulation name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you want to type a new name for the insulation, in the Name Rule box, select
User Defined, and then type a name for the insulation in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specifies the naming rule that you want to use to name this insulation.
 Default Name Rule - Names the insulation using the format: <encasement name>-
<location>-<index> where <encasement name> is the insulation specification
encasement name, <location> is the global workshare locationID, and <index> is a
unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, Column_Contour
Encased_All_Fibr-1-0003.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the insulation using the format: <encasement name>-
<location>-<index> where <encasement name> is the insulation specification
 Catalog Default Name Rule - Names the insulation using the format: <encasement
name>-<location>-<index> where <encasement name> is the insulation specification
 User Defined - Select this option to specify the insulation name yourself in the Name
box.

Place Fireproofing
System
Selects the system to which the insulation belongs. You can create new systems in the
Systems and Specifications task.
By Rule
Displays True if the insulation was placed using an encasement rule. Displays False if the
insulation was placed with the user selecting the insulation properties manually.
Surface Area
Specifies the measurement of the surface area of insulation.
Volume
Displays the volume of the insulation.
Specifies whether or not this insulation is reported.
Reporting Type
Selects the reporting requirements code for the insulation. Valid codes are defined in the
Catalog task in the Reporting Type select list.
Setback Distance 1
Specifies the distance between the reference 1 location and that end of the fireproofing.
Setback Distance 2
Specifies the distance between the reference 2 location and that end of the fireproofing.
Setback Reference 1
Select the reference point from which to cutback the fireproofing.
part features.
Setback Reference 2
Select the reference point from which to cutback the fireproofing.
part features.

Place Fireproofing
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Wet Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Wet CG X
Wet CG Y
Wet CG Z

Fabrication Type

Place Fireproofing
Construction Type

Coating Color
Responsibility

Place Fireproofing
See Also
Insulation Properties Dialog Box (on page 213)
Definition Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the insulation properties as they are defined in the reference data.
appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one insulation and then selected
the properties command, only the common properties between the selected insulation display.
Name
Defines the encasement item name. The delivered encasement items use the naming
convention of Member Type_Encasement Type_Cross Section_Material. We recommend
that you use a similar naming convention or adopt the delivered naming convention.
Cross Section Type
Defines the cross section type to which the encasement option applies. The available cross
section types depend on the section libraries that you have included in your Catalog.
Examples of valid cross section types include: 2L, L, HSSC, W, and so forth. Use an
asterisk (*) to indicate that the encasement item is applicable to all cross section types.
Definition
Defines the ProgID of the encasement rule. The delivered definition is
SPSMemberEncasements.MemberEncaseDef.
Encasement Type
Specifies the encasement type. You can add encasement types by editing the Member
Fireproofing Application Type select list in the Catalog task.
1 Contour Fully Encased
2 Contour Flange Exposed
3 Block Fully Encased
4 Block Flange Exposed
5 Block with Voids
6 Block with Voids Flange Exposed
7 through 988 are reserved by Intergraph for future use
999 is Custom
Fireproofing Label
Defines the fireproofing label to use on drawings.
Member Type Category
Defines the member type to which the encasement item applies. Member types are defined

Place Fireproofing
in the Structural Member Type select list in the Catalog task.

Setback Distance 1
Defines the distance between the Setback Reference 1 location and the
insulation/fireproofing.
Setback Distance 2
Defines the distance between the Setback Reference 2 location and the
insulation/fireproofing.
Setback Reference 1
Defines the location along the member from which to measure the insulation/fireproofing
setback.
part features.
Setback Reference 2
Defines the location along the member from which to measure the insulation/fireproofing
setback.
Symbol Definition
Defines the ProgID of the insulation symbol.
See Also

Place Fireproofing
Specification Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog Box)

The Specification tab displays the insulation specification properties as they are defined in the
reference data. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding
property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one insulation and
then selected the properties command, only the common specification properties between the
selected insulation display.
Specification Name
Defines the insulation specification name. All insulation specification names should be
unique.
Specification Description
Describes the insulation specification.
Purpose
Defines the purpose of the insulation specification. The insulation specification purpose is
defined in the StructInsulationPurpose select list in Catalog.
Material Name
Defines the insulation material. This material is defined in Catalog in the Structure >
Materials > Properties node.
Material Grade
Specifies the object material grade. To change the options on the list, edit the Structure >
Materials > Properties node in Catalog.
Thickness
Defines the insulation thickness.
Encasement Rule
Defines the encasement rules that this insulation specification must use. Encasement rules
are defined in Catalog in the Structure > Objects > Insulation > Fireproofing node or in
the StructMemberFireproofing workbook.
Fireproofing Rating
Defines the time for which the fireproofing is rated.
See Also

SECTION 14
Place Slabs
Places a slab in the model. Slabs
are used to model solid surfaces,
such as floors or steel grating, in
your model. The software places
slabs on a supporting plane, or
multiple planes, that you select and
between selected boundaries. The
supporting plane of the slab can be
an elevation plane, a grid plane, or a
plane that you define during
placement. You can define planes at
an angle to an existing elevation or
grid plane, or you can define a plane
in space using three points.
The slab boundaries that you can
select include grid lines, members,
edges of members, edges of equipment, faces of other slabs, and many other objects in the
model. When an object that is used as a boundary moves, the software automatically updates
the slab to reflect the move.
You also have the option to sketch the boundaries of the slab in the model's 3D or 2D
environments, or combine the selecting of boundaries for some sides of the slab and sketching
the other sides.
We recommend that you place grid planes using the Grids task before placing slabs
so that supporting planes are available for selection.
Place Slab Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the slab that you are placing.
Slab Properties
Activates the Slab Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify additional
slab properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on the ribbon.
For more information, see Slab Properties Dialog Box (on page 234).
Define Plane
Select the support plane of the slab. You can select multiple planes to place multiple slabs
at the same time. For example, if you have a multi-story building with the same floor
geometry and you want the same size and type of slab on each floor, you can select the
plane for each floor. You can select each floor elevation plane, and then define the
boundaries on one floor. The software uses the same boundaries for each elevation level
and places the slabs. After placement, the slabs are unrelated to each other and can be
edited as individual entities.

Place Slabs
Custom Sketching Plane

When the support plane is sloped (you used 3 Point Plane or Angle to Plane to define the
support plane), you can select a custom sketching plane on which to define the boundaries.
When placing a sloped slab, the default boundary plane is normal to the slab face (left side
of the figure). The boundaries that you define are projected normal to sloped slab face.
However, if you select the Custom Sketching Plane option on the ribbon, the software
prompts you to select a boundary plane (usually an elevation plane). The boundaries that
you defined on the custom boundary plane are projected parallel to the Z-axis (right side of
the figure).
Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the slab. You can define the slab boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the slab to maintain the boundary relationship. For example,
you can select the outside edge of a beam flange as a boundary along one side of a slab.
Later, if the section size for the beam is changed and the flange edge moves out an inch,
the software automatically moves the edge of the slab an inch to match the new location of
the flange edge.
Define Boundary Offsets
Activates the Boundary Offsets dialog box. This
dialog box allows you to define an offset distance for
each boundary that you have defined. Select a row
to highlight the boundary in the model. Then, type
the distance from the boundary to place the edge of
the slab. Type 0 to place the slab edge on the
boundary. Type a negative number to offset the slab
inside the boundary. Type a positive number to offset
the slab outside the boundary.
Finish
Places the slab using the defined parameters.
Plane Method
Specifies how you want to define the support plane. This option is only available when you
are defining the support plane.

Place Slabs
 Select Coincident to specify that you want the slab placed on the support plane.
 Select Offset from a Plane to place the slab a specified distance from the support
plane. If you choose this option, you must define the offset distance.
 Select Angle to plane to place the slab at a specified angle or slope to the support
plane. If you choose this option, you must define an axis of rotation and the angle or
slope.
 Select Vector & Point to specify the support plane using two points to define a
vector normal to the plane and a third point to define the plane position along the vector.
 Select 3 Point Plane to specify the support plane using three points that you specify
in the model.
Offset
Specify the offset distance for the slab from the selected support plane. You can specify the
offset dynamically in graphics or by typing the distance. This option is only available when
Plane Method is set to Offset from a Plane. Click Lock/Unlock to lock the offset distance.
Angle
Specify the angle at which to place the slab relative to the support plane. You have to define
the axis of rotation using two points before you can define the angle. This option is only
available when Plane Method is set to Angle to plane. Click Lock/Unlock to lock the
angle.
Slope
Specify the slope at which to place the slab relative to the support plane. You have to define
the axis of rotation using two points before you can define the slope. This option is only
available when Plane Method is set to Angle to plane. Click Lock/Unlock to lock the
slope.
Select Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model to define the slab boundaries. This option is
only available when you are defining the slab boundaries.
Add References to Sketch 2D
Allows you to select which objects in the 3-D environment to see in the sketch 2-D
environment when you are drawing the boundaries of the slab. The objects that you select
will display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define relationships and
dimensions to these blue-lined objects in 2-D. The software may also automatically retrieve
3-D objects to display in the 2-D environment. The automatically selected objects will display
as grey lines. These grey line objects are read-only (you cannot define relationships or
dimensions to them) and are there to help you visualize the model. Member center lines are
also automatically displayed as dash-dot lines in the 2-D sketches. This option is only
available when you are drawing the slab boundaries.
For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole,
Sketch 2D environment. The aspect geometry displays as dashed lines. You can define
dimensions, but not relationships, to these aspects in 2D.
For slabs and walls defined in the sketch 2-D environment, Smart 3D removes
any constraints external to the defining group when you:

Place Slabs
 Copy a slab or wall. The original slab or wall will still have the constraints; however, the
newly created copy of the slab or wall will not have the external constraints.
 Move a slab or wall. All external constraints are removed from the slab or wall.
 Rotate a slab or wall. All external constraints are removed from the slab or wall.
The defining group is the lines (or other shapes) that you place in the sketch 2-D
environment that defines the actual slab or wall. An example of an external to the group
constraint might be an edge of a Slab XZY offset from the edge of Slab 123. The constraint
is between two different slabs (defined by two different groups) so it is removed. An example
of an internal to the group constraint that is not removed might be one slab side constrained
to be parallel to the opposite side. In this case both sides belong to the same slab, and
hence the same group, and the constraint is therefore not removed.
Draw
Opens the sketch 2-D environment in which you can draw the boundaries of the slab. You
can draw multiple slabs at a time in the 2-D environment. This option is only available when
you are defining the slab boundaries.
Select Patches to Compose the Slab
If the boundaries that you selected can form the boundary for the slab in more than one
way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select
one or more bounded areas to clarify the required slab boundary. For more information, see
Solve Ambiguous Boundaries (on page 232).
Sketch 3D
Select this option to sketch the boundaries of the slab in the 3-D environment.
Cancel
Clears all selected planes or boundary objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected planes or boundary objects.
System
Select the parent system for the slab that you are placing. Systems are defined using the
Type
Select the type of slab to place, such as a slab on grade or composite deck. The properties
change depending on the slab type that you select. You can define a custom slab type in the
StructSlabGeneral.xls workbook in the reference data. Refer to the Structure Reference
Data Guide for more information.
Composition
Select a slab composition from the list. Available compositions depend on the type of slab
being placed. You can define a custom composition using the StructSlabGeneral.xls and
StructSlabLayer.xls workbooks in the reference data. Refer to the Structure Reference
Data Guide for more information.
Name
Displays the name of the slab that you are placing.

Place Slabs
Priority
Catalog.
Face Position
Specifies the way in which the slab is placed in the model with respect to the support plane.
To change the options on the list, edit the Slab Face Position select list in Catalog.
Center indicates that the slab is placed with respect to its centroidal axis.
Top indicates that the slab is placed with respect to its top face.
Bottom indicates that the slab is placed with respect to its bottom face.
Total Thickness
Type the thickness of the slab. The default thickness is based on the selected slab type and
composition.
If the slab has more than one layer, then the Total Thickness box is read-only.
To edit the slab thickness, use the Layer tab of the Slab Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Edit Slab Properties (on page 234).

Slab assembly connections are similar to member assembly connections, but define the
trimming and edges of slabs. Slab assembly connections are placed automatically when the
slab is created.
The slab assembly connections are:
 The Slab by Member Boundary assembly connection is placed by the software when you
select a member as a slab boundary.

Place Slabs
 The Slab Free Edge Assembly connection is placed by the software when you select a grid
line as a slab boundary.
If a slab's bounding object (for example a member, a wall, or another slab) is deleted, then that
deleted object is replaced as a boundary by the slab assembly connection which is generated
from that deleted object. This behavior keeps the slab from going to the To Do List as missing a
boundary.
In addition, if you copy, move, or mirror a wall (including Model Data Reuse operations) and an
object which was connected to the wall is not in the copy set and the Delete optional option is
selected, the software changes the wall assembly connection for the missing object to be a Wall
Free Edge Assembly connection. This prevents the wall from going to the To Do List with a
"Wall is missing a boundary Select a valid boundary" message. Be aware that copying or
moving a wall with the Delete optional option selected can cause the geometry of the wall to
extend or shorten.
This geometry change impacts the use of the Validate Model Data Reuse
Results command because the geometry of the wall is different between the original wall and
the new wall.
Locating Slab Assembly Connections

Assembly connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to Slab
Assembly Connections, you can locate and select assembly connections for review and
editing. Assembly connections are located at the edges of slabs.
properties.

 Place a slab by selecting boundary objects (on page 226)
 Place a slab by drawing 2-D boundaries (on page 228)
 Place a slab by drawing 3-D boundaries (on page 230)
 Place a slab by selecting objects and drawing 2-D boundaries (on page 230)
 Place a slab by selecting objects and drawing 3-D boundaries (on page 231)

Place Slabs
 Solve ambiguous boundaries (on page 232)

 Edit slab object boundaries (on page 232)
 Edit 2-D drawn slab boundaries (on page 232)
 Edit 3-D drawn slab boundaries (on page 233)
 Edit slab properties (on page 234)
 Delete a Slab (on page 234)
Place a slab by selecting boundary objects

1. Click Place Slab on the vertical toolbar.
2. Set the parent system for the slab, the slab type and composition, and face position.
3. Define a plane for the slab.
Define Plane as Coincident (on page 242)
Define Plane using Offset from Plane (on page 242)
Define Plane using Angle to Plane (on page 242)
Define Plane using Vector and Point (on page 243)
Define Plane using Three Points (on page 243)
4. Click Accept .
5. Click Select Boundaries .

Place Slabs
6. Select objects in the model to define the boundaries of the slab. You can select members,
grid lines, edges of equipment, edges of other slabs, or most anything else in the model to
define the slab boundaries. The selected objects must roughly define a close shape.
7. Click Accept .
The software displays the slab in dynamics.
8. Click Finish.

Place Slabs
Place a slab by drawing 2-D boundaries

3. Click Accept .
4. Click Add References to Sketch 2D .
5. Select objects in the model that you want to see when drawing the slab boundaries in the 2-
D environment.
6. Click Draw .
The 2D sketch orientation is based on the active coordinate system as defined in the
Pin Point command.

Place Slabs
7. In the 2-D environment, draw the boundaries of the slab. The boundaries that you draw
must be closed shape.
8. In the 2-D environment, click Close .

9. Click Accept .
10. Set the slab system, type, priority, face position, and other properties.
11. Click Finish.

Place Slabs
Place a slab by drawing 3-D boundaries

3. Click Accept .
4. Click Sketch 3D .
5. Sketching a path that defines the outside boundary of the slab.
6. Click Finish.
7. Click Accept .
9. Click Finish.
Place a slab by selecting objects and drawing 2-D

boundaries
3. Click Accept .

5. Select objects in the model to define part of the slab boundaries. You can select members,
define the slab boundaries.

Place Slabs
7. Select objects in the model that you want to see when drawing the slab boundaries in the 2-
D environment.
8. Click Draw .
9. In the 2-D environment, draw the remaining boundaries of the slab. The object boundaries
that you selected are displayed in black. The objects that you selected for sketch landmarks
display in blue. The boundaries that you selected and the boundaries that you draw must
form closed shape. You can draw the boundaries for multiple slabs at the same time in the
2-D environment.
10. In the 2-D environment, click Close.
11. Click Accept .
13. Click Finish.
Place a slab by selecting objects and drawing 3-D

boundaries
3. Click Accept .

5. Select objects in the model to define part of the slab boundaries. You can select members,
define the slab boundaries.
7. Sketching a path that defines the remaining part of the slab boundary.
8. Define a Path (on page 501)
9. Click Finish.
10. Click Accept .
12. Click Finish.

Place Slabs
Solve ambiguous boundaries

The command switches to the solve ambiguity mode automatically if ambiguous boundaries
exist after clicking Accept or Finish. All possible bounded areas appear in the graphic view
outlined in green.
1. Move the pointer over a bounded area, and then click to select that bounded area. The
selected area highlights in yellow.
2. Continue to select bounded areas until you have defined the entire bounded area that you
want. A correct solution to ambiguity meets these conditions:
 Each bounded area must have a common edge with at least one other bounded area.
 Each boundary must be used by at least one bounded area.
To remove a bounded area, select the area again.
Edit slab object boundaries

2. In the Locate Filter, select Slabs.
3. Select the slab to edit.
4. On the ribbon, click Define Boundaries .

5. Redefine the boundaries by clicking existing boundaries to clear them and by clicking new
objects to use as the new boundaries. For more information, see Solve Ambiguous
Boundaries (on page 232).
6. Click Accept .
7. Click Finish.
You can only edit the exterior boundaries of a slab using the Place Slab command.
Openings in the slab should be edited with the Place Opening command.
Edit 2-D drawn slab boundaries


5. On the ribbon, click Draw .
6. In the 2-D environment, edit the boundary as needed by adding or removing graphic
segments. The new segments need to be added or removed to/from an existing group
depending on the number of SlabFreeEdgeAsm connections needed. In most of cases,
there is no need to use the group modify command for slabs. Be sure to use the Bottom Up

Place Slabs
option when selecting segments. When you are finished, make sure the boundary is a
closed shape.
a. Addition of elements - The newly added elements are part of a new group (even if
connected to another element belonging to another group). This operation creates an
additional assembly connection for the new created group with the new elements. Using
the group command serves to create one assembly connection.
b. Inserting an element in the middle of a chain - Inserting an element creates a new
assembly connection. Using the group modify command depends if you need a single or
several assembly connections.
c. Removing an element - You should not ungroup elements when dependent objects are
attached to the boundaries. Removing an element from a boundary can be done by
deleting the graphic element. Removing an element from a group (to create a different
assembly connection) can be done by using the group modify command.
7. Click Add or remove graphic from a group on the Change toolbar.
8. Click Select Graphic Group on the ribbon.
9. Select the original slab boundary.
10. Click Select elements to add to group or remove from it on the ribbon.
11. Select the new slab boundary segments that you just placed.
12. Click Add on the ribbon.
14. Click Accept .
15. Click Finish.
Edit 3-D drawn slab boundaries


5. On the ribbon, click Sketch 3D .
6. Edit the path.
Modify a Straight Segment in a Path (on page 504)
Modify an Arc in a Path (on page 505)
Modify a Turn in a Path (on page 505)
Move Segments of a Path (on page 503)
7. Click Finish.
8. Click Accept .

Place Slabs
9. Click Finish.
Edit slab properties

2. Select Slabs in the locate filter.
5. Edit the slab properties as needed.
Delete a slab
2. Select Slabs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the slab to delete.
4. Click Delete .
Slab Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the slab that you are editing. You can define the default values in the
StructSlabGeneral.xls and StructSlabLayer.xls workbooks.
See Also
General Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) (on page 234)
Layer Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) (on page 241)
Edit Slab Properties (on page 234)
General Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box)

The General tab displays the slab properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one slab and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between
the selected slabs display.
When viewing properties for a single slab, the following properties display. More properties may
display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the Structure Reference
Data Guide for more information on properties. You can access this document using the Help >
Printable Guides command in the software.
Category

Place Slabs
Select the properties that you want to view for the slab. Slab properties are divided into
several different categories: Standard, Dimensions, Weight and CG, Fabrication and
Construction, Surface Treatments and Coatings, and Responsibility. You select the category
to define values for by using the Category option.
Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the slab. Because slab
reference data is fully customizable, only the common properties are documented.
Parent System
Select the system to which the slab belongs.
Name
Displays the name of the slab. The slab name is based on the Naming Rule selection. If
you want to type a new name for the slab, in the Naming Rule box, select User Defined,
and then type a name for the slab in the Name box.
Specify the continuity priority. This priority is used to select which slab is split when two
slabs intersect, but both have Intercostal for the Continuity Type. Slabs with a lower
continuity priority (1, 2, 3, for example) will split slabs with a higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9,
for example).
Continuity Type
Defines how the slab should react when it intersects another slab (your automatic splitting
preference). Select Continuous to indicate that the slab should split the other slab. Select
Intercostal to indicate that the slab should be split by the other slab. You cannot split slabs
that have a Continuity Type setting of Continuous.
Naming Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this slab.
Default Name Rule - Names the slab using the format "Slab-<location>-<index>" where
<location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index number that
starts at 0001. For example, Slab-1-0043.
Unique Name Rule - Names the slab using the format "<system>-Slab-<location>-<index>"
where <system> is the name of the parent system to which the slab belongs, <location> is
the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index number that starts at 0001.
For example, Structure System-Slab-1-0043.
User Defined - Select to specify the slab name yourself in the Name box.
Type
Select the slab type.
Composition
Specifies the composition to use. You can see details of the selected composition by looking
at the Layer Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) (on page 241).
Priority

Place Slabs
Catalog.
Reporting Requirement
Specify whether or not this slab is reported.
Reporting Type
Select the reporting requirements code for the slab. Valid selections are defined in the
Piece Mark
Specifies the piece mark of the slab. Piece marks are mainly used when importing and
exporting slabs through CIMsteel to other software packages. If a piece mark is displayed
here, more than likely it is the identity of the manufactured part from the other software
package.
Assembly Mark
Specifies the assembly mark of the member. If the member was imported through CIMsteel,
the assembly mark is usually the identity of the manufactured assembly to which this
member belongs.
Fire Rating
Specifies the fire rating time for the slab.
Face Position
Specifies the way in which the slab is placed in the model with respect to the support plane.
To change the options on the list, edit the Slab Face Position select list in Catalog.
Center indicates that the slab is placed with respect to its centroidal axis.
Top indicates that the slab is placed with respect to its top face.
Bottom indicates that the slab is placed with respect to its bottom face.

Place Slabs
Normal Offset
Displays the offset distance for the slab from the selected support plane.
Boundary Offset Reference
Indicates which part of the member the slab should use as the boundary when a member is
used as a boundary for a slab. To change the options on the list, edit the Slab Boundary
Reference select list in Catalog.
Inner port-face of a bounding member indicates that the slab stops at the inner-most
plane of the bounding member.
Centerline (axis) of a bounding member indicates that the slab stops at the member-line
axis of the bounding member. In the picture below, the beams were placed using cardinal
point 8, which means the member-line axis is in the top center of the beams.
Outer port-face of a bounding member indicates that the slab stops at the out-most plane
of the bounding member.
Boundary Offset
Specifies the boundary offsets for the slab. Enter 0 for the slab edge to stop at the
boundary. Enter a positive distance to offset the slab edge outside of the boundary. Enter a
negative distance to offset the slab edge inside the boundary.

Place Slabs
Angle
Displays the angle at which the slab is placed from the plane or reference plane.
Slope
Specifies the slope of the slab relative to the reference plane that was selected during
placement.
Thickening Direction
Specifies the thickening direction. To change the options on the list, edit the Slab
Reference Direction select list in Catalog.
Boundaries Projection Direction
Specifies the boundaries projection direction. To change the options on the list, edit the Slab
Reference Direction select list in Catalog.
Dimensions
Total Volume
Specifies the volume of the slab or wall (length × width × height).
Net Volume
Specifies the volume of the wall minus the volumes of all openings in the wall.
Total Surface
Specifies the surface area of the slab or wall (top surface plus the bottom surface plus the
side surfaces × length).
Net Surface
Specifies the surface area of the slab or wall minus the surface area of all the openings in
the slab or wall.
Total Projected Area
Specifies the area of the slab (length x width).
Net Projected Area
Displays the area of the slab minus the area of all the openings in the slab.
Number of Openings
Displays the number of openings in the slab.
Angle
Displays the angle at which the slab is placed from the plane or reference plane.
Low Point
Displays the lowest elevation of the slab. The elevation of the bounding objects is not
considered.
High Point
Specifies the highest elevation of the slab. Smart 3D does not consider the elevation of the
bounding objects.
Bottom Face

Place Slabs
Specifies the lowest elevation of the slab or the slab boundary objects. For example, if the
slab is bounded by four structural members, then the software displays the lowest elevation
of either the slab or the members, whichever is lower.
Top Face
Displays the highest elevation of the slab and the slab boundary objects. For example, if the
slab is bounded by four structural members that extend above the slab, the top elevation of
the members is displayed.
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Specifies the dry weight of the object. For slabs the weight is determined by using the
volume of the slab multiplied by the density of the material.
Wet Weight
Specifies the wet weight of the object. For slabs, the weight is determined by using the
volume of the slab multiplied by the density of the material.
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Wet CG X
Wet CG Y
Wet CG Z

Fabrication Type

Place Slabs
Construction Type

Coating Color
Responsibility

Place Slabs

See Also
Slab Properties Dialog Box (on page 234)
Layer Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the layers for the selected slab type on the General tab. Layers are defined in the
StructSlabLayer.xls workbook. Refer to the Structure Reference Data Guide for more
information about this workbook. You can access this document using the Help > Printable
Guides command in the software.
Composition
Select the composition that you want to use for the slab type. The layers in the select
composition appear.
Total Thickness
Displays the total thickness of all the layers in the slab.
Layer
Select the layer of the composition to view or edit properties for.
Property
Displays the defined properties for the active layer.
Cross Section Symbol
Select the cross section symbol to use for the slab. This option is not currently used by the
software.
Value
Specify a value for the layer property.
See Also
Slab Properties Dialog Box (on page 234)
Understanding Plane Methods

A common activity while working with slabs is defining planes. These planes are used to define
the location of the slab or as a sketching plane for the slab boundaries. Usually, but not
necessarily, these planes are based from an existing object or from a grid plane created using
the Grids task. There are five methods for defining planes:
Coincident
Defines a plane coincident to another plane. For more information, see Define Plane as

Place Slabs
Coincident (on page 242).

Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. For more information, see
Define Plane using Offset from Plane (on page 242).
Angle from Plane

Defines a plane at a specified angle or slope to another plane. You must define an axis of
rotation and the angle or slope. For more information, see Define Plane using Angle to
Plane (on page 242).
Plane by Point and Vector
Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined and a third point to define
the plane position along the vector. For more information, see Define Plane using Vector
and Point (on page 243).
Plane by Three Points
Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model. For more information, see
Define Plane using Three Points (on page 243).
Define Plane as Coincident

1. Select Coincident .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the plane to place the new slab coincident
with.
Define Plane using Offset from Plane

1. Select Offset from a Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane to offset the new slab from.
3. In the Offset box, type the offset distance from the plane.
You can also use the Step box on the PinPoint ribbon. Enter a value, and then
move the pointer in the graphics view. The offset follows the pointer, incrementing by the
step value that you specified.
Define Plane using Angle to Plane

1. Select Angle from Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane from which to angle the slab
that you are defining.
3. Select a rotation axis.
 The rotation axis can be a grid line or a member edge.

 The rotation axis must be parallel to the surface of the plane selected in step 2.
4. In the Angle box, specify the rotation angle of the slab relative to the selected base plane.

Place Slabs
Define Plane using Vector and Point

1. Select Vector & Point .
2. Define the first vector point.
3. Define the second vector point.
4. Specify the plane location normal to the vector at which to place the slab.
Define Plane using Three Points

1. Select Plane by Three Points .
2. Specify the first point that defines the plane.
3. Specify the second point that defines the plane.
4. Specify the third point that defines the plane.

SECTION 15
Place Walls
Places curved and straight walls in the model. Use this command to place parapets, retaining
walls, bearing walls, nonbearing walls, and foundation walls. Like slabs, you can cut openings in
walls using the Place Opening (on page 367). You can use the Place Equipment (on page 278)
to place doors and windows in walls.
The software places walls on a supporting plane that you select. The supporting plane of the
wall can be an elevation plane, a grid plane, or a plane that you define during placement.
When placing walls, you define a path that the wall is to follow. You can define this path in the 3-
D environment using the same path commands that you use to define handrails paths, or you
can define this path in the 2-D environment using lines connected and grouped together to
define the path. When you need to modify the walls that you have placed, keep these things in
mind:
 All walls paths created in the 2-D environment should be modified in the 2-D environment
unless you are modifying the entire area with a rotate or move, in which case you should do
the modification in the 3-D environment. For example, you placed a wall using a 2-D drawn
path. To move, rotate, or add on to that individual wall, you would go back to the 2-D
environment. However, if you were going to rotate the wall along with everything else in the
general area, you would do the rotate all the objects in the 3-D environment.
 When moving or rotating a wall path in the 2-D environment, you might have to delete some
constraints before you can move or rotate. You need to display the relationships layer to
delete them if needed.
 When a 2-D sketched wall is selected in the 3-D environment, all the other walls that were
created during that same 2-D session are also selected. If you move or rotate one wall, all
the walls from the session will move or rotate also. To move or rotate an individual wall, you
need to either place each wall individually in the 2-D environment (coming back out to the 3-
D environment using Finish) or you need to go into the 2-D environment and perform the
move or rotate on the individual wall in the 2-D environment.
 When sketching a wall that closes upon itself, you must make sure that the start and end
points are either coincident or are no closer than 1 cm + 0.05  total thickness of the wall +
0.2 meters.

Place Walls
If the start and end points are aligned on the same parallel vector, then the minimum
distance is 1 cm.
 If you import grid lines into the 2-D environment as references and then sketch a wall path
on top of the grid lines, the software will create horizontal or vertical constraints to the grid
lines.
You can select multiple wall parts or wall systems as a group and edit properties either in the
ribbon bar or in the property pages. The limitations when editing multiple walls are that you
cannot modify support, path or boundaries values.
Place Wall Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the wall(s) that you are placing or editing. If you select multiple walls
to edit, the values that are the same for the selected walls are displayed. If a value is different
between the selected walls, the value is not shown.
If you have multiple walls selected and you enter a new value in the ribbon, it
is applied to ALL selected walls.
Wall Properties
Activates the Wall Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify additional
wall properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on the ribbon.
For more information, see Wall System Properties Dialog Box (on page 265).
Sketching Plane, Select a Path and Select Boundaries are unavailable and
cannot be edited when multiple walls are selected.
Sketching Plane
Select the support plane for the bottom of the wall.
Select a Path
Select the Sketch 2D or Sketch 3D option.
Select Boundaries
Select additional graphic objects to be boundaries for the wall. You can select members,
other walls, grid planes, and surfaces. An example of when to use this option would be
when placing a wall under a pitched roof.
Finish
Places the wall using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected planes or boundary objects.

Place Walls
Accept
Accepts all selected planes or boundary objects.
Sketch 2D
Opens the sketch 2-D environment in which you can draw the path of the wall. You can
draw more than one wall at a time in the 2-D environment. However, if you draw more than
one wall path in the 2-D environment, the walls will move as a single unit if you move any of
the walls regardless of whether or not the walls are connected to each other. If you will need
to move any of the walls individually, you must draw that wall's path in 2-D environment by
itself.
Sketch 3D
Activates the Create Path Ribbon with which you define the wall path. Select this option to
sketch the path of the wall in the 3-D environment.
System
Select the parent system for the wall that you are placing. Systems are defined using the
Type
Select the type of wall to place. The properties change depending on the wall type that you
select.
Composition
Select a wall composition from the list. Available compositions depend on the type of wall
being placed.
Name
Displays the name of the wall that you are placing.
Position
Specify the relative position of the wall to the path. Fifteen positions are
available. The location of positions 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear
center) depend on the wall's section shape. The local z- axis of the wall
and the center-of-gravity point of the section define positions 11 and 14.
The local y-axis of the wall and the center-of-gravity point of the section

Place Walls
define positions 12 and 13.

Total Thickness
Type the thickness of the wall. The default thickness is based on the selected wall type and
composition.
If the wall has more than one layer, then the Total Thickness box is read-only.
To edit the wall thickness, use the Layer tab of the Wall Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Edit Wall Properties (on page 264).
Maximum Height
Enter the maximum height for the wall.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the wall's path. This parameter affects both
symmetric and asymmetric sections.

 Place a wall by 2-D sketch (on page 248)
 Add end segment to existing wall using 2-D sketch (on page 250)
 Place split walls by 2-D sketch (on page 251)
 Add fillet corner to existing wall using 2-D sketch (on page 252)
 Add middle segments to existing wall using 2-D sketch (on page 254)
 Modify wall length using 2-D sketch (on page 257)
 Create gap in existing wall using 2-D sketch (on page 259)
 Rotate an existing wall using 2-D sketch (on page 260)
 Place a wall by 3-D sketch (on page 261)
 Place split walls by 3-D sketch (on page 262)
 Split an existing wall using 3-D sketch (on page 263)
 Add end segment to existing wall using 3-D sketch (on page 263)
 Modify wall cross-section (on page 264)
 Edit wall properties (on page 264)
 Edit multiple walls (on page 264)
 Delete a wall (on page 265)

Place Walls
Place a wall by 2-D sketch

1. Click Place Wall on the vertical toolbar.
2. Define the sketching plane. The sketching plane defines the bottom elevation of the wall.
4. Select objects in the model that you want to see when sketching the wall path in the 2-D
environment.
5. Click Draw .
The 2D sketch orientation is based on the active coordinate system as defined in the
Pin Point command.
6. In the 2-D environment, draw the path of the wall.

Place Walls
You can draw more than one wall path at a time in the 2-D environment.

8. Click Finish.
9. Set the wall system, type, composition, and other properties.
10. Optionally, click Select Boundaries to limit the height of the wall.
11. Click Finish.
The software places the walls in the model.
12. The software maintains the same sketching plane and prompts you to select references for
the next wall. Go back to step 4.
-OR-
Click Cancel to return to the main ribbon to define a new sketching plane. Go back to step
2.

Place Walls
Add end segment to existing wall using 2-D sketch

2. Set the Locate Filter to Wall Systems.
3. Select the wall to which to add another wall segment.
4. Click Select a Path on the ribbon.

5. Click Sketch 2D on the ribbon.
6. Select objects in the model to see when sketching the wall path in the 2-D environment.
7. Click Draw .
8. In the 2-D environment, add on to the path of the existing wall path.

Place Walls
10. Click Finish.
13. Click Finish.
The software places the new wall segments in the model.
Place split walls by 2-D sketch

2. Define the sketching plane. The sketching plane defines the bottom elevation of the wall.
4. Select objects in the model that you want to see when sketching the wall paths in the 2-D
environment.
5. Click Draw .
6. In the 2-D environment, turn off (no check mark) Tools > Maintain Relationships. By
clearing this option, each line segment that you draw becomes its own wall.
As an alternative to turning off Maintain Relationships, you can delete the
relationship handles at the segment end points after you have finished placing the
segments in order to create multiple walls.
7. In the 2-D environment, draw the path of the walls.
9. Click Finish.

Place Walls
12. Click Finish.
The software places the walls in the model.
13. The software maintains the same sketching plane and prompts you to select references for
the next wall. Go back to step 4.
-OR-
2.
If you draw more than one wall path in the 2-D environment, the walls will move as a
single unit if you move any of the walls regardless of whether or not the walls are connected to
each other. If you will need to move any of the walls individually, you must draw that wall's path
in the 2-D environment by itself.
Add fillet corner to existing wall using 2-D sketch

3. Select the wall to which to add the fillet corner.

6. Click Draw .
7. Click Fillet on the vertical toolbar.

Place Walls
8. Place the fillet on the wall path by identifying the two sides for the fillet and then the radius.

11. Select the original wall path. Be sure to use the Bottom Up option during selection.
13. Select the fillet segment of the wall path that you just placed. Be sure to use the Bottom Up
option during selection.
14. Click Add on the ribbon.

16. Click Finish.

Place Walls
19. Click Finish.
The software places the fillet in the wall.
Add middle segments to existing wall using 2-D

sketch
3. Select the wall to which to add segments.


Place Walls
environment.
7. Click Draw .
8. Click Split on the vertical toolbar.

9. Identify the two locations on the wall between which you want to add to the wall. Be sure to
use the Bottom Up option during selection.
14. Select the segment of the wall path between the two points that you identified during the
Split command. Be sure to use the Bottom Up option during selection.
15. Click Remove on the ribbon. You have now removed the segment from the wall path
group.

Place Walls

17. Select the segment between the two points that you just removed from the group. Be sure to
18. Press Delete on the keyboard.
You should now have a wall path with a gap in it.
19. Using commands on the vertical toolbar, like the Line command, draw the new wall
segment in the gap. Make sure you connect to the two ends of the gap.

21. Click Finish.
24. Click Finish.

Place Walls
The software places the new wall segments in the model.
Modify wall length using 2-D sketch

3. Select the wall to modify.

6. Select objects in the model that you want to see when modifying the wall length in the 2- D
environment.
7. Click Draw .

Place Walls
8. Click Bottom Up on the ribbon.

9. Select the wall segment to modify.
10. In the Length box, key in the new length for the segment, or grab the box at the end of the
segment and move it to the new location.

12. Click Finish.
13. Optionally, edit the wall system, type, composition, and other properties.
15. Click Finish.

Place Walls
Create gap in existing wall using 2-D sketch

3. Select the wall that you want to place the gap in.
6. Select objects in the model that you want to see in the 2-D environment.
7. Click Draw .
8. Click Split on the vertical toolbar.

9. Identify the two locations on the wall between which you want to place the gap. Be sure to
14. Select the segment of the wall path where the gap should be.
15. Click Remove on the ribbon.

17. Select the segment between the two points that you just removed from the group. Be sure to
18. Press Delete on the keyboard.
You should now have a wall path with a gap in it.
21. Select the original wall path.
23. Select all the segments on one side of the gap. Be sure to use the Bottom Up option
during selection.
24. Click Remove on the ribbon.
By removing all the segments on one side of the gap from the original wall group, you create
a new second wall. The software currently does not support having a gap in a single wall.
26. Click Finish.

Place Walls
29. Click Finish.
The software removes the segment from the wall thus creating the gap.
Rotate an existing wall using 2-D sketch

3. Select the wall that you want to rotate.
environment.
7. Click Draw .
8. Click Select on the vertical toolbar. Be sure to use the Bottom Up option during
selection.
9. Select the wall path that you want to rotate.
10. In the Change toolbar, click Rotate .

11. Rotate and move the wall as needed.
13. Click Finish.
16. Click Finish.

Place Walls
Place a wall by 3-D sketch

2. Define the sketching plane.
4. Sketch a path that defines the position of the wall.
5. Click Finish.

8. Click Finish.

Place Walls
The software places the wall in the model.
9. The software maintains the same sketching plane and resets itself for you to define the next
wall path. Go back to step 4.
-OR-
2.
Place split walls by 3-D sketch

2. Define the sketching plane. The sketching plane sets the bottom elevation of the wall.
4. In the 3-D environment, draw the path of the wall.
5. When you are ready to split the wall path to create a new, adjoining wall, select Split as the
Turn Type.
 The Split turn type option is available after you place a second vertex point on the wall
path.
 You cannot select the middle point of an arc to insert a split.
6. You can insert another split to add another new wall system. After the Split option is
selected, it remains set as the Turn Type option.
7. Click Finish to complete the 3-D sketch.
8. Set wall system, type, composition, and other properties for each wall, or use the default
properties.
9. Click Finish.
The software places the walls in the model. The separate wall systems you created are
listed in the Workspace Explorer.

Place Walls
Split an existing wall using 3-D sketch

2. Select the wall you want to split.
The wall system must contain at least one vertex to insert a split.
5. Click on the wall vertex where you want to insert the split.
You cannot insert a split on the middle point of an arc.
6. Select Split as the Turn Type on the ribbon.
7. Click Finish to complete the 3-D sketch.
8. The properties of the initial wall are used for the walls you create with the Split option. You
can modify the wall properties for each wall.
9. Click Finish.
The software creates two separate wall systems that can be edited independently.
Add end segment to existing wall using 3-D sketch

3. Select the wall that you want to add to.
6. Click Create on the ribbon.
7. Select one of the boxes on the existing wall path as your starting point. If you can add to the
wall path from that path point, the box will turn red to indicate that you have selected it. If the
box does not turn red, you cannot add on to the wall from that path point.
8. Define the addition to the path using the path commands. For more information, see Define
a Path (on page 501).
9. Click Finish.
10. Edit the wall system, type, composition, and other properties if needed.
12. Click Finish.
The software places the wall extension in the model.

Place Walls
Modify wall cross-section

2. Select Wall Systems in the locate filter.
3. Select the wall to edit.
4. On the ribbon bar, select a new cross-section using the Composition option.
Edit wall properties

3. Select the wall to edit.
5. Edit the wall properties as needed. For more information about the properties, see Wall
System Properties Dialog Box (on page 265).
Edit multiple walls

3. Select multiple wall systems in a graphics window or from the Workspace Explorer.
5. Edit the wall properties as needed. The edits you make affect all selected walls.
 You can select multiple wall parts and edit them as a group. You can edit properties on the
ribbon, or click Properties to open the Wall Properties dialog box and change values.
 Property fields that have different values are left blank in the ribbon and in the properties
dialog box. Only property values that are same for the selected walls display.
 The Sketching Plane, Select a Path and Select Boundaries options in the ribbon are
unavailable and cannot be edited when multiple walls are selected.
 When you edit a property for multiple wall parts, the new value is set for ALL the selected
walls.

Place Walls
Delete a wall
2. Select Wall Systems in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the wall to delete.
4. Click Delete .
Wall System Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the wall system that you are editing. You can define the default
values in the StructWallGeneral.xls and StructWallLayer.xls workbooks.
See Also
General Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 265)
Layer Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267)
Section Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267)
Edit Wall Properties (on page 264)
General Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box)

The General tab displays the wall properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one wall and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between
the selected walls display.
When viewing properties for a single wall, the following properties display. More properties may
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the wall. Wall properties are divided into
several different categories: Standard. You select the category to define values for by using
the Category option.
Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the wall. Because wall
Parent System
Select the system to which the wall belongs.
Name
Displays the name of the wall. The wall name is based on the Naming Rule selection. If you
want to type a new name for the wall, in the Naming Rule box, select User Defined, and

Place Walls
then type a name for the wall in the Name box.

Naming Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this wall.
Default Name Rule - Names the wall using the format "WallSystem-<location>-<index>"
where <location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index number
that starts at 0001. For example, WallSystem-1-0043.
Unique Name Rule - Names the wall using the format "<system>-WallSystem-<location>-
<index>" where <system> is the name of the parent system to which the wall system
belongs, <location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example, Structure System-WallSystem-1-0043.
User Defined - Select to specify the wall system name yourself in the Name box.
Type
Select the wall type.
Composition
Select the composition that you want to use for the wall type. The layers in the select
composition appear.
Priority
Catalog.
Continuity Type
Indicates the way in which the object system reacts when the system intersects another
object system (your automatic splitting preference). The list is defined by the
StructContinuity codelist.
Continuous indicates that the object system should split the other object system.
Intercostal indicates that the object system should be split by the other object system.
You cannot split objects that have a Continuity Type setting of Continuous.
Specifies the priority when two profile systems that have the same Continuity setting
intersect. The profile system with the lowest continuity priority number penetrates the other
system. For example, two profile systems intersect and the Continuity setting of each set to
Continuous. The profile system with the lowest Continuity Priority number splits the other
profile system. You can only modify this property at the root system.
Bearing
Indicates whether or not the wall is a load bearing wall.
Boundary Offset
Enter the distance the wall should be offset from the selected boundary.

Place Walls
Layer Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the layers for the selected wall type on the General tab. Layers are defined in the
StructWallLayer.xls workbook. Refer to the Structure Reference Data Guide for more
Composition
composition appear.
Total Thickness
Displays the total thickness of all the layers in the wall.
Layer
Property
Value
See Also
Wall System Properties Dialog Box (on page 265)
Section Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Box)

The Section tab displays the properties for the wall's cross-section. The property name appears
on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the
grid. If you selected more than one wall and then selected the properties command, only the
common properties between the selected walls display.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the cross-section. Cross-section properties
are divided into several different categories: Standard. You select the category to define
values for by using the Category option.
Standard
Wall Cross Sections Name
Displays the name of the wall cross-section.

Place Walls
Position
Horizontal Offset
Specifies the horizontal offset between the object and the object's selected Position
location.
Vertical Offset
Specifies the vertical offset between the object and the object's selected Position location.
Thickness
Type the thickness of the wall.
Height
Type the height of the wall.
Reflect
Angle
Enter the angle of the wall from vertical. You can enter both positive and negative angles.
CentroidX
Type the horizontal distance from the designated member edge to the centroidal axis.
CentroidY
Type the vertical distance from the designated member edge to the centroidal axis.
Type the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis.
Type the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis.
Plastic Section Modulus for X (Zxx)
Type the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis.
Type the section modulus for the section's local x-axis.
Radius of Gyration about the X-axis (Rxx)
Type the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis.
Type the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis.

Place Walls

Type the section modulus for the section's local y-axis.
Radius of Gyration about the Y-axis (Ryy)
Type the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis.
Type the torsional moment of inertia for the section.
Type the warping constant for the section.
Polar Radius of Gyration about the Shear Center (ro)
Type the polar radius of gyration about the shear center.
Type the flexural constant for the section.
Wall Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the wall part that you are editing. You can define the default values
in the StructWallGeneral.xls and StructWallLayer.xls workbooks.
Editing Multiple Wall Parts

You can select multiple wall parts and edit them as a group. When editing, keep the following in
mind:
 When you edit a property for multiple wall parts, the new value is set for ALL the selected
walls.
 Property fields that have different values are left blank in all the Property tabs. Only
properties where the values are the same for the selected walls display.
While you can edit parts, you cannot delete parts.
See Also
General Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 269)
Layer Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 273)
Section Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 273)
Edit Wall Properties (on page 264)
General Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box)

The General tab displays the wall properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one wall and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between
the selected walls display.

Place Walls
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the wall. Wall properties are divided into
several different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, and Dimensions. You select the
category to define values for by using the Category option.
Standard
Parent System
Select the system to which the wall belongs.
Name
Displays the name of the wall. The wall name is based on the Naming Rule selection. If you
want to type a new name for the wall, in the Naming Rule box, select User Defined, and
then type a name for the wall in the Name box.
Naming Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this wall.
 Default Name Rule - Names the wall using the format "WallPart-<location>-<index>"
where <location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example, WallPart-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the wall using the format "WallPart-<location>-<index>"
number that starts at 0001. For example, WallPart-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the wall part name yourself in the Name box.
Composition
Displays the composition of the wall.
Specify whether or not this wall part is reported.
Reporting Type
Select the reporting requirements code for the wall part. Valid selections are defined in the
Dimensions
Total Volume
Specifies the volume of the slab or wall (length × width × height).
Net Volume
Specifies the volume of the wall minus the volumes of all openings in the wall.

Place Walls
Total Surface
Specifies the surface area of the slab or wall (top surface plus the bottom surface plus the
side surfaces × length).
Net Surface
Specifies the surface area of the slab or wall minus the surface area of all the openings in
the slab or wall.
Projected Surface
Displays the surface area of the wall's bottom surface.
Net Projected Surface
Displays the surface area of the wall's bottom surface minus the surface area of all openings
in the wall.
Length
Displays the wall length.
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Wet Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Wet CG X
Wet CG Y

Place Walls
Wet CG Z

Fabrication Type
Construction Type
Responsibility

Place Walls
Layer Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the layers for the selected wall type on the General tab. Layers are defined in the
StructWallLayer.xls workbook. Refer to the Structure Reference Data Guide for more
Composition
composition appear.
Total Thickness
Displays the total thickness of all the layers in the wall.
Layer
Property
Value
See Also
Wall Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 269)
Section Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box)

The Section tab displays the properties for the wall's cross-section. The property name appears
on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the
grid. If you selected more than one wall and then selected the properties command, only the
common properties between the selected walls display.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the cross-section. Cross-section properties
are divided into several different categories: Standard. You select the category to define
Standard

Place Walls
Wall Cross Sections Name

Displays the name of the wall cross-section.
Position
Horizontal Offset
Specifies the horizontal offset between the object and the object's selected Position
location.
Vertical Offset
Specifies the vertical offset between the object and the object's selected Position location.
Thickness
Defines the insulation thickness.
Height
Type the height of the wall.
Reflect
Angle
Enter the angle of the wall from vertical. You can enter both positive and negative angles.
Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the wall assembly connection that you are editing. You can define
the default values in the StructWallAssemblyConnections.xls workbook.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 274)
Definition Tab (Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 276)
Occurrence Tab (Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays the assembly connection properties that you can edit or that are
automatically determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on the left
side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you
selected more than one assembly connection, and then selected the properties command, only
the common properties between the selected assembly connections display.

Place Walls
When viewing properties for a single assembly connection, the following properties display.
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on properties. You can access this
document using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Name
Displays the name of the assembly connection. The assembly connection name is based on
the Name Rule selection. If you want to type a new name for the assembly connection, in
the Name Rule box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the assembly
connection in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this assembly connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <assembly
connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <assembly connection> is the name of
the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location> is the global workshare
location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at 0001. For example,
WPTrimByPointAtEnd3-1-0045.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <parent
system name>-<assembly connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <parent
system name> is the parent System selected for the assembly connection, <assembly
connection> is the name of the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location>
is the global workshare location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at
0001. For example, Structure System-WPTrimByPointAtEnd3-1-0045.
 User Defined - Select to specify the assembly connection name yourself in the Name
box.
System
Displays the name of the Wall Part to which the assembly connection belongs.
Boundary Size
Select whether the boundary is infinite or finite.
Boundary Type
Select the boundary type: above, below, start, end, or contact.
Connection Type
Select the connection type: aligned, along, or corner.
Offset
Enter the offset distance between the wall and the boundary.
Reference
When a member is used as a boundary for the wall, you can use this option to specify which
part of the member the wall should use as the boundary: near, far, or center.
 Select near when you want the wall to stop at the inner most plane of the bounding
member.
 Select center when you want the wall to stop at the member-line axis of the bounding
member.

Place Walls
 Select far when you want the slab to stop at the out-most plane of the bounding
member.
Definition Tab (Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the wall assembly connection properties as they are defined in the
property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one wall assembly
connection, and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between
the selected wall assembly connections display.
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties. You can access this

SECTION 16
Toggle Wall Corner

When two separate walls join at a corner, one wall extends past the other wall to form the
corner. You can use this command to toggle which wall extends past the other.
1. Click Toggle Wall Corner .

2. Select the first wall at the corner.
3. Select the other wall at the corner.
4. Click Finish.

SECTION 17
Place Equipment
Specifies any piece of equipment from the Equipment folder of the catalog and places an
occurrence of it inside the model. You can modify the offset of the equipment, its relationships to
other equipment, and other properties during or after placement. Using positioning relationships,
the Place Equipment command allows you to mate, connect, or align equipment, and you can
use common tools like the PinPoint command for precise positioning of the equipment.
If a parent object is selected when you start Place Equipment, the System property is
automatically updated with the parent object.
You place equipment objects into the model by selecting the equipment from the Select
Equipment dialog box and positioning the equipment in the model using the available
relationships. When you select an equipment object from the Catalog, you can define a default
surface so that, when the equipment is placed into the model, the software automatically creates
a relationship to any other surface or reference element that you select. For example, you might
define the bottom of a pump as the default surface because you want the software to mate that
surface to the floor. If the software cannot find a suitable mating surface for the equipment, the
equipment object is placed in free space, pending additional design of the structures or other
reference elements.
You can also provide an optional offset distance from the surface or reference elements. The
default offset distance for any new piece of equipment is zero or the last offset used in the
current session. The software maintains the offset relationship between the default surface and
the surface or reference element in the workspace in the event of any changes to their position
(for example, if a slab is lowered, then the equipment follows the slab, maintaining the offset).
You can further define the equipment position and orientation by mating, aligning, or connecting
equipment to other objects in the model, or by moving or rotating the equipment.
In addition to placing equipment from the Select Equipment dialog box, you can also drag and
drop equipment directly from the Catalog Browser in another session opened on the same
computer. In this case, the software places the equipment in free space, with relationship to
other elements in the model made by locating objects while dragging the equipment in the new
session.
Cable and Equipment

If you are going to use an object for routing cable, you must not model that object as equipment.
Although it may sometimes be desirable to model a piece of raceway, cable tray, or cable bus
as a piece of equipment, you should not do this if there is any possibility of ever needing to route
cable through the object. This is because cable routes cannot traverse equipment; they can only
be terminated by equipment. A cable cannot be properly routed through a piece of equipment.
The cable can only interconnect two pieces of equipment.
An example is a pull box. This object should be created in the catalog data as a conduit fitting,
not as a piece of equipment. Otherwise, the object will render conduit networks useless for cable
routing every time it is used.

Place Equipment
Equipment with Occurrence Properties Modeled Using Solid Edge

You cannot place equipment with occurrence properties modeled using Solid Edge unless Solid
Edge is installed on your computer. If you try to place such an object, the following message
appears: Cannot start Solid Edge. Exiting InitializSymbolDefinition.
As a workaround to the Solid Edge requirement, you can use the Bulkload utility with the flavors
option. Designers can create dozens of variations for any equipment part imaginable. Also, by
creating several variations of a part, rather than using occurrence properties to create the
variations automatically, designers can implement custom Solid Edge equipment without having
to install Solid Edge on every designer's computer.
Each variation of a part represents some minor deviation from the catalog part, be it on the basis
of size, operational specifications, or material. With Solid Edge, new variations can be created
on the basis of size, while the software allows manipulation of the operating parameters or
material of construction in the reference data. For more information on bulkloading with flavors,
refer to the Reference Data Guide, accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command in
the software.
Place Equipment Ribbon

Sets options for adding equipment to your model. This ribbon appears automatically after you
select the Place Equipment command and then select an equipment object, or when you
select an existing piece of equipment.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and
read the ToolTip.
Equipment Properties
Edits the occurrence properties and reviews the static properties of an existing piece of
equipment. Equipment properties can be set only after an equipment object is placed in the
model. Equipment properties can be edited only after the object is placed in the model.
Any object modeled in Solid Edge that has occurrence properties cannot be
placed or modified unless your computer has a copy of Solid Edge installed.
User Defined Form Definition
Displays User Defined Form for the particular equipment if it is defined in the catalog. See
the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide, available from the Help > Printable
Relationship List
Lists all relationships for the selected equipment and provides an option for creating a new
relationship if the equipment is not already fully constrained. An equipment part is fully
constrained when it has sufficient defined relationships to prevent movement or rotation of
the part along all three coordinate axes.
Positioning Relationships
Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships. Some options may not
be available for all equipment types. See Positioning Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship
Removes the selected relationship from the equipment model and the database. Using the
Relationships list box, select a previously existing relationship for the equipment, and click

Place Equipment
Delete Relationship. You can use this command only when modifying existing equipment.
Equipment Reference
Prompts you for the reference on the equipment to be placed that will be affected by the
positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to create the
relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step remains fixed.
Second Part Reference
Prompts you for the reference on the equipment object or reference element already in the
model that will be affected by the positioning relationship. After you select the reference, the
software repositions the first equipment part chosen with respect to the second part selected
in the definition of the relationship.
Offset
Defines the offset distance for a mate or align relationship. Offsets are disabled when
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial equipment
placement if needed.
Name
Displays the equipment name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts
changes to that name.
System
Specifies the system with which to associate the selected equipment. The default system is
the Model itself.
<Select Graphically>
Allows you to select the system from the graphic view or from the Workspace Explorer.
You can then place or modify the equipment.
Select Equipment Dialog Box

Specifies the equipment needed for placement. This dialog box appears automatically when you
click the Place Equipment command. By browsing through the part hierarchy, you can find
any piece of equipment in the Catalog database. After you select a piece of equipment and click
OK, the Equipment Properties dialog box appears so that you can define properties for the
new equipment. After you click OK on the Properties dialog box, the software returns you to the
model so that you can finalize configuration and placement.
Save
This option is unavailable.
Cut
Copy
Paste

Place Equipment
Delete
Refresh
Insert Row
Move Up
Move Down
Properties
Displays the equipment properties as defined in the catalog.
Preview
Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected equipment. The image file must be assigned to the
equipment in the catalog reference data.
Filter
Sort
List View
Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected equipment part or node. Use this command to
navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific part you need.
Forward
Sends you to the last selected equipment part or node that you moved away from by using
the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the
specific part you need.
Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the Equipment catalog hierarchy. Use this command to
navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific part you need.

Place Equipment
Check Data
Check Data Ignored Inconsistencies
Help
Displays on-line help for Equipment and Furnishings.
Address

 Place equipment from the catalog (on page 282)
 Set positioning relationships for equipment (on page 283)
 Place doors from the catalog (on page 284)
 Place windows from the catalog (on page 285)
 Edit equipment properties (on page 286)
 Edit equipment relationships (on page 287)
Place equipment from the catalog

1. Click Place Equipment on the vertical toolbar.
The Select Equipment dialog box displays.
2. Locate the necessary equipment type using the tree view. Expand the nodes for the general
type of equipment that you need, continuing until a list of available parts appears in the
catalog window.
3. In the list view, select the equipment object.
4. Click OK on the Select Equipment dialog box.

Place Equipment
The Equipment Properties dialog box displays so that you can define properties for the
new object.
5. Define properties as needed, and then click OK to return to the workspace and place the
equipment. For more information, see Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 287).
6. Click in a graphic view to select the mounting surface and approximate position for the
object.
Press the left and right arrow keys to rotate the equipment by 90-degree increments
at any time during the placement of the equipment. Press the up arrow key to scroll through
the three possible axes of rotation. Press the down arrow key to scroll to each datum point.
7. Using the Place Equipment ribbon, do any of the following, if needed:
a. Set an offset for the relationship by specifying the distance in the Offset box.
b. Click Properties on the ribbon, and type any necessary property information in the
grid provided on the Equipment Properties dialog box.
c. Add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Relationship list on the
Place Equipment ribbon.
d. Select a system with which to associate the new object in the System box.
If you intend to use an object for routing cable, you must not model that object as
equipment. For example, a pull box should be created in the catalog data as a conduit fitting, not
a piece of equipment. Otherwise, the object will render conduit networks useless for cable
routing every time it is used.
Set positioning relationships for equipment

1. Select the equipment for which you need to define a relationship.
2. In the Relationship List box on the Place Equipment ribbon, select <New Relationship>.
3. Select one of the available positioning relationships in the Positioning Relationships list
box, and follow the status bar prompts.
Depending on the type of positioning relationship defined in the previous step,
surfaces or points need to be defined to finish configuring the relationship. For more
information, see Positioning Relationships.

Place Equipment
Place doors from the catalog

2. Locate the door to place under the Equipment > Architectural node.
3. In the list view, select the door to place.

new object.
object.

Place Equipment
Press the left and right arrow keys to rotate the door by 90-degree increments at any
time during the placement of the door. Press the up arrow key to scroll through the three
possible axes of rotation.
d. Select a system with which to associate the new object in the System box. We
recommend that you place the door in the same system as the parent wall.
Place windows from the catalog

2. Locate the window to place under the Equipment > Architectural > Windows node.
3. In the list view, select the window part to place.

new object.

Place Equipment
object.
Press the left and right arrow keys to rotate the window by 90-degree increments at
any time during the placement of the window. Press the up arrow key to scroll through the
three possible axes of rotation.
d. Select a system with which to associate the new object in the System box. We
recommend that you place the window in the same system as the parent wall.
Edit equipment properties

1. Select the equipment object that you need to modify.
2. Click Equipment Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
The Equipment Properties dialog box displays.
You can also access the Equipment Properties dialog box by selecting Properties
from the Edit menu, or by right-clicking the selected object and choosing Properties from
the short-cut menu.
3. Choose the appropriate dialog box tabs, and modify the properties as needed.
4. Click OK to save your changes, and return to the workspace.
You can also select Apply to put the changes into effect and continue working in the
Equipment Properties dialog box.

Place Equipment
All occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Microsoft
Excel® workbook named Equipment.xls in the reference data. For information on adding or
editing different types of properties, refer to the Reference Data Guide, accessible from the Help
> Printable Guides command.
 If more than one piece of equipment is selected, the Occurrence tab displays only the
common occurrence properties of the objects.
 The Definition, Connections, Weight & CG, and Relationship tabs are read-only. You
cannot edit this information from the Equipment Properties dialog box.
 If the equipment model was created using Solid Edge, then any changes that affect the
shape or size of the equipment model require that you have Solid Edge running on your
computer.
Edit equipment relationships

1. Select the equipment to modify.
To edit the properties of a designed equipment object for which geometry has yet to
be defined, you must select the object from the system hierarchy in the Workspace
Explorer.
2. Specify the relationship in the Relationship List box.
3. Change the type of relationship using the Positioning Relationship box as needed.
Set positioning relationships for equipment (on page 283)
Set positioning relationships for designed equipment (on page 302)
You can remove relationships by clicking Delete Relationship on the ribbon.
This step is often necessary when moving previously constrained equipment. After a
relationship is deleted, no connectivity remains between the two pieces of equipment during
further design operations.
Equipment Properties Dialog Box

Displays equipment properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 288)
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 296)
Connection Tab (on page 297)
Edit Equipment Properties (on page 286)
Edit Equipment Relationships (on page 287)

Place Equipment
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box)

Displays all the editable instance-specific information about the selected equipment object. The
property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears
on the right side of the grid. If more than one equipment object is selected, only the common
occurrence properties for the selected objects appear on the tab.
When viewing properties for a single equipment object, the following properties appear. More
properties may appear depending on what you defined in the reference data. For more
information about occurrences defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and
Furnishings Reference Data Guide available with the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Because equipment properties are customizable in the equipment and furnishings
reference data, only the properties that are required by the software are documented.
Show Dimensional Legend
Displays the bitmap image associated with the equipment object if it has been defined in the
reference data. The image displays in a separate window.
Category
Select the properties to view, modify, or define. Equipment properties are divided into
several different categories: Standard, Position and Orientation, Insulation and Tracing,
Weight and CG, Equipment Dimension, Fabrication and Construction, Surface
Treatment and Coating, and Responsibility.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the equipment object. The equipment name is based on the Name
Rule selection. If you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User
Defined.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this equipment object. You can select one of the
listed rules or select User Defined to specify the equipment name yourself in the Name box.
Description
Equipment
Select the system to which the object belongs. By default, the model is the parent system for
the object. If a parent system is selected when you start the command, System is
automatically updated with the selected system. If multiple systems are selected when you
start the command, System is automatically updated with the last used system.
Specifies the reporting requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Reporting Type select list in Catalog.
Reporting Type
Specifies the type of reporting. To change the options on the list, edit the Reporting Type

Place Equipment
Behavior Controlled by User

Indicates whether or not you can delete the object. Select False to prevent anyone from
deleting the object from the model.
Correlation Status
Specifies whether or not the object has been correlated to an object in a P&ID. The list is
defined by the EFWCorrelationStatus select list.
Correlation Basis
Specifies whether or not the object is correlated to a P&ID object. The list is defined by the
EFWCorrelationBasis select list.
Correlate Object indicates that the object has a correlating object in a P&ID.
No correlation is required indicates that the object does not have a correlating object in a
P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies whether or not the object is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional
data compared with design basis data. The list is defined by the
EFWCorrelationApprovalStatus sheet in the AllCodelist workbook.
Topology mismatch approved indicates that the object topology mismatch can be ignored.
Data and Topology mismatches approved indicates that the object data and topology
mismatches can be ignored.
None indicates that you do not approve a mismatch.
Position and Orientation

East
Displays the distance of the connection point from the active coordinate system origin in the
east direction.
North
north direction.
Elevation
Displays the distance of the connection point above or below the active coordinate system
origin.
Bearing
Specifies the bearing angle for the object. The Bearing angle is measured between the
local x-axis of the object and the Y-axis (North) of the global coordinate system in the XY-
plane. The local x-axis is the default axis of primary symmetry for all symbols in the catalog.
The bearing measurement direction is clockwise from the active coordinate system North
looking in the negative active coordinate system direction; that is, down from 0 to 360
degrees. You can enter negative bearing angles, but the software automatically converts
them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/- 90 degrees, then the bearing

Place Equipment
measure displays 0 degrees.
Pitch
Specifies the pitch angle for the shape. The Pitch angle measures between the x-axis of the
object and the X-axis of the global coordinate system in the XZ-plane. This option sets the
reference in the model to a line that is the intersection of the vertical plane through the X-
axis of the local coordinate system and the active coordinate system horizontal plane. The
angle is measured in the positive direction from the horizontal plane in the active coordinate
system up direction regardless of the current bearing. Another way to describe pitch is the
rotation of the object about its y-axis. Pitch angles are limited to between -90 degrees and
+90 degrees, with 0 indicating horizontal.
Roll
Specifies the roll angle for the object. The Roll angle measures between the local z-axis of
the object and the Z-axis of the global coordinate in the YZ-plane. Another way to describe
roll is the rotation of the object about its x-axis. This option sets the reference in the model to
a line that is perpendicular to the local coordinate system x-axis and in the horizontal plane.
Roll angles are measured clockwise from horizontal to the y-axis of the local coordinate
system. The roll angle is between 0 and 360 degrees. You can enter negative roll angles,
but the software automatically converts them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to

Place Equipment
+/- 90 degrees, then the reference in the model is the North axis.
Insulation and Tracing

Is Insulated
Indicates whether or not the object is insulated.
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the Insulation
Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Thickness box.
However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation thickness
from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the
software reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and
displays it here.
Requirement
Specifies the requirement of the insulation. To change the options on the list, edit the
Insulation Purpose select list in Catalog.
Insulation Type
Specifies the type of the insulation. To change the options on the list, edit the Insulation
Purpose select list in Catalog.
Insulation Purpose
Displays the purpose of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use the
insulation defined by the equipment object, the information in this box cannot be changed.
However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the purpose of the
insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference data.
Material
Specifies the material of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use the
insulation defined by the equipment object, this field cannot be changed. However, if
Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation material from those
available from the reference data.
The list contains the last five insulation materials selected. Click More to browse the catalog
for the insulation material to use. If you set this field to Not Insulated, the Insulation
Thickness field is disabled. If you set this field to Use Run Material, the along leg feature
inherits the insulation material from the duct run.
To change the options on the list, edit the Insulation Material select list in Catalog.

Place Equipment
Operating Temperature
Specifies the operating temperature.
Insulation Surface Area
Heat Tracing Requirement
Indicates whether or not the equipment is heat-traced. To change the options on the list, edit
the Heat Tracing Medium select list in Catalog.
Heat Tracing Type
Specifies the type of heat-tracing. To change the options on the list, edit the Heat Tracing
Medium select list in Catalog.
Heat Tracing Medium
Specifies the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in Catalog.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature
Specifies the temperature of the heat-tracing medium. Include the unit of measurement of
temperature (K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius, for example).
Weight & CG
Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the selected equipment objects. The center-of-
gravity locations are displayed in global system coordinates along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. The
software includes the insulation weight in the calculated weight. If you specify the weight
yourself, you must include the insulation weight value.
Dry Weight
Wet Weight
Dry CGX
Dry CGY
Dry CGZ
Wet CGX

Place Equipment
Wet CGY
Wet CGZ
Equipment Dimension
Property
Displays the name of the property. The properties that appear are dependent on the
equipment type selected. For example, the properties displayed for an equipment object
based on a pump are different from those based on a cooler. For more information on
equipment part properties, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide,
available with the Help > Printable Guides command within the Equipment and
Furnishings task.
Value
Displays the value of the corresponding property.

Fabrication Type
Construction Type

Coating Color

Place Equipment

Responsibility
See Also
Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 287)
Select Insulation Material Dialog Box

Specifies the insulation materials for a selected object. By browsing through the part hierarchy,
you can find and select an insulation material in the Catalog database.
Save
Cut

Place Equipment
Copy
Paste
Delete
Undo
Insert Row
Move Up
Move Down
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected object. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the object is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected object. The image file must be assigned to the
object in the catalog reference data.
Filter
Sort
List View
Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected insulation material folder. Use this command to
navigate through the hierarchy to the specific insulation material you need.

Place Equipment
Forward
Sends you to the last selected insulation material folder that you moved away from by using
the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific
insulation material you need.
Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the hierarchy. Use this command to navigate through the
hierarchy to the specific material you need.
Check Data
CheckData Ignored Inconsistencies
Smart 3D Help
Address
Sets the current location within the hierarchy of available insulation materials. The dropdown
box lists the folders you have visited.
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the part information for the equipment object, the properties and their values, as
defined in the reference data. If more than one equipment object is selected, only the common
properties for the selected objects display on the tab. For more information about the information
defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide,
available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Category
Select the properties to review. Equipment information is divided into several different
categories, such as Standard, Equipment Specification, Equipment Support, Nozzle
Length, and Equipment Dimensions.
Not all categories are available for all equipment objects.
Property
available with the Help > Printable Guides command within the Equipment and Furnishings
task.
Value

Place Equipment
Connection Tab
Displays information on the connection points of a piece of equipment, including piping,
electrical, foundation, or HVAC connections, and Reference 3D objects. If more than one
equipment object is selected, only the common properties of the connections for the selected
objects display on the tab. For more information about the information defined in the reference
data, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide, available from the Help >
Connector
Select the connector for which to view properties. With the exception of Reference 3D object
connectors, the connectors display in alphabetical order. When you select a connector from
the list, the graphic object associated with the connection, if one exists, highlights in the
graphic view for further visual confirmation of the port selected.
Property
Lists all the properties of the selected connection. These properties vary depending on the
type of connection selected.
Value
Insulation Tab
Displays insulation properties that have been defined for the selected equipment.
Specifies whether or not the selected equipment object is insulated. The options on this
dialog box remain disabled unless User Defined is selected from the dropdown list.
Purpose
Specifies the insulation purpose for the selected equipment object.
Material
Displays the Select Insulation Material dialog box from which you can specify an insulation
material. For more information, see Select Insulation Material Dialog Box (on page 294).
Thickness
Defines the thickness of the specified insulation material. This option remains disabled until
a material is selected from the Select Insulation Material dialog box. By default, the
smallest thickness value of the selected material is displayed. An alternative value may be
selected from the dropdown list.
See Also
Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box (on page 304)

SECTION 18
Place Designed Equipment

Places equipment types that have been defined in the reference data. The properties of the
equipment type you select are inherited by the designed equipment part. With the Place
Designed Equipment command, you can define an equipment type, a system parent, name,
and other property values as appropriate for the equipment type. Equipment position and
orientation is further defined by mating, aligning, or connecting equipment graphics to reference
graphics in the workspace, or by moving or rotating the equipment.
The software's designed equipment component modeling capabilities allow you to build an
equipment definition in the Model database by combining basic shapes, ports (nozzle,
foundation, electrical, and so forth) and properties defined in the reference data. Designed
equipment objects can be built entirely out of primitive geometric shapes, designed equipment
components, or an existing equipment component part can be placed from the catalog to
enhance the designed equipment object. For example, you can use the Place Designed
Equipment command to create a designed equipment object in the model, add an agitator
(using the Place Shape command), and then add nozzle primitives (using the Place Nozzle
command) to customize the designed equipment. You can also place a nozzle using a nozzle
defined in the P&ID design basis (if P&ID design basis data is available).
Some equipment shapes can be modeled more easily using solid modeling software. In addition
to using the primitive shapes delivered with the software, you can import graphics from an SAT
file as the geometry for the designed equipment shape. After the geometry is defined, you can
then place ports to define distributed connections to the designed equipment.
As a further enhancement, the software provides a prismatic shape feature so that you can
design uniquely customized shapes in the model. The place prismatic shape feature is made up
of two distinct processes:
 Define a path.
 Define a cross section, or profile, to project along the path.
The ultimate goal of these two processes is placement of a shape in the model as part of a
designed equipment object.
After a path and cross-section have been defined, the cross- section is then projected along the
path to create a shape with the same properties as other equipment shapes.
The place prismatic shape feature is available on the Occurrence tab of the Shape
Properties dialog box.
When you create a designed equipment object and add an equipment component object or
shape, the default surface on the equipment component object or shape as defined in Visual
Basic is automatically used to establish a mate or align relationship to the other surface or
reference element you select during initial placement. When modifying a shape to create a new
mate or align relationship, the default surface is not automatically used. You must interactively
select the surface. For example, you might define the bottom of a pump as the default surface
so that the software mates that surface to the floor. If the software cannot find a suitable mating
surface for the equipment, the equipment object is placed in free space, pending additional
design of the structures or other reference elements.

When creating a designed equipment object, you can provide an optional offset distance from
the surface. The default offset distance for any new piece of equipment is zero or the last offset
used in the current session. The software maintains the offset relationship between the default
surface and the surface or reference element in the workspace in the event of any changes to
their position. For example, if a slab is lowered, then the equipment follows the slab, maintaining
the offset. You can further define the equipment orientation by mating, aligning, or connecting
equipment to other objects in the model, or by moving or rotating the designed equipment. For
more information on positioning relationships, see Positioning Relationships.
Place Designed Equipment Ribbon

Sets options for adding designed equipment to your model. This ribbon appears automatically
after you select the Place Designed Equipment command and then select an equipment
type. Until a shape has been added to the designed equipment, only the Equipment
Properties, Equipment Name, and Active System controls are available.
 To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read
the ToolTip.
 To add a shape to the designed equipment and enable the remaining ribbon controls, select
Place Shape .
Equipment Properties
Edits the occurrence properties and review the static properties of an existing piece of
equipment. Equipment properties can be edited only after the designed equipment is placed
in the model.
Relationship List
Lists all relationships for the selected designed equipment and provides an option for
creating a new relationship if the equipment is not already fully constrained. An equipment
object is fully constrained when it has sufficient defined relationships to prevent movement
or rotation of the object along all three coordinate axes. This control is only available after a
shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships: Mate, Align, Connect
Minimum Distance, Mate to Tangent Plane, and Parallel. Some options may not be available
for all designed equipment types. See Positioning Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship
Removes the selected relationship from the equipment model and the database. Using the
Relationships List box, select a previously existing relationship for the designed
equipment, and click Delete Relationship. You can use this command only when modifying
existing designed equipment. This control is available only after a shape has been added to
the designed equipment.

Equipment Reference
Prompts you for the reference on the designed equipment to be placed that will be affected
by the positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to
create the relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step remains
fixed.
Prompts you for the reference on the equipment object or reference element already in the
software repositions the first designed equipment object chosen with respect to the second
object selected in the definition of the relationship. This control is available only after a
shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Offset
placement if needed. This control is available only after a shape has been added to the
designed equipment.
Name
Displays the designed equipment name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and
accepts changes to that name.
System
Specifies the system with which to associate the selected equipment. The default system is
the Model itself.
Select Equipment Type Dialog Box

Selects the type of designed equipment to be created. This dialog box appears automatically
when you click the Place Designed Equipment command. By browsing through the part
hierarchy, you can find any piece of equipment in the Catalog database. The resulting designed
equipment inherits the properties of the existing equipment type you select from the dialog box.
After you select an equipment type and click OK, the Properties dialog box appears so you can
set properties for the new equipment. After you click OK on the Properties dialog box, the
software returns you to the model so you can finish placing the object.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected equipment type or node. Use this command to
navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific type you need.
Forward
Sends you to the last selected equipment type or node that you moved away from by using
the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the
specific type you need.
Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the Equipment catalog hierarchy. Use this command to
navigate through the equipment hierarchy to the specific type you need.

Properties
until the equipment is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected equipment. The image file must be assigned to the
equipment in the catalog reference data.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display equipment in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place designed equipment (on page 301)
 Set positioning relationships for designed equipment (on page 302)
 Edit designed equipment properties (on page 302)
 Edit designed equipment reference coordinate system (on page 303)
Place designed equipment

1. Click Place Designed Equipment on the vertical toolbar.
The Select Equipment Type dialog box displays.
2. Select the designed equipment type to create.
The Select Equipment Type dialog box displays the existing equipment
classifications as defined in the Catalog database. The resulting designed equipment object
inherits the properties of the equipment type you select.
3. Click OK.
A definition of the new designed equipment object is created in the Model database and
displays in the system hierarchy in the Workplace Explorer.

The Designed Equipment Properties dialog box displays.

4. Edit the designed equipment properties as needed, and click OK.
The software returns you to the model to complete the placement of the designed
equipment.
5. Click in the graphic view to define the origin of the equipment.
You can press the down arrow key to scroll to each data point in the equipment.
6. If necessary, use the Place Designed Equipment ribbon to do the following:
 Select a system with which to associate the new designed equipment object from the
options in the System box.
 Type a name for the new designed equipment object in the Name box.
Although the new designed equipment object is added to the Workspace
Explorer, you must use Place Shape to create geometry for the object. For more
information, see Place Shape (on page 328).
Set positioning relationships for designed equipment

1. Select the designed equipment object for which to define a relationship.
2. In the Relationships List box on the Place Designed Equipment ribbon, choose <New
Relationship>.
3. Select one of the available positioning relationships in the Positioning Relationships List
box, and follow the on-screen prompts. For more information, see Positioning Relationships.
Depending on the type of positioning relationship defined in the previous step,
surfaces or points need to be defined to finish configuring the relationship.
Edit designed equipment properties

1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Equipment, and then select an
equipment object.
 If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select on the
vertical toolbar.
 To edit the properties of a designed equipment object for which geometry has yet to be
defined, you must select the object from the system hierarchy in the Workspace
Explorer.
2. Click Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
The Properties dialog box displays.
You can also access the Properties dialog box by selecting Properties from the
Edit menu, or by right-clicking an equipment object and choosing Properties from the short-
cut menu.
3. Click the appropriate dialog box tabs, and modify the properties as needed.

4. Click OK to save your changes, and return to the workspace.

 Occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Excel
workbook named Equipment.xls in the reference data. For information on adding or editing
different types of properties, refer to the Reference Data Guide, accessible from the Help >
 If more than one piece of equipment is selected, the Occurrence tab displays only the
common occurrence properties of the items.
 The Definition, Connections, Weight & CG, and Relationship tabs are read-only. The
properties and values displayed on these tabs are defined in the reference data. For more
information, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide, accessible from the
Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
 If the equipment model was created using Solid Edge, then any changes that affect the
shape or size of the equipment model require that you have Solid Edge running on your
computer.
Edit designed equipment reference coordinate

system
1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Equipment, and then select a
designed equipment object.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select on
the vertical toolbar.
2. Right-click the selected equipment object, and click Reference coordinate system.
3. Click Move to move the reference coordinate system.

The control point of the designed equipment moves with the reference coordinate system.

Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box

Displays designed equipment properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 304)
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 296)
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays all the editable instance-specific information about the selected designed equipment
object. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property
value appears on the right side of the grid. If more than one equipment object is selected,
common occurrence properties for the selected objects appear on the tab.
When viewing properties for a single equipment object, the following properties appear. More
Furnishings Reference Data Guide, available from the Help > Printable Guides command in
the software.
Display Equipment Preview
This button is disabled for designed equipment.
Category
several different categories: Standard, Insulation and Tracing, Weight and CG, Fabrication
and Construction, Surface Treatment and Coating, Position and Orientation, and
Responsibility.
Standard
Name
Specifies the name of the object. If a Name Rule is specified, then the software uses that
rule to determine this name. If the Name Rule value is User Defined, then you must type a
name in this box.
Name Rule
Displays the available name rules for the selected object. Specify the naming rule to use to
name the object. You can select one of the listed rules, or you can select User Defined to
specify the name yourself in the (Name) box. Description

System
Select the system to which the object belongs. By default, the model is the parent system for
the object. If a parent system is selected when you start the command, System is
automatically updated with the selected system. If multiple systems are selected when you
start the command, System is automatically updated with the last used system.
Specifies the reporting requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Reporting Type select list in Catalog.
Reporting Type
Specifies the type of reporting. To change the options on the list, edit the Reporting Type
Room Number
Specifies the room number associated with the designed equipment.
Correlation Status
Specifies whether or not the object has been correlated to an object in a P&ID. The list is
defined by the EFWCorrelationStatus select list.
Correlation Basis
Specifies whether or not the object is correlated to a P&ID object. The list is defined by the
EFWCorrelationBasis select list.
Correlate Object indicates that the object has a correlating object in a P&ID.
No correlation is required indicates that the object does not have a correlating object in a
P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status
Specifies whether or not the object is approved with discrepancies in the three-dimensional
data compared with design basis data. The list is defined by the
EFWCorrelationApprovalStatus sheet in the AllCodelist workbook.
Topology mismatch approved indicates that the object topology mismatch can be ignored.
Data and Topology mismatches approved indicates that the object data and topology
mismatches can be ignored.
None indicates that you do not approve a mismatch.

East
east direction.
North
north direction.
Elevation

origin.
Bearing
Pitch
Roll

Insulation and Tracing

Is Insulated
Indicates whether or not the object is insulated.
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the Insulation
Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Thickness box.
However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation thickness
from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the
software reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and
displays it here.
Insulation Purpose
Displays the purpose of the insulation. If Insulation Specification is set to use the
insulation defined by the equipment object, the information in this box cannot be changed.
However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the purpose of the
insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference data.
Insulation Type
Specifies the type of the insulation. To change the options on the list, edit the Insulation
Purpose select list in Catalog.
Material
Specifies the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the Insulation
Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material box.
However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification as defined in
the reference data and displays it here.
Select More to select an insulation material from the Catalog. To change the options on the
list, edit the Insulation Material select list in Catalog.
Operating Temperature
Specifies the operating temperature.

Insulation Surface Area

Heat Tracing Requirement
Indicates whether or not the equipment is heat-traced. To change the options on the list, edit
the Heat Tracing Medium select list in Catalog.
Heat Tracing Type
Specifies the type of heat-tracing. To change the options on the list, edit the Heat Tracing
Medium select list in Catalog.
Heat Tracing Medium
Specifies the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in Catalog.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature
Specifies the temperature of the heat-tracing medium. Include the unit of measurement of
temperature (K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius, for example).
Weight & CG
Dry Weight
Wet Weight
Dry CGX
Dry CGY
Dry CGZ
Wet CGX
Wet CGY
Wet CGZ
Dry WCG Origin


Wet WCG Origin

Fabrication Type
Construction Type

Coating Color
Responsibility


See Also
Select Insulation Material Dialog Box

Specifies the insulation materials for a selected object. By browsing through the part hierarchy,
you can find and select an insulation material in the Catalog database.
Save
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete

Undo
Insert Row
Move Up
Move Down
Properties
until the object is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected object. The image file must be assigned to the
object in the catalog reference data.
Filter
Sort
List View
Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display insulation thickness values in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected insulation material folder. Use this command to
navigate through the hierarchy to the specific insulation material you need.
Forward
Sends you to the last selected insulation material folder that you moved away from by using
the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific
insulation material you need.
Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the hierarchy. Use this command to navigate through the
hierarchy to the specific material you need.

Check Data
CheckData Ignored Inconsistencies
Smart 3D Help
Address
Sets the current location within the hierarchy of available insulation materials. The dropdown
box lists the folders you have visited.
Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the part information for the equipment object, the properties and their values, as
defined in the reference data. If more than one equipment object is selected, only the common
properties for the selected objects display on the tab. For more information about the information
defined in the reference data, see the Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide,
available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Category
Select the properties to review. Equipment information is divided into several different
categories, such as Standard, Equipment Specification, Equipment Support, Nozzle
Length, and Equipment Dimensions.
Not all categories are available for all equipment objects.
Property
available with the Help > Printable Guides command within the Equipment and Furnishings
task.
Value
Insulation Tab
Displays insulation properties that have been defined for the selected equipment.
Specifies whether or not the selected equipment object is insulated. The options on this
dialog box remain disabled unless User Defined is selected from the dropdown list.
Purpose
Specifies the insulation purpose for the selected equipment object.
Material
Displays the Select Insulation Material dialog box from which you can specify an insulation

material. For more information, see Select Insulation Material Dialog Box (on page 294).
Thickness
Defines the thickness of the specified insulation material. This option remains disabled until
a material is selected from the Select Insulation Material dialog box. By default, the
smallest thickness value of the selected material is displayed. An alternative value may be
selected from the dropdown list.
See Also

SECTION 19
Place Designed Equipment Component

Specifies any equipment component from the Equipment Components folder of the catalog
and places an occurrence of it inside the model. You can modify the offset of the component, its
relationships to other equipment, and other properties during or after placement. Using
positioning relationships, the Place Designed Equipment Component command allows you to
mate, connect, or align equipment components, and you can use common tools like the
PinPoint command for precise positioning of the component.
The goal of the software's designed equipment component modeling capabilities is to allow you
to build an equipment component definition in the Model database by combining basic shapes,
ports, such as nozzles, foundations, electrical, and so on, and properties defined in the
reference data.
Designed equipment component objects can be built entirely of primitive geometric shapes. For
example, you can use the Place Designed Equipment Component command to create a
designed equipment component object in the model and add lugs, using the Place Shape
command, to customize the designed equipment component.
You can also place a nozzle using a nozzle defined in the P&ID design basis (if P&ID design
basis data is available).
Some equipment component shapes can be modeled more easily using solid modeling
software. In addition to using the primitive shapes delivered with the software, you can import
graphics from an SAT file as the geometry for the designed equipment shape. After the
geometry is defined, you can then place ports to define distributed connections to the designed
equipment.
Place Designed Equipment Component Ribbon

Sets options for adding designed equipment components to your model. This ribbon appears
automatically after you select the Place Designed Equipment Component command and
then select an equipment object, or when you select an existing equipment component.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and
read the ToolTip.
Equipment Component Properties
Edits the occurrence properties and reviews the static properties of an existing equipment
component. Equipment components properties can be set and edited only after an
equipment component object is placed in the model.
Any object modeled in Solid Edge that has occurrence properties cannot be
placed or modified unless your computer has a copy of Solid Edge installed.

Relationship List
Lists all relationships for the selected equipment component and provides an option for
creating a new relationship if the equipment component is not already fully constrained. An
equipment component part is fully constrained when it has sufficient defined relationships to
prevent movement or rotation of the part along all three coordinate axes.
Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships. See Positioning
Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship
Removes the selected relationship from the equipment component model and the database.
Using the Relationships list box, select a previously existing relationship for the equipment
component, and click Delete Relationship. You can use this command only when
modifying existing equipment components.
Equipment Component Reference
Prompts you for the reference on the equipment component to be placed that will be
affected by the positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step
moves to create the relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step
remains fixed.
Prompts you for the reference on the equipment component object or reference element
already in the model that will be affected by the positioning relationship. After you select the
reference, the software repositions the first equipment component part chosen with respect
to the second part selected in the definition of the relationship.
Offset
component placement if needed.
Name
Displays the equipment component name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and
accepts changes to that name.
Equipment
Specifies the equipment with which to associate the selected equipment component.
Place designed equipment component

1. Click Place Designed Equipment Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the equipment to which to add the component from the model or the Workspace
Explorer.
The Select Equipment Component Type dialog box appears.
3. Select the equipment component to place, and click OK.
The Design Equipment Component Properties dialog box appears.

4. Set properties as needed for the new designed equipment component, and click OK.
The software returns you to the graphic window so you can define the position of the
equipment component.
5. Using the Place Designed Equipment Component ribbon, do any of the following, if
necessary:
 Set an offset for the equipment relationship by typing the distance in the Offset box.
 Click Properties on the ribbon, and type any necessary property information in the
grid provided on the Equipment Component Properties dialog box.
Edit Equipment Properties (on page 286)
You can view the definition properties of the equipment object using the Properties
command within the Select Equipment Component dialog box on the equipment
component property page after you place the equipment component. The occurrence
properties for an equipment component object can be defined or modified after the
equipment component object has been placed in the model.
6. If necessary, add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Relationship
dropdown list on the Place Equipment Component ribbon.
Set Positioning Relationships for Equipment (on page 283)

SECTION 20
Place Designed Solid

The Place Designed Solid command is used to create highly customized designed solids
for both complex concrete needs and equipment modeling.
Designed solids are essentially containers for a collection of shapes that you add to and subtract
from the solid. To place a designed solid, a designed equipment or a designed equipment
component must first be placed in the model. Then, the designed solid is placed as a child of the
designed equipment or the designed equipment component. You can then add shapes
underneath the designed solid. You can have multiple designed solids under one designed
equipment or designed equipment component. You can also have multiple designed equipment
components under one designed equipment.

A shape must be a child of a designed solid in order for the software to compute the weight and
center-of-gravity. The designed solid's weight and center-of-gravity properties are the sum of all
shapes underneath a designed solid. For example, Shape A + Shape B + Shape C = Total
Surface Area, Volume, Weight and Center-of-Gravity of the designed solid. If there is more than
one solid underneath a designed equipment parent, these solids are also summed up to give a
Total Weight and Center-of-Gravity for the designed equipment. For example, Solid A + Solid B
+ Solid C = Total Weight and Center-of-Gravity of the designed equipment.
Only shapes with simple physical or detailed physical aspects are included in
weight and center-of-gravity calculations for designed solids. In addition, if some child shapes
are displayed using the simple physical aspect and other child shapes of the same designed
solid are displayed using the detailed physical aspect, only those shapes displayed as detailed
physical are included in the weight and center-of-gravity calculations. If all the child shapes of a
designed solid are displayed using the simple physical aspect, then they are all included in
weight and center-of-gravity calculations. We recommend that you do not mix simple physical
and detailed physical aspects in the same designed solid, as doing so will cause incorrect
weight and center-of-gravity values.
Each shape that you add to the designed solid can add material to the parent solid, remove
material from the parent solid, or not affect the parent (suppressed). The shape icon shown in
Workspace Explorer represents an Add , Subtract , or Suppress operation. By
default, shapes are added to a solid; however, during placement or after placement, you can
change the shape operation to Subtract Shape or Suppress Shape.
Think of Add Shape and Subtract Shape as Boolean operations. For example, the designed
solid below contains two shapes, A and B:
If you add shape B to shape A, the resulting designed solid appears as follows:
However, if you subtract shape B from shape A, the resulting designed solid appears as follows:
The Suppress Shape operation is used for creating construction geometries for reference when
placing other shapes. The suppressed shape itself is not included in the designed solid;
therefore, it will not affect weight and center-of-gravity calculations.
Place Designed Solid Ribbon

Sets options for adding designed solids to your model. This ribbon displays automatically after
you select the Place Designed Solids command, or when you select an existing designed
solid.

Designed Solid Properties

Edits the occurrence properties and reviews the static properties of an existing designed
solid. Properties can be edited only after the object is placed in the model. For more
information, see Solid Properties Dialog Box (on page 324).
Relationship List
Lists all relationships for the selected designed solid and provides an option for creating a
new relationship if the designed solid is not already fully constrained. A designed solid part
is fully constrained when it has sufficient defined relationships to prevent movement or
rotation of the part along all three coordinate axes.
Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships. Some options may not
be available for all designed solid types. See Positioning Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship
Removes the selected relationship from the designed solid in the model and in the
database. Using the Relationships list box, select a previously-existing relationship for the
designed solid, and click Delete Relationship. You can use this command only when
modifying existing designed solids.
Shape Reference
Prompts you for the reference on the designed solid that will be affected by the positioning
relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to create the
Prompts you for the reference on the designed solid or reference element already in the
software repositions the first shape part chosen with respect to the second part selected in
the definition of the relationship.
Offset
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial designed solid
placement, if needed.
Name
Displays the designed solid name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts
changes to that name.
Equipment
Displays the name of the parent designed solid. This field only displays when you select a
shape that comprises the designed solid.
Operators List
Activates the Order Shapes dialog box, with which you can control the order in which the
software processes the shapes that comprise the designed solid. Controlling the order in
which the shapes are processed can be important when some shapes that remove material
from the designed solid overlap with other shapes that add material to the designed solid.

Order Shapes Dialog Box

Controls the order in which the designed solid's shapes are processed by the software, which
can be very important when a shape that cuts material from the designed solid overlaps a shape
that adds material to the designed solid. The designed solid could look very different depending
on which shape, the cut or the add, the software processes last.
This dialog box is activated by Operators List on the Modify Designed Solid ribbon.
Shape Name
Displays the name of the shape. You can select the shape name in the list to highlight that
shape in the model view.
Operator Type
Displays whether the shape adds material to the designed solid or subtracts material from
the designed solid.
Up
Moves the selected shape up one row in the list.
Down
Moves the selected shape down one row in the list.
Top
Moves the selected shape to be the first shape in the list.
Bottom
Moves the selected shape to the last shape in the list.
OK
Applies the changes made to the list to the designed solid and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Ignores any changes made to the list and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Applies the changes made to the list to the designed solid, but leaves the dialog box active.
Use this option to see changes that you make instantly.

 Create a basic solid (on page 321)
 Import shape to designed solid (on page 322)
 Switch add, subtract, or suppressed shape (on page 323)
 Order shapes in designed solid (on page 323)

Create a basic solid

1. Place a designed equipment or a designed equipment component using the Equipment >
Civil > Miscellaneous equipment type.
Place designed equipment (on page 301)
Place designed equipment component (on page 315)
You must use the Equipment > Civil > Miscellaneous equipment type for the
software to correctly calculate the mass properties of the solid (volume, surface area,
weight, and center of gravity).
2. With the designed equipment or designed equipment component that you created in step 1
selected, click Place Designed Solid .
The software adds the new designed solid as a child of the designed equipment or
equipment component.
3. Click Place Shape , and then select the first shape for your designed solid.
4. In the Shape Properties dialog box, type the dimensions of your first shape, and then click
OK.
The software adds the shape to the designed solid in Workspace Explorer and places the
shape in the model at the point that you indicate.
5. On the ribbon, select whether the shape adds , subtracts , or is suppressed . Use
suppressed for construction graphics and for shapes you want to temporarily remove from
affecting the design solid.
6. Click Place Shape , and then select the next shape for your designed solid.
7. In the Shape Properties dialog box, type the dimensions for the second shape, and then
click OK.

8. Identify the location of the second shape in the model.
If you are placing a cylinder, cone, or eccentric cone shape, use the Shape
Reference option on the toolbar to select the end plane of the cylinder or cone when using
the Mate relationship to a plane of another shape.
9. On the ribbon, select whether the second shape adds , subtracts , or is suppressed
.
10. Continue to added shapes to the designed solid using the add, subtract, and suppress
options as needed.
Import shape to designed solid

1. Click Place Imported Shape from File on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the parent designed solid in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
3. In the Select Shape File dialog box, navigate to and select the SAT file or MicroStation
DGN file that contains the shape to insert. Click OK.
4. In the Display Aspect list box, select the aspects from the list.
You can click Format > View and change the Render Selected Aspects option in
the Format View dialog box to display the aspect in the active graphic view.
5. Click OK.

6. Click in the graphic view to select an approximate location or reference element for a
relationship for the shape.
SAT File Limitations

 From a performance point of view, the SAT file size should be less than 5 MB.
 From a drawings point of view, the files must not be detailed and must not spread across a
large space as they are caught in volume filters for Drawings.
 Spreading the SAT files across multiple equipment will reduce the volume of each .sat file.
 For efficient Interference Checker processing, SAT files should not have a footprint (range)
greater than 100 meters.
Switch add, subtract, or suppressed shape

2. Set the locate filter to Shape.
3. In a graphic view or in Workspace Explorer, select the shape to edit.
4. On the ribbon, select whether the shape adds , subtracts , or is suppressed .
Order shapes in designed solid

2. Set the locate filter to Solids.
3. Select the parent designed solid whose shapes you want to re-order.
4. Click Operators List on the ribbon.
5. In the Order Shapes dialog box, use the Up, Down, Top, and Bottom commands to order
the shapes as needed.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your changes and update the designed solid.
See Place Designed Solid (on page 317) for more information on why the order of
shapes in a solid is important.

Solid Properties Dialog Box

Displays designed solid properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Solid Properties Dialog Box) (on page 324)
Occurrence Tab (Solid Properties Dialog Box)

Displays all editable instance-specific information about the selected designed solid. The
on the right side of the grid. If more than one solid object is selected, common occurrence
properties for the selected objects appear on the tab.
When viewing properties for a single solid object, the following properties appear. More
Furnishings Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the
software.
Category
several different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, and Position and Orientation.
Display Aspect
Select the display aspects that you want to see for the solid.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the solid object. The solid name is based on the Name Rule selection.
If you type a name in this field, the Name Rule property updates to User Defined.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this solid object. You can select one of the listed
rules or select User Defined to specify the solid name yourself in the Name box.
Material Name
Select the material for the solid.
Material Grade
Select the material grade for the solid.
You must define a material and material grade before the software can calculate
the solid's weight and center of gravity.
Surface Area
Displays the calculated surface area.

Volume
Displays the calculated volume.
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Wet Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Wet CG X
Wet CG Y
Wet CG Z
Dry WCG Origin
Wet WCG Origin



East
east direction.
North
north direction.
Elevation
origin.
Bearing
Pitch

Roll

SECTION 21
Place Shape
Adds additional shapes to an existing equipment or equipment component type. The Place
Shape command uses the equipment or equipment component object selected in the
Workspace Explorer hierarchy. If no equipment or equipment component object is selected
prior to starting the command, you are prompted to select an equipment or equipment
component object.
If you click and hold the button on the vertical
toolbar, the Place Shape palette displays so that
you can select a different type of shape to place.
Click More to display the Select Shape dialog
box and select a shape from those available in
the Catalog database.
Place Shape Ribbon

Sets options for positioning the specific shape as
part of a selected designed equipment object.
Properties
Edits the occurrence properties and reviews the static properties of an existing shape.
Properties can be edited only after the object is placed in the model. For more information,
see Shape Properties Dialog Box (on page 333).
Relationship List
Shows the relationship currently applied to the shape and allows you to change or add new
relationship as needed.
Positioning Relationship
Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships: Mate, Align, and
Connect. Some options may not be available for all shape types. For more information, see
Positioning Relationships.
Delete Relationship
Removes the selected relationship from the model. Using the Relationships List box,
select a previously existing relationship for the shape, and click Delete Relationship. You
can use this command only when modifying existing shapes. This control is available only
after a shape has been added to the equipment or equipment component.
Shape Reference
Prompts you for the reference on the shape to be placed that will be affected by the
positioning relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to create the
Prompts you for the reference on the shape object already in the model that will be affected

Place Shape
by the positioning relationship. After you select the reference, the software repositions the
first shape chosen with respect to the second part selected in the definition of the
relationship.
Offset
placement if needed. This control is only available after a shape has been added to the
designed equipment.
Name
Displays the shape name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts changes
to that name.
 If the name of the parent equipment changes, the software automatically updates the
name of the shape to reflect that change. For example, if the name of the parent item
changes from Pump01 to Pump100, the shape's name changes from Pump01-Shape-
001 to Pump100-Shape-001.
 Some properties for the shape may be read-only on the Place Shape ribbon, depending
on the type of shape you selected.
Equipment
Specifies the equipment or equipment component object with which to associate the
selected shape.
Add Shape/Subtract Shape/Suppress Shape
Defines how the shape is used for a designed solid. This option is only available when you
are placing or editing a shape in a parent designed solid.
Add Shape
Select to have the shape add its material to the parent designed solid.
Subtract Shape
Select to have the shape subtract its material from the parent designed solid.
Suppress Shape
Select to have the shape added to the parent designed solid in the hierarchy, but have the
shape's material ignored--neither added to nor subtracted from the parent designed solid.
Use this option to temporarily remove a shape's effect on the parent designed solid, but not
remove the shape from the designed solid entirely. You can use suppressed shapes as
construction graphics for the placement of other shapes in the designed solid.
Select Shape Dialog Box

Specifies a shape to place on an equipment or equipment object. The dialog box appears
automatically when you click More in the Shape floating palette. By browsing through the
shapes hierarchy, you can find any shape that exists in the Catalog database. After you select a
shape, the Shape Properties dialog box appears so you can define shape properties. When
you click OK on the Shape Properties dialog box, the software returns you to the graphic
window so you can place the shape.

Place Shape
Back
Returns you to the previously selected shape type or node. Use this command to navigate
through the hierarchy to the specific shape you need.
Forward
Sends you to the last selected shape type or node that you moved away from by using the
Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific shape you
need.
Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the Shapes catalog hierarchy. Use this command to
navigate through the hierarchy to the specific shape you need.
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected shape. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the shape is placed, all properties on the Properties dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a bitmap symbol of the selected shape. The image file must be assigned to the
shape in the catalog reference data.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display shapes in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display shapes in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place a shape (on page 331)
 Edit shape properties (on page 332)
 Edit prismatic shape properties (on page 333)

Place Shape
Place a shape
1. Click Place Shape on the vertical toolbar, and hold down a few seconds to display the
floating Shapes palette.
2. Select the shape to place from the Shapes palette. The icon of the last used shape displays
on the toolbar.
If an equipment or an equipment component object has not been selected, you are
prompted to select one. Do this either in a graphic view or in the system hierarchy in the
Workspace Explorer.
3. If necessary, make adjustments on the Shape Properties dialog box, and click OK.

Place Shape
 You can continue using the Place Shape command to combine geometric shapes and
create customized equipment or equipment component objects.
 After a shape has been placed in the model as part of the equipment or equipment
component object, you can use the horizontal ribbon to add or change the positioning
relationship.
 Press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the shape by 90-degree increments at any time
during the placement of the shape. Press the up arrow to scroll through the three possible
axes of rotation. Press the down arrow key to scroll to each datum point.
Edit shape properties

1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a shape in the
graphic window.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Shape Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
You can also access the Shape Properties dialog box by selecting Properties from
the Edit menu, or by right-clicking the shape and choosing Properties from the short-cut
menu.
3. On the Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 334), modify the geometric
dimensions of the shape.
4. Access the other dialog box tabs, and modify the properties as needed.
5. Click OK to save your changes and return to the workspace.
 Each geometric shape object has its own Properties dialog box that displays its
corresponding parameters, including any reference graphics that illustrate what the
dimensional parameters represent.
 All occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Excel
Printable Guides command.

Place Shape
Edit prismatic shape properties

1. On the horizontal ribbon, set the Locate Filter box to Shape, and then select a prismatic
shape.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click the Select
Tool on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Properties on the horizontal ribbon.
You can also access the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box from the
Relationship tab on the Designed Equipment Properties dialog box. Select the name of
the prismatic shape to edit, and click Go To.
3. On the Occurrence tab, modify the display aspect or the name of the prismatic shape.
4. On the Cross-Section tab, modify the geometric dimensions of the existing cross-section,
or select a new cross-section and type new property information.
5. Access the other dialog box tabs, and modify the properties as needed.
6. Click OK to save your changes and return to the workspace.
 Each geometric shape object has its own Properties dialog box that displays its
corresponding parameters, including any reference graphics that illustrate what the
dimensional parameters represent.
 All occurrence and definition properties for an equipment object are defined by the Excel
Shape Properties Dialog Box

Displays shape properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 334)

Place Shape
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box)

Sets properties for the unique instance of the selected shape. Shapes can be placed either from
what has been defined in the reference data, or by importing a geometric shape contained within
an SAT file.
Category
Displays the defined category name for the selected designed equipment. This data is
retrieved from the Equipment and Furnishings reference data.
Display Aspect
Displays the Display Aspect dialog box which lists all the display aspects that may be
applied to the selected shape.
Property
Lists all the dimensional properties of the selected shape. You can add or modify these
properties through the catalog reference data. The properties available change depending
on the type of shape selected.
Value
Shows the current values for all properties of the selected shape. You can modify these
values to reflect exact design needs or deviations from the standard part.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. If a Name Rule is specified, then the software uses that
rule to determine this name. If the Name Rule value is User Defined, then you must type a
name in this box.
Name Rule
specify the name yourself in the (Name) box. Behavior Controlled by User
Indicates whether or not you can delete the object. Select False to prevent anyone from
deleting the object from the model.
Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box

Displays prismatic shape properties for review and editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 335)
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 335)

Place Shape
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box)

Sets properties for the unique instance of the selected prismatic shape. Prismatic shapes can be
placed in the model by selecting PrismaticShape in the Shapes dropdown list on the
Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog Box) (on page 334).
Category
Displays the defined category name for the selected prismatic shape. This data is retrieved
from the Equipment and Furnishings reference data.
Shape
Displays the PrismaticShape icon. This option is read-only when you access the tab to edit
a prismatic shape that has already been placed in the model.
Display Aspect
Lists all the display aspects that can be applied to the selected shape.
Name
Displays the name defined for the selected prismatic shape during its initial placement in the
model.
Name Rule
specify the name yourself in the (Name) box.
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box)

Displays information about the cross-section for a prismatic shape that was projected along a
path.
Cross Section
Specifies the type of cross-section for the object. You can either select a standard cross-
section defined in the reference data or select Sketch to draw your own cross-section.
Select any standard cross-section type in the Cross Section list to modify the properties
that are described in this topic. When you select Sketch in the Cross Section list, you can
view options, such as each point, its X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates in the model, and its turn
type, but you cannot modify them.
For more information, see General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) (on page 362).
Display Cross Section Image
Displays the image associated with the standard cross-section type in the reference data.
Cross-section images show the dimensions that you can define for the cross-section type,
the default cardinal points for the cross-section type, and the angle for the cross-section. For
example, the following graphic contains the dimensions and cardinal point for a standard
road cross-section:
If no image is associated with the cross-section and the selected cardinal point, Image Not
Available displays at the bottom of the tab.

Place Shape
A-G
Defines the dimensions for standard cross-sections. If an image
is defined for the cross-section in the reference data, you can see
what each letter represents by clicking Display Cross Section
Image .
Cardinality
Defines the point where the software attaches the cross-section to the path. If you click
Display Cross-Section Image to see a graphic of the cross-section, you can view
where each cardinal point is located by selecting each cardinal point in the list. The software
automatically updates the display, if the appropriate graphic is available, with a graphic
containing the selected cardinal point.
You can select User Defined cardinal points to specify a reference point on selected cross
section for precise placement.
Angle
Defines the angle by which the cross-section is rotated about the path.

SECTION 22
Creating Customized Shapes

In the Equipment and Furnishings task, you can create customized shapes in the location that
you need using the place prismatic shape feature. This feature is especially useful for designed
equipment objects that need to have an unusual shape.
When you place a prismatic shape, a two-dimensional cross-section is projected along a path
that you specify in the model to create the shape. The path determines the actual location of the
shape in the model. The cross-section, on the other hand, defines the shape and its dimensions.
Defining Paths
When you define the path along which the cross-section will be projected, you can choose from
straight lines or arcs. You can also control all aspects of the path by specifying the types of turns
that you need, the dimensions of the turns, and the plane for the path.
Defining Cross-sections
When you define the cross-section for the shape, you can select from a standard set of cross-
sections, defined in the reference data, or you can sketch your own two-dimensional cross-
section.
When you use a standard cross-sectional type, you can change the dimensions and the cardinal
point of the cross-section on the Cross-Section tab of the Shape Properties or Prismatic
Shape Properties dialog box. The cardinal point of the cross-section is important in determining
the shape and location of the resulting volume. The cardinal point is the point where the
software attaches the cross-section to the path. All standard cross-section types have various
cardinal points from which you can choose.
For example, in the following graphic, you can see that the cardinal
point is located in the center of the road cross-section. If the cardinal
point were moved to another location, the actual path of the roadway
would be different.
When you sketch a cross-section, you must sketch the cross-section
on the two-dimensional plane that is orthogonal to the first leg of the
path. The software displays this plane, which is perpendicular to the path, as you sketch the
cross-section. The cardinal point is defined as you sketch. In other words, the cross-section
surrounds the path and is attached to the path exactly as you sketch it.
Place Prismatic Shape Ribbon

Sets options for placing shapes defined by a path and the cross-section projected along the
path.
Shape Properties
Displays the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box, on which you can set properties for
the shape that you need to place. For more information, see Prismatic Shape Properties
Dialog Box.

Path
Displays the Create Path ribbon, which defines the path along which the cross-section is
projected.
Cross-Section
Sets properties for the cross-section. If one of the standard cross-section types is selected
in the Cross-Section Type box, this button is unavailable. If you select Sketch as the
cross-section type, this button displays the Create Path ribbon to allow you to sketch the
two-dimensional cross-section. The Cross-Section button is only available after you define
a path for the volume or when you select User Defined for Cardinality.
Finish
Places the shape along the path specified with the specified cross-section.
Cross-Section Type
Specifies the type of cross-section to project along the specified path. You can either select
a standard cross-section defined in the reference data, or you can sketch your own custom
cross-section.
Relationship List
Lists all relationships for the selected shape and provides an option for creating a new
relationship if the object is not already fully constrained. An object is fully constrained when
it has sufficiently defined relationships to prevent movement or rotation of the object along
all three coordinate axes.
Displays the available options for types of positioning relationships: Mate, Align, and
Connect. Some options may not be available for all shape types. See Positioning
Relationships for more information.
Delete Relationship
Removes the selected relationship from the model. Using the Relationships List box,
select a previously existing relationship for the shape, and click Delete Relationship. You
can use this command only when modifying existing designed equipment. This control is
available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Shape Reference
Prompts you for the face of the shape to be placed that will be affected by the positioning
relationship. In all cases, the part that you select in this step moves to create the
relationship, and the part chosen in the Second Part Reference step remains fixed. This
control is available only after a shape has been added to the designed equipment.
Prompts you for the reference on the shape object already in the model that will be affected
by the positioning relationship. After you select the reference, the software repositions the
first shape part chosen with respect to the second part selected in the definition of the
relationship.
Offset
establishing a connect relationship. You can adjust this value after initial placement if
needed. This control is available only after a shape has been added to the designed

equipment.
Name
Displays the shape name, as dictated by your predefined name rules, and accepts changes
to that name.
Equipment
Specifies the designed equipment object with which to associate the selected shape.
Create Path Ribbon

Sets options for defining a new path.
Sketch Properties
Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box (on page 362), in which you can view properties
for the path.
Finish Path
Displays the path in the active view and returns to the model with the place prismatic shape
feature still enabled.
Cancel
Cancels the changes you made and returns you to the model.
Edit
Modifies and moves the existing path. When you initially create a path, this option is
available only after you place at least two points in the path. You can select the segment,
turn, or multiple segments to which to make modifications.
Create
Sketches the path or adds segments to an existing path.
Origin
Defines the origin on the cross-section for prismatic shape construction.
Reference Point
Specifies that you are currently defining the first point of the path segment.
End Point (Straight Line)
Specifies that you are currently defining the second point of a straight path segment.
End Point (Arc)
Specifies that you are currently defining the second point of an arc. This option appears only
when Arc is selected in the Line Type list.
Third Point (Arc)
Specifies that you are defining the final point of an arc.
Path Type
Specifies the type of line for the current segment in the path. To change the segment type,
click a new type in the Line Type list.

Line Type Options

Line
Defines the line type for the segment to be a straight line.
Arc by 3 Points
Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc. To define the arc, you must click three
points in the view.
No Line
Specifies that you do not want the current segment of the path to have a line associated with
it.
Plane
Activates options for selecting a working plane for the path.
Working Plane Options

Plan Plane
Defines the work surface as the XY plane.
Elevation Plane: East-West

Defines the work surface as the XZ plane.
Section Plane: North-South
Defines the work surface as the YZ plane.
Plane by Turn
Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing turn. You select the turn to set
the plane.
Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
No Plane
Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you place to any plane.
Lock Angle
Locks or unlocks the Angle box. Locking the corresponding angle value creates a constraint
along which the selected turn angle can be moved.
Angle
Specifies the angle for the turn.
Lock Length
Locks or unlocks the Length box.
Length
Specifies the length of the selected path segment.

Turn Type
Specifies the type of turn associated with the current path segment. The Turn Type option
is unavailable if you select Arc or No Line in the Line Type list.
Turn Type Options

None
Indicates that no special turn type will be applied to the turn.
Bend
Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a bend. You can specify the angle of
the bend in the Feature Value box.
Cornice
Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a cornice. You can specify the radius
of the cornice in the Feature Value box.
The following graphic includes an example of each of the available turn types:
Turn Type Value

Defines dimensions for the selected turn type.
Edit Path Straight Segment Ribbon

Sets options for modifying a straight segment of an existing path.
Sketch Properties
Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box (on page 362), on which you can view properties
for the path.
Finish Path
Cancel

Edit
Modifies and moves the existing path. You can select the segment, turn, or multiple
segments to which to make modifications.
Create
Displays the Create Path ribbon to allow you to add segments to an existing path.
Origin
Reference Point
Specifies that you are selecting the starting location of the move vector.
End Point
Specifies that you are selecting the ending location of the move vector.
Path Type
Path Type Options

Line
Arc by 3 Points
points in the view.
No Line
it.
Plane

Plan Plane

Plane by Turn
the plane.


No Plane
Delete Selected Items
Deletes the selected path segments.
Length Locked
Defines whether or not the length of the selected segment should remain constant while
moving.
When locked , the software automatically modifies the turn points, along with the length
and angle of adjacent segment, to remain connected to the moved segment. The length of
the moved segment does not change.
When not locked , the software extends or shortens the associated segments to connect
with the new position of the moved segment. The length of the moved segment can change.
Edit Path Arc Ribbon

Sets options for modifying an arc that is part of an existing path.
Sketch Properties
for the path.
Finish Path
Cancel
Edit
Create
Displays the Create Path ribbon to allow you to add segments to an existing path.
Origin
Reference Point
End Point

Path Type
Path Type Options

Line
Arc by 3 Points
points in the view.
No Line
it.

Plan Plane

Plane by Turn
the plane.
No Plane
Edit Path Turn Ribbon

Sets options for modifying a turn in an existing path.
Sketch Properties
for the path.
Finish Path


Cancel
Edit
Create
Displays the Create Path Ribbon to allow you to add segments to an existing path.
Origin
Reference Point
End Point
Plane

Plan Plane

Plane by Turn
the plane.
No Plane
Angle 1
Displays the first angle used in the turn, if one exists. This option is read-only.

Angle 2
Displays the second angle used in the turn, if one exists. This option is read-only.
Angle 3
Displays the third angle used in the turn, if one exists. This option is read-only.
Turn Type
Specifies the type of turn. You can change the turn type by selecting another type in the list.
Turn Type Options

None
Indicates that no special turn type will be applied to the turn.
Bend
Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a bend. You can specify the angle of
the bend in the Feature Value box.
Cornice
Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a cornice. You can specify the radius
of the cornice in the Feature Value box.
Chamfer
Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a chamfer. You can specify the
dimensions for setback A and setback B of the chamfer in the Feature Value box. The
dimensions of setback A and setback B for the chamfer must be the same.
Turn Type Value


Place a prismatic shape

1. Click Place Shape on the vertical toolbar.
If a designed equipment object has not been selected, select one in a graphic view
or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Shapes palette displays

2. On the Shapes dialog box, select Prismatic Shape.
Click More to select a shape from the catalog browser.
3. Click Display Aspect and select the aspects from the list.
4. Specify a name for the new shape in the Name box.

5. On the Cross-Section tab, select a cross-section in the drop-down list.
A corresponding image of the selected cross-section appears at the bottom of the dialog
box.
6. In the Value column, type the appropriate geometric dimensions, cardinal point, and angle.
7. Click OK to return to the model.
8. Define the path for the shape. For more information, see Define the Path for a Prismatic
Shape (on page 349).
9. Click Finish Path to finish the path.

10. Click Finish to place the new shape and save it to the database.
11. If necessary, add or change a positioning relationship by selecting it from the Positioning
Relationships list.
Define the path for a prismatic shape

shape.
2. On the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon, click Path .
3. Click Create on the ribbon.
4. Click the first point for the path.
 You can use the PinPoint or Point Along commands and the SmartSketch relationship
indicators when defining your path.

 You can change the plane for the path at any time by selecting the plane in the Plane
list.
 To change the segment from a straight line to an arc, click Arc by 3 Points in the
Path Type list, and then click three points to define the arc.
 To switch back to a straight line after sketching an arc, click Line in the Path Type
list.
 To break the path, click No Line in the Path Type list.
5. Click the second point for the path.
To change the turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list,
and define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Turn Type Value box.
The following graphic shows examples of the available turn types:

6. Click to place other segments of the path as needed.
7. After you place all the points that define the path, click Finish Path.
 The software does not require that you close the path. When creating a continuous path, you
can end it at any point.
 After you place a segment of the path by defining two points, you can click Edit on the
ribbon to change the segment.
Sketch the cross-section for a prismatic shape

1. On the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon, select Sketch in the Cross-Section list.
2. Click Cross-Section .
3. Click the first point for the cross-section.
 You must sketch the cross-section on the two-dimensional plane that is orthogonal to
the first leg of the path. Click Show Cross Section to display a window in the two-
dimensional plane. The software displays this plane, which is perpendicular to the path,
as you sketch the cross-section.
 The cardinal point, which is the point where the cross-section is attached to the path, is
defined as you sketch. In other words, the cross-section surrounds the path and is
attached to the path exactly as you sketch it.
list.
4. Click the next point for the cross-section.

To change the turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list
and define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Turn Type Value box. The following
graphic shows examples of the available turn types:
5. Click to place other segments of the cross-section as needed.

6. Click the starting point of the cross-section to close it.
7. Click Finish Path.
The Finish Path button is not available until you close the cross-section by clicking
the starting point.
After you place a segment of the cross-section by defining two points, you can click
Edit on the ribbon to change the segment.
Define cross-sectional properties for a prismatic

shape
shape.
If the Locate Filter box is not displayed on the horizontal ribbon, click Select Tool
on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon, select a cross-section type in the Cross- Section
Type list.
If you select Sketch in the Cross-Section Type list, you must sketch the cross-
section using the Path commands before you can edit properties.
3. Click Properties .
4. On the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box, click the Cross-Section tab.

5. Define values for each dimension of the cross-section. Letters such as A, B, and C
represent the cross- sectional dimensions.
 To see what each lettered dimension represents on the cross-section, click Display
Cross-Section Image to view a graphic of the selected cross-sectional type if one
exists in the reference data.
 Cross-sectional images show the dimensions that you can
define for the cross-section type, the default cardinal points
for the cross-section type, and the angle for the cross-
section. For example, the following graphic contains the
dimensions and cardinal point for a standard road cross-
section.
Not all cross-section types have images associated with them.
6. Select the cardinal point for the cross-section in the Cardinality list.
 The cardinal point is the point where the software attaches the cross-section to the path.
 If you click Display Cross- Section Image to see a graphic of the cross-section,
you can view where each cardinal point is located by selecting each cardinal point in the
list.
7. Type an Angle for the cross-section, if needed.
8. Click OK.
 If you sketch a cross-section, the properties for the cross-section include the X-, Y-, and Z-
coordinates, the turn type, and values for each point that define the cross-section path.
 You cannot modify the properties of a sketched cross-section on the Prismatic Shape
Properties dialog box. Instead, you must make changes to the path that defines the cross-
section sketch. For more information, see Modify a Sketched Cross-Section (on page 353).
Modify a sketched cross-section

1. Click Select .
shape with a sketched cross-section.
3. On the ribbon, click Cross-Section . The software outlines the cross-section path in
yellow.
4. To modify a straight segment in the cross-section, select the segment to modify, and then
make changes on the ribbon.
Modify a Straight Segment in a Path (on page 359)
5. To modify an arc in the cross-section, select the arc to modify, and then make changes on
the ribbon.
Modify an Arc in a Path (on page 359)

6. To modify a turn in the cross-section, select the turn to modify, and then make changes on
the ribbon.
Modify a Turn in a Path (on page 360)
7. To move a segment in the cross-section, click the segment to move, and then click the point
from which to move the segment and the point to which to move the segment.
Move Segments of a Path (on page 357)
8. To add segments to the cross-section, click Create on the ribbon, and then click to place the
new segments.
Add Segments to a Path (on page 355)
You can add as many segments to the cross-section as you need. However, you
must close the cross-section to be able to save it.
9. To delete a segment in the cross-section, select the segment to delete, and then click
Delete Selected Items .
 The Finish Path button is not available until you close the cross-section by clicking the
starting point.
 The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path.
 The new shape is actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic
Shape ribbon.
Edit cross-section properties for a prismatic shape

1. Click Select .
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Properties .
4. In the Prismatic Shape Properties dialog box, click the Cross-Section tab.
5. Make modifications to the cross-section properties.
As you make changes to the cross-section properties, the cross-section changes
appear dynamically in the model.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Finish to apply the changes to the cross-section to the volume.
 If you sketch a cross-section, the properties for the cross-section include the X-, Y-, and Z-
coordinates, the turn type, and values for each point that define the cross-section path.

 You cannot modify the properties of a sketched cross-section in the Prismatic Shape
Properties dialog box. Instead, you must make changes to the path that defines the cross-
section sketch. For more information, see Modify a sketched cross-section (on page 353).
Add segments to a path

1. Click Select .
shape.
3. On the ribbon, click Path .
The software highlights the path.
4. To add one or more segments to the path, click Create.
5. Click the point on the existing path to insert the new segment.
 You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch relationship indicators when
defining your path.
list.
list.
 To break the path, click No Line in the Path Type list.

6. Click to place other points and add to the path as needed.
To change the turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list
and define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Feature Value box.
7. After you place all the points for the new segments, click Finish Path.
 The software does not require that you close the path. You can end the path at any point.
 You can click Edit on the ribbon to change the segment or modify the path further.
 To manually set the length and angle for a segment of the path, change the values in the
Angle and Length boxes on the ribbon.
See Also
Creating Customized Shapes (on page 337)

Move Segments of a Path

1. Click Select .
shape.

4. Select the segments to move.
You can select multiple segments by holding the CTRL key and clicking the
segments.
5. To keep the length of a straight segment constant while you move the segment, click
Length Locked .
 When the segment length is locked, the software automatically modifies the turn points,
along with the length and angle of the adjacent segment, to remain connected to the
moved segment. The length of the moved segment does not change.
 When the segment length is not locked, the software extends or shortens the associated
segments to connect with the new position of the moved segment. The length of the
moved segment can change.
6. Click Move From to specify the starting location of the move vector.

7. Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.
 The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path. The new shape is
actually created when you click Finish on the Place Prismatic Shape ribbon.
 While modifying several elements one at a time, you must use CTRL to select the next
element, and then CTRL to de-select the previous element.

Modify a straight segment in a path

1. Click Select .
shape.
4. Select the straight segment to modify.
You can select multiple segments by holding CTRL and clicking the segments.
5. To change the line type for the segment, click a new type in the Path Type list.
6. To change the plane for the segment, click a new plane in the Plane list.
7. To delete the segment, click Delete Selected Items .
8. To keep the length of a straight segment constant when you move the segment, click
Length Locked .
along with the length and angle of the adjacent segment, to remain connected to the
The new shape appears in dynamics when you click Finish Path. The new shape is
You can also move the segments of a path. For more information, see Move
Segments of a Path (on page 357).
Modify an Arc in a Path

1. Click Select .
shape.
4. Select the arc to modify.
You can select multiple segments by holding CTRL and clicking the segments.

7. To delete the segment, click Delete Selected Items .

Modify a turn in a path

1. Click Select .
shape.

The software outlines the path in yellow.
4. Select the turn to modify.
When the pointer passes over an object that contains multiple elements, use the
QuickPick feature to help you select the specific element.

6. To delete the turn, click Delete Selected Items .
7. To change the turn type, select a new type in the Turn Type list.
8. To change the dimensions for the selected turn type, type a value in the Feature Value box.

Sketch Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for paths. You cannot edit the different applicable properties.
See Also
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) (on page 362)
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the points that make up a path, their X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates, turn types, and turn
type dimensions.
Point No
Displays the point number that identifies the selected point.
X
Displays the location of the point on the X-axis.
Y
Displays the location of the point on the Y-axis.
Z
Displays the location of the point on the Z-axis.
Turn Type
Displays the type of turn associated with the point. Turn types include none, bend, chamfer,
and cornice.
Value
Specifies dimensions for the selected turn type. For bends and cornices, the value specifies
the radius of the bend. For chamfers, the value specifies the dimensions for setback A and
setback B of the chamfer.

SECTION 23
Place Imported Shape from File

Adds geometry to a designed equipment object that was modeled with solid modeling
software and saved to a VUE, SAT, or MicroStation DGN file format to an equipment or
equipment component object. The Place Imported Shape from File command uses the
equipment or equipment component object selected in the Workspace Explorer hierarchy. If no
equipment or equipment component object is selected prior to selecting the command, you are
prompted to select an equipment or equipment component object.
The command creates an Imported Shape object with the defined properties and a local
coordinate system. The imported shape coordinate system is defined by the VUE, SAT, or
MicroStation file. The new imported shape does not retain a connection to the original import
file.
After importing a shape, you can use the Place Nozzle command to complete the equipment
definition. For more information, see Place Nozzle in the Equipment and Furnishings User's
Guide.
You can also edit the shape properties. For more information, see Edit Shape Properties (on
page 332).
The Place Imported Shape from File command supports SAT files of ACIS R22 and
earlier.
Select Shape File Dialog Box

Specifies the VUE, SAT, or MicroStation DGN file that contains the geometry to import as the
shape. This dialog box appears automatically when you click the Place Imported Shape from
File command. You can navigate through the available file systems to locate the appropriate
file. After you select a file and click OK, the Display Aspects dialog box appears so you can
select the aspect(s) for the imported shape. The software returns you to the model to place the
imported shape.
When you use Place Imported Shape from File to place an imported shape from a .sat,
.dgn, or .vue file on the symbol share, Smart 3D remembers the relative path to the file. This lets
you share design files between models during Copy/Paste operations, Model Data Reuse,
Paste from Catalog, and Mirror Copy of imported shapes. If you import a shape file from a
location other than the symbol share, Smart 3D remembers the full path to that file. In both
cases, the full path displays on the Properties dialog box for the shapes. For more information,
see Share imported shapes between models (on page 366).
To save the relative path to imported shapes placed with earlier versions of Smart 3D,
you must remodel those shapes.
You can also right-click the new shape object and select Properties to further define the object.
Use Place Nozzle to add nozzles and/or ports to the object.
The Select Shape File dialog box is a standard Microsoft Windows dialog box. For
information regarding how to use the dialog box, click the question mark in the upper right
corner, and then click a control on the dialog box.

Place an Imported Shape

1. Click Place Imported Shape from File on the vertical toolbar.
If an equipment or equipment component object has not been selected, select one
in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Select Shape File dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to and select the VUE, SAT, or MicroStation DGN file that contains the shape to
insert, and then click OK.
3. In the Display Aspect list box, select the aspects from the list.
4. Click OK.
The list box closes, and you return to the model.
After a shape has been placed in the model as part of the equipment or equipment
component object, you can use the horizontal ribbon to add or change the positioning
relationship. You can add port definitions with the Place Nozzle command to complete the
equipment or equipment component definition.
SAT File Limitations

 From a performance point of view, the SAT file size should be less than 5 MB.
 From a drawings point of view, the files must not be detailed and must not spread across a
large space as they are caught in volume filters for Drawings.
 Spreading the SAT files across multiple equipment reduces the volume of each .sat file.
 For efficient Interference Checker processing, SAT files should not have a footprint (range)
greater than 100 meters.
 When we import the SAT files created using a third-party tools, they are converted to
Intergraph GType format. In some cases, the generated objects may not be valid after the
dual conversion, such as when you use AutoCAD to convert an object to ACIS SAT format,
and then convert it to GType. The possible causes for this failure are:
 You are using an old version of the SAT file.
 The units of measurement do not match. For example, scaling can result in a
degenerate geometry if the distance between two points becomes less than 1.0E-6 M.
 The orientation of the boundary curves is inconsistent with the surface normal. For
example, when applying the right-hand rule, the object is on your left when moving in
the direction on the boundary, and the surface normal is upward.
 The valid geometries that you can use in creating SAT files are listed below.
 GLineTYPE
 GEllipseTYPE

 GArcTYPE
 GLineStringTYPE
 GBspCurveTYPE
 GComplexStringTYPE
 GBspSurfaceTYPE
 GTorusTYPE
 GSphereTYPE
 GConeTYPE
 GTippyConeTYPE
 GPlaneTYPE
 GShapeTYPE
 GProjectionTYPE
 GPipeTYPE
 GRevolutionTYPE
 GElbowTYPE
 GRuledTYPE
 GRuledNormalTYPE
 GValveTYPE
 GReducerTYPE
 GPolyMeshTYPE
 GPointTYPE
 GVolumeTYPE
 GText3dTYPE
VUE File Limitations

 You cannot import the shape from the VUE file under a design solid.
 The VUE file size should be less than 10 MB. If the VUE file size exceeds 10 MB, the
software displays a warning message.
 If the VUE file size exceeds 25 MB, the software displays an error message and you cannot
place the object.
 The imported graphics are not smart graphics. They do not contain properties.
 The valid geometries that you can use are the same as those you can use in creating SAT
files.

Share imported shapes between models

For imported shapes placed from a file on the symbol share, Smart 3D remembers the relative
path to that file. If you import a shape file from a location other than the symbol share, Smart 3D
remembers the full path to that file. In both cases, the full path displays on the Properties dialog
box for the shapes.
When you place these shapes in the model using a file on the symbol share, and then later use
Copy/Paste operations, Model Data Reuse, Paste from Catalog, or Mirror Copy, then the
shapes will refer to a file on the target model symbol share rather than the source model symbol
share. If the shapes in the source model are placed using a file from somewhere other than the
symbol share, then during the Copy/Paste operations, Model Data Reuse, Paste from
Catalog, or Mirror Copy, the shapes will refer to that physical path.
 During Model Data Reuse, Copy/Paste, or Paste from Catalog, the software verifies that
the target file exists. If the target file does not exist in the path, Smart 3D does the following:
 Copies the graphics of the source model imported shape.
 Pastes the same graphics in the target model imported shape.
 Adds an item to the To Do List indicating that the symbol failed because the imported
shape source file is not found in the path. This applies to shapes imported from shared
content as well as shapes imported from a physical location.
 If the software detects a problem during Model Data Reuse, Copy/Paste, or Paste from
Catalog, such as an empty file or a file that it cannot convert, then Smart 3D does the
following:
 Copies the graphics of the source model imported shape.
 Pastes the same graphics in the target model imported shape.
 Adds an item to the To Do List with an appropriate message.

SECTION 24
Place Opening
Places an opening (hole) in a slab, wall, or member
created in the Structure or Civil task. The shape of the opening
can be defined by placing a pre-defined shape from the
catalog, sketching the opening outline, or defining the
boundaries for the opening. In addition, you can control the
depth of the opening to create a fully penetrating hole or a
recessed opening.
Place Opening Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the opening that you are placing or
editing.
Opening Properties
Activates the Opening Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
opening properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see Opening
Structure
Select the object in which to place an opening. You can select members or slabs.
Sketching Plane
Select the plane on the object on which to draw the opening. If you are placing an opening
that does not go all the way through the object, the sketching plane defines the side of the
object in which the partial opening is placed.
If you are editing an opening in the Structure or Civil task, this option is only
available if the sketching plane for the opening is missing.
Define Orientation
Select this option if you plan to sketch the opening and want to define the orientation of the
object, in which the opening is being placed, in the 2D environment. Most of the time, the
default orientation that the software uses is appropriate for the opening. However, use this
option if you are placing an opening in a multi- sided slab, for example, and you need to
know that the correct side of the slab is selected for the opening.
Edge for 2D X-axis
Select this option to specify the object edge that should be oriented along the bottom of the
2D environment. This option is only available when you select the Define Orientation

Place Opening
option.
End Point
Select this option to specify the lower left corner of the object as you want it to appear in the
2D environment. This option is only available when you select the Define Orientation
option.
Boundary
Specify the boundaries of the opening. If you select objects in the model and those objects
are moved, the software automatically resizes the opening to maintain the boundary
relationship. For example, you can select the outside edge of a beam flange as a boundary
along one side of an opening. Later, if the section size for the beam is changed and the
flange edge moves out an inch, the software automatically moves the edge of the opening
an inch to match the new location of the flange edge.
Boundary List
Activates the Boundary Offsets dialog box. This
dialog box allows you to define an offset distance for
each boundary that you have defined. Select a row
to highlight the boundary in the model. Then, type
the distance from the boundary to place the edge of
the opening. Type 0 to place the opening edge on
the boundary. Type a negative number to offset the
opening inside the boundary. Type a positive number

Place Opening
to offset the opening outside the boundary.

Finish
Places the opening using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Rejects the objects that you have selected.
Accept
Confirms the objects that you have selected.
Select Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model to define the boundaries of the opening. This
option is only available when you are specifying boundaries.
Add References to Sketch 2D
Adds an object as a reference object in the 2-D environment. The objects that you select will
display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define relationships and
dimensions to them) and are there to help you visualize the model. This option is only
available when you are drawing the boundaries of the opening.
For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole,
Sketch 2D environment. The aspect geometry displays as dashed lines. You can define
dimensions, but not relationships, to these aspects in 2D.
The software also automatically retrieves 3-D objects to display in the 2-D
environment. The automatically selected objects display as fine grey lines. Examples of
these objects include geometry generated by end cut operations, geometry that represents
hidden lines from intersecting objects projected to the sketching plane, or objects that
intersect the sketching plane. The software writes these graphics to the
No_Constrained_Elements layer. You can reference these objects to place your sketch, but
the objects that display as fine grey lines are temporary. When you exit the 2-D
environment, the software deletes these graphics. Any relationships or constraints to the
temporary graphics are also deleted when you exit the 2-D environment.
Although the references are deleted when you exit the 2D environment, the references are
automatically reimported when you modify the opening.
Draw
Activates the Structure Draft 2D View environment. Use this environment to sketch the
outline of the opening in the structure that you have selected.
Shape
Specifies how you want to define the opening shape. Select Sketch to draw the opening
shape. Select More to select an opening shape from the catalog. This option is only used
when you are not using boundaries to define the opening shape.
Cutting Limit
Select the cutting depth method for the opening.

Place Opening
 Select Through-All to completely penetrate the object in which the opening is placed.
This option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
 Select Through-Next to penetrate only one side of an object. For example, a channel
section member in which you want an opening only on the top flange. This option is
available only when the object that you select for the opening is a member whose cross-
section has parallel webs or flanges or a wall that turns back on itself. In the figure, A is
the Through-All option and B is the Through-Next option.
 Select User Defined if you want to specify the penetration depth of the opening. This
option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
Cutting Depth
Specify the cutting depth for the opening. The depth is measured from the sketching plane
that you specified.

 Place an opening by boundaries (on page 371)
 Place an opening by shape (on page 372)
 Place an opening by drawing (on page 374)
 Place an opening on a sloped wall (on page 376)
 Place an opening on a leaning wall (on page 378)
 Change a recess opening to a through opening (on page 380)
 Change a through opening to a recess opening (on page 380)
 Delete an opening (on page 380)

Place Opening
Place an opening by boundaries

1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the object in which you want to place the opening. You can select walls, slabs, and
members.

4. Select objects in the model to use as boundaries of the opening.
You must select the boundary objects in a clockwise or counterclockwise order.
5. Click Accept .
6. Optionally, define any offset from the boundaries that you have selected.

Place Opening
Type 0 to place the opening edge on the boundary. Type a negative number to
offset the opening inside the boundary. Type a positive number to offset the opening outside
the boundary. This offset can only be applied when the selected boundaries are lines or
planes.
7. Click OK on the Boundary dialog box.
8. Click Finish.
Place an opening by shape

2. Select the object in which to place the opening. You can select walls, slabs, and members.

Place Opening
4. Select objects that you need to reference when placing the opening.
5. In the Shape option, select More....

6. Select the catalog shape that you want to place, and then click OK.
7. Drag the shape to where you want the opening on the object.
8. Click Close on the ribbon bar.

Place Opening
9. Click Finish.
Place an opening by drawing

2. Select the object in which to place the opening. You can select walls, slabs, and members.

4. Select objects in the 3-D model near the object in which you are placing the opening. The
objects that you select display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define
relationships and dimensions to these blue-lined objects in 2-D.

Place Opening
5. Click Draw .
6. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening.
The opening that you drew displays in the 3-D environment.

Place Opening
8. Click Finish.
Place an opening on a sloped wall

Hole Parallel with Wall Slope
2. Select the sloped wall.
3. Select the side of the wall in which to place the opening.
If you are placing an opening that completely penetrates the wall, the side selection
is not important. However, if you are placing an opening that does not completely penetrate
the wall, then the surface selection is important because the penetration depth is measured
from the selected surface.
4. Click Draw .
Regardless of the slope, the wall displays as level in the 2-D environment.
5. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening. In the
example below, a small rectangular hole was drawn at the wall end.

7. Specify the cutting limit to use.
8. Click Finish.
The software places the hole in the sloped wall parallel to the slope.

Place Opening
Hole Parallel with Another Model Object

2. Select the sloped wall.
5. Select an object in the 3-D model near the wall that you want the hole parallel to. For
example, select a grid line to make the hole parallel to a plane. The objects that you select
will display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define relationships and
dimensions to them) and are there to help you visualize the model.
6. Click Draw .
The wall and the selected object displays in the 2-D environment.
example below, the opening was placed using the parallel SmartSketch relationship with a
grid line that was selected as a reference.

10. Click Finish.

Place Opening
The software places the hole in the sloped wall parallel to the referenced grid line.
Place an opening on a leaning wall

Opening Normal to Side of Wall
2. Select the wall.
4. Click Draw .
example below, a circular hole was drawn at the wall end.

8. Click Finish.

Place Opening
The software places the opening normal to the wall face.
Opening Normal to Another Model Object

2. Select the wall.
3. Select a plane that is normal to the opening that you want. In the example below, the web of
a nearby column is selected.
4. Click Draw .
The wall displays in the 2-D environment.
5. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening.
8. Click Finish.
The software places the opening normal to the column's web (right opening), not the wall

Place Opening
face (left opening).
Change a recess opening to a through opening

2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the recess opening to change to a through opening.
4. In the Cutting Limit option, select Through-All.
Change a through opening to a recess opening

3. Select the through opening to change to a recess opening.
4. In the Cutting Limit option, select User Defined.
5. In the Cutting Depth option, specify the new depth of the opening.
Delete an opening
3. Select the opening to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Place Opening
Opening Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the opening that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) (on page 381)
General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box)

The General tab displays the opening properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one opening and then selected the properties command, only the common properties
between the selected openings display.
When viewing properties for a single opening, the following properties display. More properties
Reference Data Guide for more information on properties. You can access this document using
the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Category - Select the properties that you want to view for the opening. Opening properties have
one category: Standard. You select the category to define values for by using the Category
option.
Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the opening. Because
opening reference data is fully customizable, only the common properties are documented.
Name
Specify a name for the opening.
Naming Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the opening.
 Default Name Rule - Names the opening using the format "Opening-<location>-
<index>" where <location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique
index number that starts at 0001. For example, Opening-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the wall using the format "Opening-<location>-<index>"
number that starts at 0001. For example, Opening-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the wall system name yourself in the Name box.
Description
Type a description for the opening.
Cutting Limit
Select the cutting depth method for the opening.
 Select Through-All to completely penetrate the object in which the opening is placed.
This option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.

Place Opening
 Select Through-Next to penetrate only one side of an object. For example, a channel
section member in which you want an opening only on the top flange. This option is
available only when the object that you select for the opening is a member whose cross-
section has parallel webs or flanges or a wall that turns back on itself. In the figure, A is
the Through-All option and B is the Through-Next option.
 Select User Defined if you want to specify the penetration depth of the opening. This
option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
Cutting Depth
Specify the cutting depth for the opening. The depth is measured from the sketching plane
that you specified.
Default constant offset
Specify the offset between the opening edge and the boundary. Type 0 to place the opening
edge on the boundary. Type a negative number to offset the opening inside the boundary.
Type a positive number to offset the opening outside the boundary. This offset can only be
set when the boundaries are lines or planes.
See Also
Opening Properties Dialog Box (on page 381)

SECTION 25
Place Stairs
Places a stair in the model. You attach the top of the stair to an edge of any object. You
attach the bottom of the stair to a plane. The bottom plane must be lower than the top edge. You
must also define the position of the stair along the top edge. There are two methods for defining
this position: 1) Select a reference edge or plane that intersects with the top edge and set the
horizontal offset distance along the top edge from the intersection point. You can position the
stair on either side of the reference. 2) Define a position for the stair graphically.
After you define the position of the stair, the stair appears in the model. The software
automatically calculates the number of steps.
1 - Top Edge
2 - Bottom Plane
3- Reference Edge
Because the stair, the top edge, and the bottom plane are connected, the interference
checker service will not find any hard interference between any part of the stair (stringer,
handrail, tread, and so forth) and the top edge object or the bottom plane.
Place Stair Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the stair that you are placing or editing.

Place Stairs
Stair Properties
Activates the Stair Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify additional
stair properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on the ribbon.
For more information, see Stair Properties Dialog Box (on page 389).
Select Top Edge
Select the reference plane or edge that defines the top elevation of the stair. If this edge is
deleted after the stair has been placed, the software puts the stair on the To Do List.
Select Bottom Plane
Select the reference plane that defines the bottom elevation of the stair. This plane must be
lower than the top edge that you selected. The reference plane can be flat or sloped up to
45 degrees. If this plane is deleted after the stair has been placed, the software puts the
stair on the To Do List.
Select Reference Edge
Select a plane or edge from which to place the stair along the top edge. This input is
optional.
Select Position
Graphically define the location of the stair along the selected top edge.
Finish
Places the stair in the model.
System
Select the system to which the stair belongs. You can create new systems in the Systems
and Specifications task.
Type
Select the type of stair to place.
Name
Specify the name for the stair that you are placing.
Width
Enter the width of the stair treads. This dimension does not include the width of the stringers
and therefore is less than the overall width of the stairs.

Place Stairs
Angle
Enter the angle of inclination between the selected bottom plane and the stair stringers.
Pitch
Enter the maximum allowable vertical distance between the stair treads. The actual distance
is calculated by the software using the vertical distance between the top edge and the
bottom plane and the stair angle. The actual distance is displayed in Actual Step Pitch.
Horizontal Offset
Specify the distance between the outside edge of the stair and the selected reference edge
or object.

Place Stairs
Vertical Offset
Specify the offset between the top of the stair stringer and the selected top edge.
Side
Places the stair on the opposite side of the top edge.
Select Stair Dialog Box

Allows selection of the type of stairs to be placed. This dialog box appears when you select
More in the Type list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any stair in the Catalog
database. After you select a stair, the software returns you to the model, where you can finalize
placement.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected stair type or node. Use this command to navigate
Forward
Sends you to the last selected stair type or node that you moved away from by using the
you need.
Up One Level
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected stair. Because you cannot modify any properties until
the stair is placed, all properties on the dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected stair. The image file must be assigned to the stair in the
reference data.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display stairs in a list view.

Place Stairs
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display stairs in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place a stair (on page 387)
 Edit stair placement (on page 389)
 Delete a stair (on page 389)
Place a stair
1. Click Place Stair on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the stair to place from the Select Stair dialog box. This selection becomes the default
selection the next time you place a stair. You can change the default using the Type option.
3. Select the top edge for the stair. This edge defines the top elevation of the stair.
4. Select the bottom plane for the stair. This plane defines the bottom elevation of the stair.

Place Stairs
5. Select the optional reference edge for the stair.
6. Define the location of the stair along the top edge.
7. Using the Horizontal Offset, Width, Angle, Pitch, Side, and Vertical Offset options, refine
the stair placement.
8. Click Finish.

Place Stairs
Edit stair placement

2. Select Stairs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the stairs to edit.
4. Using the ribbon bar options, edit the stair placement as needed.
Delete a Stair
2. Select Stairs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the stairs to delete.
4. Press DELETE.
Stair Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the stair that you are editing.
See Also
Definition Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box) (on page 397)
Occurrence Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Occurrence Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays the stair properties that you can edit or that are automatically
determined by the software at placement. The property name displays on the left side of the grid
than one stair, and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between
the selected stairs display.
When you view properties for a single stair, the following properties display. More properties
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the stair. Stair properties are divided into
Surface Treatment and Coating, and Responsibility. You select the category for which
you want to define values by using the Category option.

Place Stairs
Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the stair. Because stair
Name
Displays the name of the stair. The stair name is based on the Name Rule selection. If you
want to type a new name for the stair, select User Defined in the Name Rule box, and then
type a name for the stair in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this stair.
 Default Name Rule - Names the stairs using the format "<stair type>-<location>-
<index>" where <stair type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
<location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index number
that starts at 0001. For example, StairA1-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the stairs using the format "<system>-<stair type>-
<location>-<index>" where <system> is the name of the parent system to which the
stairs belong, <stair type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon, <location>
is the global workshare location ID, and <index> is a unique index number that starts at
0001. For example, Structure System-StairA1-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the stair name yourself in the Name box.
System
Select the system to which the stair that you are placing belongs.
Horizontal Offset
Specify the distance between the outside edge of the stair and the selected reference edge
or object.

Place Stairs
Vertical Offset
Specify the offset between the top of the stair stringer and the selected top edge.
Side Frame Section Name

Defines the cross-section for the stair stringers.
Handrail Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the stair handrails.
Step Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the stair treads.
Primary Material
Enter the primary material for the stairs.
Primary Grade
Enter the primary material grade for the stairs.
Actual Step Pitch
Displays the actual vertical distance between the stair treads. The software calculates this
value using the vertical distance between the top edge and the bottom plane and the stair
angle. You can define the maximum allowable pitch between treads in the Step Pitch
property.
Specify whether this stair is reported.
Reporting Type
Select the reporting requirements code for the stair. Valid codes are defined in the Catalog
task in the Reporting Type select list.
Number of Steps
Displays the number of treads on the stair. This value is calculated by the software and
cannot be edited.

Place Stairs
Justification
Specifies how the stairs align with the connecting object.
Side Frame Section Cardinal Point
Side Frame Section Angle
Enter the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the side frame cross-section rotates about
the member axis. The zero-degree position is either the global Z-axis or the global X-axis,
Handrail Section Cardinal Point
Handrail Section Angle
Enter the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the handrail cross-section rotates about the
member axis. The zero-degree position is either the global Z-axis or the global X-axis,
Step Section Cardinal Point
Step Section Angle
Enter the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the step tread's cross-section rotates about
With Top Landing
Indicates whether the stair includes a top landing.

Place Stairs
Top Landing Length

Enter the length dimension of the top landing for the stairs. Smart 3D only uses this
dimension if With Top Landing is set to True.
Platform Thickness
Enter the thickness dimension for the stair platform.
Post Height
Enter the height dimension for the hand rail post.
Handrail Post Pitch

Enter the distance between the handrail posts.
Number of Midrails
Enter the number of midrails for the stair handrailing.
Is Assembly
This value is not currently used by the software. Set to
False.
Envelope Height
Enter the height dimension for the stair operation envelope.
This dimension is used by interference checking to check for
head clearance above the stair.
Is System
This value is not currently used by the software. Set to
False.
Span
Displays the length of the stair stringers. This distance is
calculated by the software and cannot be edited.
Height
Displays the vertical distance between the select top edge and the bottom plane.

Place Stairs
Length
Displays the length of the stair. This distance is calculated by the software and cannot be
edited.
Width
Enter the width of the stair treads. This dimension does not include the width of the stringers
and therefore is less than the overall width of the stairs.
Angle
Enter the angle of inclination between the selected bottom plane and the stair stringers.
Step Pitch
Enter the maximum allowable vertical distance between the stair treads. The actual distance
is calculated by the software using the vertical distance between the top edge and the
bottom plane and the stair angle. The actual distance is displayed in Actual Step Pitch.
Side
Places the stair on the opposite side of the top edge.
Weight and CG

Place Stairs
Dry Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Dry WCG Origin

Fabrication Type
Construction Type


Place Stairs
Coating Color
Responsibility
See Also
Stair Properties Dialog Box (on page 389)

Place Stairs
Definition Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the stair properties as they are defined in the reference data. The
on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one stair, and then selected the properties
command, only the common properties between the selected stairs display.
See Also
Stair Properties Dialog Box (on page 389)

SECTION 26
Place Ladders
Places a ladder in the model.
You attach the top of the ladder to an edge of any object. You attach the
bottom of the ladder to a plane. The bottom plane must be lower than the
top edge. You must also define the position of the ladder along the top
edge. There are two methods for defining this position: 1) Select a
reference edge or plane that intersects with the top edge and set the
horizontal offset distance along the top edge from the intersection point.
You can position the ladder on either side of the reference. 2) Define a
position for the ladder graphically.
After you define the position of the ladder, the ladder appears in the
model. The software automatically calculates the number of rungs.
Because the ladder, the top edge, and the bottom plane are
connected, the interference checker service will not find any hard
interference between any part of the ladder (safety cage, rung, and so
forth) and the top edge object or the bottom plane.
Place Ladder Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the ladder that you are placing or editing.
Ladder Properties
Activates the Ladder Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional ladder properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on
the ribbon. For more information, see Ladder Properties Dialog Box (on page 404).
Select Top Edge
Select the reference plane or edge that defines the top elevation of the ladder. If this edge is
deleted after the ladder has been placed, the software will put the ladder on the To Do List.
Select Bottom Plane
Select the reference plane that defines the bottom elevation of the ladder. This plane must
be lower than the top edge that you selected. The reference plane can be flat or sloped up
to 45 degrees. If this plane is deleted after the ladder has been placed, the software will put
the ladder on the To Do List.
Select Reference Edge
Select a plane or edge from which to place the ladder along the top edge. This input is
optional.

Place Ladders
Select Position
Graphically define the location of the ladder along the selected top edge.
Finish
Places the ladder in the model.
System
Select the system to which the ladder belongs. You can create new systems in the Systems
Type
Select the type of ladder to place.
Name
Specify the name for the ladder that you are placing.
Width
Enter the width of the ladder rungs. This dimension does not include the width of the side
frames or safety hoop and therefore is less than the overall width of the ladder.
Angle
Enter the angle of inclination between the bottom support and the side frame. This angle is
the slope of the ladder. The default angle is 90 degrees.
Pitch
Enter the maximum allowable vertical distance between the ladder rungs.

Place Ladders
Horizontal Offset
Specify the distance from the selected reference edge along the specified top edge.
Vertical Offset
Specify the offset between the top of the ladder and the selected top edge. This distance is
in addition to the define Top Extension distance.
Side
Places the ladder on the opposite side of the top edge.
Select Ladder Dialog Box

Allows selection of the type of ladders to be placed. This dialog box appears when you select
More in the Type list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any ladder in the Catalog
database. After you select a ladder, the software returns you to the model where you can
finalize placement.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected ladder type or node. Use this command to navigate
Forward
Sends you to the last selected ladder type or node that you moved away from by using the
you need.
Up One Level
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected ladder. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the ladder is placed, all properties on the dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected ladder. The image file must be assigned to the ladder in
the reference data.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display ladders in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display ladders in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place a ladder (on page 401)

Place Ladders
 Edit ladder placement (on page 403)

 Edit ladder properties (on page 403)
 Delete a ladder (on page 403)
Place a ladder
1. Click Place Ladder on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the ladder to place from the Select Ladder dialog. This selection becomes the
default selection the next time that you place a ladder. You can change the default using the
Type option.
3. Select the top edge for the ladder. This edge defines the top elevation of the ladder.
4. Select the bottom plane for the ladder. This plane defines the bottom elevation of the ladder.

Place Ladders
5. Select the optional reference edge for the ladder.
6. Define the location of the ladder along the top edge.
7. Using the Horizontal Offset, Width, Angle, Pitch, Side, and Vertical Offset options, refine
the ladder placement.
8. Click Finish.

Place Ladders
Edit ladder placement

2. Select Ladders in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the ladder to edit.
4. Using the ribbon bar options, edit the ladder position as needed.
Edit ladder properties

3. Select the ladder to edit.
5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about the properties, see Ladder
Delete a ladder
3. Select the ladder to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Place Ladders
Ladder Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the ladder that you are editing.
See Also
Definition Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog Box) (on page 417)
Occurrence Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog Box) (on page 404)
Place Ladders (on page 398)
Occurrence Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays the ladder properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one ladder, and then selected the properties command, only the common properties
between the selected ladders display.
When viewing properties for a single ladder, the following properties display. More properties
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the ladder. Ladder properties are divided into
Surface Treatment and Coating, and Responsibility. You select the category to define
respective values by using the Category option.
Standard
Standard properties that are displayed depend on the reference data of the ladder. Because
ladder reference data is fully customizable, only the common properties are documented.
Name
Displays the name of the ladder. The ladder name is based on the Name Rule selection. If
you want to type a new name for the ladder, in the Name Rule box, select User Defined,
and then type a name for the ladder in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this ladder.
 Default Name Rule - Names the ladder using the format "<ladder type>-<location>-
<index>" where <ladder type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
<location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index> is a unique index number
that starts at 0001. For example, LadderA1-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the ladder using the format "<system>-<ladder type>-
ladder belong, <ladder type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
that starts at 0001. For example, Structure System-LadderA1-1-0043.

Place Ladders
 User Defined - Select to specify the ladder name yourself in the Name box.
System
Select the system to which the ladder that you are placing belongs.
Horizontal Offset
Specify the distance from the selected reference edge along the specified top edge.
Vertical Offset
Specify the offset between the top of the ladder and the selected top edge. This distance is
in addition to the define Top Extension distance.
Material
Grade
Specifies the object material grade. To change the options on the list, edit the Structure >
Materials > Properties node in Catalog.
Reporting Type
With Wall Supports
Indicates whether the ladder includes wall supports.
Justification
Specifies how the object aligns with the connecting structural objects.
Center

Place Ladders
Left
Right

Place Ladders
First Step Pitch

Displays the distance between the bottom reference plane and the first
rung on the ladder. This distance is calculated by the software and cannot
be edited.
Number of Steps
Displays the number of rungs on the ladder. This number is calculated by
the software and cannot be edited.
Top Extension
Enter the distance the ladder extends above the selected top edge.

Place Ladders
Bottom Extension
Enter the distance between the selected bottom plane and the start, or
bottom, of the ladder. This distance must be a positive number. You cannot
extend a ladder below the bottom plane using this property.
Support Leg Pitch
Enter the vertical distance, along the ladder, between the wall supports.
Support Leg Thickness

Enter the thickness of the wall support legs. This distance is left-right
distance of the support leg if you were standing facing the ladder.
Support Leg Width

Enter the width of the wall support legs.

Place Ladders
Side Frame Thickness

Enter the thickness dimension for the side frame.
Side Frame Width

Enter the width dimension for the side frame.
Step Diameter
Enter the diameter dimension for the step or rung.
Step Protrusion
Enter the dimension for the rung protrusion. This dimension is the distance the ladder rungs
extend past the outside side frames.
VlDim1
This value is not currently used by the SPSLadderMacros.LadderTypeA symbol.
VlDim2
VlDim3

Place Ladders
Wall Offset
Enter the dimension by which the ladder is offset from the supporting wall.
With Safety Hoop
Indicates whether the ladder includes a safety hoop.
Bottom Hoop Level
Enter the dimension for the distance between the bottom of the hoop and the
bottom of the ladder.
Hoop Plate Thickness

Enter the thickness dimension for the hoop plate.
Hoop Plate Width

Enter the dimension for the hoop plate width.
Hoop Pitch
Enter the distance between the hoops.
Max Hoop Pitch

Enter the maximum distance between the hoops.
Hoop Clearance

Place Ladders
Enter the dimension for the hoop clearance.
Hoop Radius
Enter the radius dimension for the safety hoop.
Flare Clearance
Enter the clearance dimension for the hoop flare.
Flare Radius
Enter the radius dimension for the hoop flare.

Place Ladders
Hoop Flare Bend Radius

Enter the radius dimension for the hoop flare bend.
Hoop Flare Height

Enter the height dimension for the hoop flare.
Vertical Strap Count

Enter the number of vertical straps.
Vertical Strap Width
Enter the width dimension for the vertical strap.

Place Ladders
Vertical Strap Thickness

Enter the thickness dimension for the vertical strap.
Hoop Opening
Enter the number associated with the hoop opening type.
Is Assembly
This value is not currently used by the software. Set to 0.
Is System
This value is not currently used by the software. Set to 0.
Envelope Height
Enter the operation envelope height for the ladder. This dimension is used by interference
checking.

Place Ladders
Span
Enter the distance from the top support to the bottom support. This is the default distance.
When placing the ladder, the ISPSStairSymbolServices component calculates the actual
distance.
Height
Displays the distance between the top edge and the bottom reference plane. This value is
calculated by the software.
Length
Displays the length of the ladder. This value is calculated by the software.
Width
Enter the width of the ladder rungs. This dimension does not include the width of the side
frames or safety hoop and therefore is less than the overall width of the ladder.

Place Ladders
Angle
Enter the angle of inclination between the bottom support and the side frame. This angle is
the slope of the ladder.
Step Pitch
Enter the maximum allowable vertical distance between the ladder rungs.
Side
Places the ladder on the opposite side of the top edge.
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Dry WCG Origin

Place Ladders

Fabrication Type
Construction Type

Coating Color
Responsibility

Place Ladders

See Also
Ladder Properties Dialog Box (on page 404)
Definition Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the ladder properties as they are defined in the reference data. The
on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one ladder, and then selected the
properties command, only the common properties between the selected ladders display.
See Also
Ladder Properties Dialog Box (on page 404)

SECTION 27
Place Handrails
Places a handrail along a
path that you specify in the
model. The handrail path can
be straight, curved, or a
combination of both and can
be on the same plane or
transverse multiple elevations.
Because handrails
are placed along a defined
path, moving other objects in
the model might not affect the
position of the handrail. Handrails will move when other objects in the model move if you have
defined the handrail path using the Point on Surface or Point on Curve constraints. Use the
Tools > Options > SmartSketch command to make these two constraints available for handrail
path placement.
Place Handrail Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the handrail that you are placing or editing.
Handrail Properties
Activates the Handrail Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional handrail properties, such as rail section and toe plate section, which you cannot
set on the ribbon. For more information, see Handrail Properties Dialog Box (on page 422).
Create Handrail Path
Activates the Create Path Ribbon with which you define the handrail path.
Toggle Side
Select to place the handrail on the other side of the path.
Convert
Decomposes the handrail symbol to individual structural members for each post and rail.
You should convert a handrail when you want to add, edit, or delete the positions of
individual posts, rails, or perform some other handrail customization that cannot be done
using the handrail symbol properties. The Handrail object will become the system parent of
the individual members. Deleting the Handrail object will delete the children members.
Handrails that you have converted to member parts cannot be converted back to a handrail
symbol. You can place handrails as individual members during initial placement by clicking
Convert instead of Finish, or you can select an existing handrail and convert it to member
parts.

Place Handrails
Finish
Places the handrail in the model.
System
Select the system to which the handrail belongs. You can create new systems in the
Type
Select the type of handrail to place from the catalog.
Name
Specify the name for the handrail that you are placing. This box is read-only unless you are
using the User Defined naming rule.
Beginning Treatment
Specify the end treatment for the beginning of the handrail.
End Treatment
Specify the end treatment for the end of the handrail.
Select Handrail Dialog Box

Allows selection of the type of handrails to be placed. This dialog box appears when you select
More in the Type list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any handrail in the
Catalog database. After you select a handrail, the software returns you to the model, where you
can finalize placement.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected handrail type or node. Use this command to navigate
Forward
Sends you to the last selected handrail type or node that you moved away from by using the
you need.
Up One Level
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected handrail. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the handrail is placed, all properties on the dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected handrail. The image file must be assigned to the handrail
List View
Sets the dialog box to display handrails in a list view.

Place Handrails
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display handrails in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place a handrail (on page 420)
 Place a handrail as individual members (on page 420)
 Split a handrail (on page 421)
 Edit handrail placement (on page 421)
 Edit handrail properties (on page 421)
 Convert handrail to individual members (on page 421)
 Delete a handrail (on page 422)
Place a handrail
1. Click Place Handrail on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the handrail to place from the Select Handrail dialog. This selection becomes the
default selection the next time you place a handrail. You can change the default using the
Type option.
3. Define the handrail path.
4. Select a system for the handrail.
5. Click Finish.
Place a handrail as individual members

1. Click Place Handrail on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the handrail to place from the Select Handrail dialog. This selection becomes the
default selection the next time you place a handrail. You can change the default using the
Type option.
3. Define the handrail path.
4. Select a system for the handrail.
5. Click Convert.

Place Handrails
Split a handrail
1. Select the handrail to split.
2. Click Define Handrail Path .
3. Click Edit on the ribbon.
4. Select the handrail path segment to split.
5. Click Insert Vertex on the ribbon.
6. Click along the handrail path at the split location to insert the new vertex.
7. Click Create on the ribbon, and then click Edit again.
8. Select the vertex (the small yellow box) that you just inserted at the split location.
9. On the ribbon for Turn Type, select Split.
10. Click Finish.
11. Click Finish.
Edit handrail placement

2. Select Handrails in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the handrail to edit.
4. Using the ribbon option, edit the handrail placement as needed.
Edit handrail properties

5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about these properties, see Handrail
Convert handrail to individual members

3. Select the handrail to convert.
4. Click Convert on the handrail ribbon.

Place Handrails
You should convert a handrail when you want to edit the positions of individual posts,
rails, or perform some other handrail customization that cannot be done using the handrail
symbol properties. Handrails that you have converted to member parts cannot be converted
back to a handrail symbol. To delete a converted handrail, you will need to delete each handrail
part individually.
Delete a handrail
3. Select the handrail to delete.
4. Press Delete.
Handrail Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the handrail that you are editing.
See Also
Definition Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Box) (on page 457)
Occurrence Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Box) (on page 422)
Occurrence Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays in a grid the handrail properties that you can edit or that are
automatically determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on the left
side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you
selected more than one handrail, and then selected the properties command, only the common
properties between the selected handrails display.
When viewing properties for a single handrail, the following properties display. More properties
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the handrail. Handrail properties are divided
into several different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, Fabrication and
Construction, Surface Treatment and Coating, and Responsibility. You select the
category to define respective values by using the Category option.
Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the handrail. Because
handrail reference data is fully customizable, only the common properties are documented.
Name
Displays the name of the handrail based on the Name Rule selection. If you want to type a

Place Handrails
new name for the handrail, select User Defined, and then type a name for the handrail in
the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this handrail.
 Default Name Rule - Names the handrail using the format "<handrail type>-<location>-
<index>" where <handrail type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
that starts at 0001. For example, TMTHandrail-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the handrail using the format "<system>-<handrail type>-
handrail belongs, <handrail type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
that starts at 0001. For example, Structure System-TMTHandrailA1-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the handrail name yourself in the Name box.
System
Select the system to which the handrail that you are placing belongs. You can create new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task.
Top Rail Section Name
Enter the cross-section name for the top rail.
Top Rail Section Reference Standard
Enter the section library name that contains the top rail section.
Mid Rail Section Name
Enter the cross-section name for the mid rail.
Mid Rail Section Reference Standard
Enter the section library name that contains the mid rail section.
Toe Plate Section Name
Enter the cross-section name for the toe plate.
Toe Plate Section Reference Standard
Enter the section library name that contains the toe plate section.
Post Section Name
Enter the cross-section name for the post.
Post Section Reference Standard
Enter the section library name that contains the post's section.
Primary Material
Specify the material for the handrail sections.
Primary Grade
Specify the material grade for the handrail sections.

Place Handrails
Specify whether this handrail is reported.
Reporting Type
Select the reporting requirements code for the handrail. Valid codes are defined in the
Type A Handrail (TMTHandrail and TMHandrail)

Height
Enter the height of the handrail from the path to the top of the top rail.
With Toe Plate

Select True to attach a toe plate to the handrail. Select False to place a handrail without a
toe plate.
Number of Midrails
Enter the number of mid rails for the handrail. The first mid rail is placed using the defined
To Top of Mid Rail Distance. The subsequent mid rails are placed above that using the
Mid Rail Spacing distance.
Horizontal Offset Distance
Enter the horizontal offset from the defined handrail path to the handrail. You control the
direction of the offset using the Horizontal Offset property.

Place Handrails
Handrail Orientation
Defines the orientation of the post when the handrail is on a slope. Select Always Vertical
to keep the posts vertical even when the handrail is on a slope. Select Perpendicular to
Slope to keep the posts perpendicular to the slope.
Segment Maximum Spacing
Enter the maximum distance allowed between the posts.
Sloped Segment Maximum Spacing

Enter the maximum distance allowed between posts for that part of a handrail that is on a
slope.
Distance to Top of Toe Plate

Place Handrails
Specify the height of the toe plate measured from the path.
To Top of Midrail Distance

Specify the distance between the path and the top
of the mid rail. If you are placing more than one mid
rail, this distance is to the top of the bottommost mid
rail.

Place Handrails
Midrail Spacing
Specify the distance between the mid rails if you are placing more than one mid rail. This
value is ignored if you have only one mid rail.
With Post At Turn

Specifies if you want a post in the handrail corner. Select True to place a post in the corner.
Select False to not require a post in the corner.
Begin Extension Length
Enter the distance between the beginning of the handrail and the first handrail post. This
distance must be greater than zero.

Place Handrails
End Extension Length

Enter the distance between the end of the handrail and the last handrail post. This distance
must be greater than zero.
Is Assembly
Not used by the software. Set to False.
Is System
Top Rail Section Cardinal Point
Top Rail Section Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the top rail cross-section is rotated about
the member axis. The zero-degree position is either the global Z-axis or the global X-axis
Midrail Section Cardinal Point
Midrail Section Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the mid rail cross-section is rotated about

Place Handrails
Toe Plate Section Cardinal Point

Toe Plate Section Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the toe plate cross-section is rotated
about the member axis. The zero-degree position is either the global Z-axis or the global X-
axis depending on the member orientation.
Post Section Cardinal Point
Post Section Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the post cross-section is rotated about
the member axis. The zero degree position is either the global Z-axis or the global X-axis,
Horizontal Offset
Select the direction the Horizontal Offset Distance property value is applied.
Begin Treatment
Specify a circular (1), rectangular (2), or none (3) end treatment for the beginning of the
handrail.

Place Handrails
End Treatment
Specify a circular (1), rectangular (2), or none (3) end treatment for the end of the handrail.
Post Connection Type

Select how you want the handrail posts connected to the supporting structure.
Total Length
Displays the length of the handrail path.
Type A Handrail (SideMountedtoMemberMTHandrail)

Connection Type for Side Mount
Specifies the type of side mount for the handrail. You can select a side mount with a pad, or
a side mount with a bracket.
Vertical offset value for Side Mount
Specify the vertical offset between the bottom of the posts and the bottom of the toe plate.
Height

Place Handrails
With Toe Plate

toe plate.
Number of Midrails

slope.

Place Handrails


Specify the distance between the path and the top of the mid rail. If you are placing more
than one mid rail, this distance is to the top of the bottommost mid rail.
Midrail Spacing

Place Handrails
With Post At Turn

Is Assembly
Is System

Place Handrails
Post Section Angle
Horizontal Offset
Floor Thickness
Enter the thickness of the floor. The thickness is used to calculate the correct height for the
toe plate.
Column Clearance
Enter the distance between the column, if one exists, and the handrail. If a column does not
exist, this value is ignored and the End Clearance value is used instead.
End Clearance
Enter the distance between the member end and the handrail end. This value is only used

Place Handrails
when a column does not exist at that member end.
Mirror
Flips the handrail to the other side of the path or member.
Start Column Offset
Enter the offset distance between the column at the start end of the handrail and the
handrail. This offset is in addition to the Column Clearance offset. Use this option when you
want an offset only at the start of the handrail. This option has no effect if there is no column
at the start end of the member on which the handrail is placed.
End Column Offset
Enter the offset distance between the column at the end of the handrail and the handrail.
This offset is in addition to the Column Clearance offset. Use this option when you want an
offset only at the end of the handrail. This option has no effect if there is no column at the
end of the member on which the handrail is placed.
Offset Reference
Select from where on the member you want to measure the handrail horizontal offset. You
can select to use the inner port-face, the centerline (axis), or the outer port-face of a
bounding member.
Begin Treatment
handrail.

Place Handrails
End Treatment


Minimum offset Clearance at Post Turn

Enter the minimum distance from a handrail turn that the software can place a post.
Maximum offset Clearance at Post Turn
Enter the maximum distance from a handrail turn that the software can place a post.

Place Handrails
Length
Displays the total length of the handrail.
Type A Handrail (SideMounted)

Connection Type for Side Mount
Specifies the type of side mount for the handrail. You can select a side mount with a pad, or
a side mount with a bracket.
Vertical offset value for Side Mount
Specify the vertical offset between the bottom of the posts and the bottom of the toe plate.
Height
With Toe Plate

toe plate.
Number of Midrails

Place Handrails

slope.

Place Handrails

Midrail Spacing
With Post At Turn

Is Assembly
Is System

Place Handrails


Place Handrails

Post Section Angle
Horizontal Offset
Begin Treatment
handrail.
End Treatment

Place Handrails



Length
Displays the total length of the handrail.
Type A Handrail (TopEmbedded)

Vertical offset value for Embedding
Enter the distance to embed the handrail posts.

Place Handrails
Height
With Toe Plate

toe plate.
Number of Midrails

Place Handrails


slope.

Place Handrails

Midrail Spacing
With Post At Turn

Is Assembly
Is System

Place Handrails


Place Handrails

Post Section Angle
Horizontal Offset
Begin Treatment
handrail.
End Treatment


Place Handrails


Length

Place Handrails
Type A Handrail (TopMountedonPad)

Height
With Toe Plate

toe plate.
Number of Midrails

Place Handrails


slope.

Place Handrails

Midrail Spacing
With Post At Turn

Is Assembly
Is System

Place Handrails

section define cardinal points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10 through 15 are unavailable for
designed members or cans.

Place Handrails

Post Section Angle
Horizontal Offset
Vertical Offset value for Pad
Enter the height of the mounting pad.
Pad Plate Length
Enter the length of the pad plate.
Pad Plate Width
Enter the width of the pad plate.
Begin Treatment
handrail.
End Treatment

Place Handrails



Length

Place Handrails
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Dry WCG Origin

Fabrication Type
Construction Type


Place Handrails
Coating Color
Responsibility
See Also
Handrail Properties Dialog Box (on page 422)

Place Handrails
Definition Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the handrail properties as they are defined in the reference data.
appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one handrail and then selected
the properties command, only the common properties between the selected handrails display.
See Also
Handrail Properties Dialog Box (on page 422)

SECTION 28
Place Handrails by Member

Places a handrail that is associated with a member part's
frame connections. Because the handrail is associated with the
member part's frame connections, the handrail length
automatically resizes if the member part length changes. You
can also define clearances between the handrail-end and the
member-end or a column located at the member end.
You can use this command to place a handrail on a single member or multiple members at a
time. If you select multiple members, each handrail placed is independent of the others after
placement.
If you split a member after placing a handrail on it, the handrail will still be associated to the
original placement frame connections, one on either side of the split. If the two new member
parts (created by the split) need their own handrails, you will need to delete the original handrail
and then place the two new handrails, one on each new member part.
Place Handrail by Member Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the handrail that you are placing or editing.
Handrail Properties
Activates the Handrail Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional handrail properties, such as rail section and toe plate section, which you cannot
set on the ribbon. For more information, see Handrail Properties Dialog Box (on page 422).
Select Members
Select the members on which to place a handrail.
Walking Surface
Select the surface on which people will be walking. The software using this point to know on
which side of the member to place the handrail and to calculate the toe-plate and railing
height.
Convert
Decomposes the handrail symbol to individual structural members for each post and rail.
You should convert a handrail when you want to add, edit, or delete the positions of
individual posts, rails, or perform some other handrail customization that cannot be done
using the handrail symbol properties. The Handrail object will become the system parent of
the individual members. Deleting the Handrail object will delete the children members.
Handrails that you have converted to member parts cannot be converted back to a handrail
symbol. You can place handrails as individual members during initial placement by clicking
Convert instead of Finish, or you can select an existing handrail and convert it to member
parts.
Finish
Places the handrail in the model.

Cancel
Clears your selections from the selection set.
Accept
Confirms your selections as the ones to process.
System
Select the system to which the handrail belongs. You can create new systems in the
Type
Select the type of handrail to place from the catalog.
Name
Specify the name for the handrail that you are placing. This box is read-only unless you are
using the User Defined naming rule.
Beginning Treatment
handrail.
End Treatment
Offset Reference
Select how the horizontal offset of the handrail is measured from the member. You can edit
the horizontal offset value by editing the Horizontal Path Offset Distance value in the
handrail Standard category properties.

Column Clearance
Enter the distance between the column, if one exists, and the handrail. If a column does not
exist, this value is ignored and the End Clearance value is used instead.
End Clearance
Enter the distance between the member end and the handrail end. This value is only used
when a column does not exist at that member end.

 Place a handrail by member (on page 461)
 Split a handrail (on page 421)
 Edit handrail placement (on page 421)
 Edit handrail properties (on page 421)
 Convert handrail to individual members (on page 421)
 Delete a handrail (on page 422)

Place a handrail by member

1. Click Place Handrail by Member on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the SideMountedtoMember handrail using the Type option.
You can place other handrail types, but only SideMountedtoMember provides the
column and end clearance options.
3. Select the members for the handrail.
4. Click Accept
5. In the graphic view, click on the walking surface side of the member.
6. Enter a distance for the column clearance or the end clearance as needed.
7. Click Finish.

Edit handrail placement

4. Using the ribbon option, edit the handrail placement as needed.
Edit handrail properties

5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about these properties, see Handrail
Delete a handrail
3. Select the handrail to delete.
4. Press Delete.

SECTION 29
Place Footings
Places column footings in the model. You can place footings before or after
columns are placed in the model. The software creates a relationship between
the footing and the member end to which the footing connects.
There are two types of footings that you can place: single and combined. Single
footings create a one-to-one relationship between the column and the footing.
Combined footings create a many-to-one relationship between a multiple
columns and a single footing.
The bottom elevation of the footing can optionally be associated with a
reference plane. If the reference plane moves, the footing height adjusts
automatically to the new elevation of the plane. Not all footing types support
associated planes. Footing types that do not support associated planes have a Number of
Supporting value of zero in the catalog.
A footing is used to transfer the loads of a column to the ground or sub-structure and to provide
mounting stability for the supported column. A typical footing is comprised of:
 A base that supports one or more piers. Some footings for light-weight structures, such as a
light pole, do not have a base.
 A pier that rests on the base and supports the grout layer. Some footings do not have a pier
in which case the grout is put directly on the base.
 A grout layer that rests on the pier and supports the base plate.
 A base plate that rests on the grout layer and is welded to the supported column.
You can place base plates using the Place Assembly Connection (on page 174).
Helpful things to know about footings:

 Combined footings require a minimum of two columns for placement. If you remove columns
from a combined footing such that a single column remains, the software sends the
combined footing to the To Do List.
 When placing a combined footing with a merged pier, all columns must have the same
bottom elevation. The software will not allow a column with a different bottom elevation to be
added to the merged pier.
 The software places key points and control points that can be selected as layout points in
drawings on combined footings. Key points are placed at the vertices of slabs and piers.
Control points are placed at column locations.
Place Footing Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the footing that you are placing or editing.
Properties
Activates the Footing Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify
additional properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on the

Place Footings
ribbon. For more information, see Footing Properties Dialog Box (on page 473).
Select Member
If Placement is set to By Member, select the column, or columns, in the model for which to
place footings. When you are done selecting columns, click Accept . If you accidentally
select a column that you did not want, click Cancel , and then re-select the columns.
If Placement is set to By Point, identify the point, or points, in the model at which you want
a footing. The point identifies the bottom elevation location of a future column.
Select Bottom Plane
Select the bottom plane, or supporting surface, for the footing. The software disables this
option if the footing type that you have selected does not require that a supporting surface
be defined.
Finish
Places the footing in the model.
Cancel
Rejects the objects that you have selected.
Accept
Confirms the objects that you have selected.
Placement
Select By Member to place footings at the bottom of members that you specify. Select By
Point to place footings at a point you specify in the model. Use the By Point option when
you want to place footings before the columns in the model.
System
Select the system in which to place the footing. You can create new systems in the Systems
Type
Select the type of footing to place. Select More to select from all available footings in the
catalog. If you start to select columns and then change the footing type, the software clears
the selected columns because most footing types require different column orientations and
the columns that you selected may not work with the new footing type.
Name
Type a name for the footing.
Plane Method
Specifies how the bottom elevation of the footing is defined. This option is available only
when you select a footing type from the catalog that has a Number of Supporting value
other than zero.
 Select Associative to associate the bottom of the footing to a plane that you select. If
that plane moves, the bottom of the footing adjusts accordingly.
 Select Elevation Value to enter the bottom elevation in the Elevation Value box.

Place Footings
Elevation Value
Defines the bottom elevation of the footing relative to the global origin. You can also select a
plane in the model to define this elevation; however, no association is made to this plane.
This option is available only when Plane Method is set to Elevation Value.
Select Footing Dialog Box

Allows selection of the type of footing to be placed. This dialog box appears when you select
More in the Type list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any footing in the Catalog
database. After you select a footing, the software returns you to the model, where you can
finalize placement.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected footing type or node. Use this command to navigate
Forward
Sends you to the last selected footing type or node that you moved away from by using the
you need.
Up One Level
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected footing. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the footing is placed, all properties on the dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected footing. The image file must be assigned to the footing in
the reference data.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display footings in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display footings in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place a single footing (on page 466)
 Place a single footing by point (on page 467)
 Place a single footing without an associated plane (on page 468)
 Place a combined footing (on page 469)
 Place a combined footing by point (on page 470)

Place Footings
 Add column to a combined footing (on page 470)

 Remove column from a combined footing (on page 471)
 Edit footing properties (on page 472)
 Delete a footing (on page 472)
Place a single footing

1. Click Place Footing on the vertical toolbar.
2. Set Placement to By Member.
3. Select the system for the footing.
4. Using the Type option, select the footing type to place.
5. Select the column where the footing is to be placed.
6. Click Accept .
7. Select the supporting plane if the footing type that you are placing requires it, and then click
Accept .
8. Click Finish.

Place Footings
Place a single footing by point

2. Set Placement to By Point.
5. Identify a point in the model where you want the footing. The point identifies the bottom
elevation of a future column.
6. Click Accept .
Accept .
8. Click Finish.

Place Footings
Place a single footing without an associated plane

4. Using the Type option, select the footing type to place. You must select a footing that has a
Number of Supporting value other than zero.
5. Select the column for the footing.
6. Click Accept .
7. Set Plane Method to Elevation Value.
8. Select a plane in the model to define the bottom elevation of the footing.
-OR-
Type an elevation relative to the global origin in the Elevation Value box.
9. Click Accept .
10. Click Finish.

Place Footings
Place a combined footing

4. Using the Type option, select the combined footing type to place.
5. Select the columns where the footing is to be placed. You must select at least two columns.
6. Click Accept when you are done selecting the columns.

Accept .
8. Click Finish.

Place Footings
Place a combined footing by point

2. Set Placement to By Point.
5. Identify points in the model where you want the footing. You must identify at least two
points.
6. Click Accept when you are done.

Accept .
8. Click Finish.
Add column to a combined footing

2. Select Footings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the footing to which you want to add the column.

Place Footings
4. Click Select Member on the ribbon bar.

5. Select the column, or columns, to add to the footing.
6. Click Accept when you are done selecting columns.
7. Click Finish.
Remove column from a combined footing

3. Select the footing from which you want to remove the column.
4. Click Select Member on the ribbon bar.

5. Select the column, or columns, to remove from the footing.

Place Footings
6. Click Accept when you are done selecting columns.
7. Click Finish.
Combined footings must support a minimum of two columns. Combined footings with
only a single column are sent to the To Do List.
Edit footing properties

3. Select the footing to edit.
5. Edit the properties as needed.
Delete a footing
3. Select the footing to delete.
4. Click Delete.
The software automatically deletes a single footing when you delete the associated
column.

Place Footings
Footing Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the footing that you are editing.
See Also
Definition Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Box) (on page 478)
Occurrence Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Box) (on page 473)
Place Footings (on page 463)
Occurrence Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Box)

The Occurrence tab displays the footing properties that you can edit or that are automatically
than one footing, and then selected the properties command, only the common properties
between the selected footings display.
When viewing properties for a single footing, the following properties display. More properties
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the footing. Footing properties are divided into
several different categories: Standard and Weight and CG. You select the category to define
Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the footing. Because
footing reference data is fully customizable, only the common properties are documented.
Name
Displays the name of the footing. The footing name is based on the Name Rule selection. If
you want to type a new name for the footing, in the Name Rule box, select User Defined,
and then type a name for the footing in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this footing.
 Default Name Rule - Names the footing using the format "<footing type>-<location>-
<index>" where <footing type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
that starts at 0001. For example, RectSlabFootingAsm-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the footing using the format "<system>-<footing type>-
footing belongs, <footing type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon,
that starts at 0001. For example, Structure System-RectSlabFootingAsm-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the footing name yourself in the Name box.

Place Footings
System
Displays the name of the parent system. You can create new systems in the Systems and
Grout Component
The symbol used to represent the grout component.
Pier Component
The symbol used to represent the pier component.
Slab Component
The symbol used to represent the slab component.
Pier Material
Select the pier material. Available materials are defined in the Catalog task.
Pier Grade
Select the pier material grade. Available material grades are defined in the Catalog task.
Slab Material
Select the slab material.
Slab Grade
Select the slab material grade.
Grout Material
Select the grout material.
Grout Grade
Select the grout material grade.
Detail Reference
Enter the detail drawing number to reference.
With Grout Pad
Specifies whether or not a grout pad is included between the pier and the member being
supported.
Specifies whether or not this footing is reported.
Reporting Type
Select whether the footing is to be tracked by the material control system or not.
Pier Length
Displays or specifies the pier length. If this box is read-only and you want to specify the
length yourself, then you need to set Pier Sizing Rule to User Defined.
Pier Width
Displays or specifies the pier width. If this box is read-only and you want to specify the width
yourself, then you need to set Pier Sizing Rule to User Defined.

Place Footings
Pier Height
Specifies the distance between the top of the supporting slab and the bottom of the grout (if
there is a grout pad) or the bottom of the supported member (if there is no grout pad.)
Pier Shape
Displays the pier shape.
Pier Sizing Rule
Select how you want the size of the pier to be calculated.
 Select Clearance to have the software size the pier length and width based on either
the supported member's cross-section size or the grout size if grout is present plus a
clearance value that you specify. The maximum range of the cross-section or grout is
automatically calculated and the pier length and pier width values are set using the
cross-section range plus the value you specify in Pier Edge Clearance.
 Select User Defined to specify the pier length and width values yourself.
Pier Orientation
Select whether the pier should be oriented relative to the local coordinate system or the
global coordinate system.
Pier Rotation Angle
Specify the rotation angle relative to the north (or y-axis) of the coordinate system selected
in Pier Orientation.
Pier Edge Clearance
Specify the distance between the side of the pier and the maximum range of either the
supported member's cross-section size or the grout size for that side. This value is used
when Pier Sizing Rule is set to Clearance.
Pier Size Increment
Specify the step size to increase the pier length and width dimensions when the software
calculates them. For example, if the supported member's cross-section range is 18.25 cm
by 23.5 cm and you specify a 1 cm size increment, then the software would round up the
pier dimensions to 19 cm by 24 cm. If you were to specify a 0.5 cm size increment, then the
pier dimensions would be 18.5 cm by 23.5 cm.
Pier Chamfered
Specifies if the corners of square piers are chamfered or not.
Pier Chamfer Size
Specifies the size of the chamfer if Pier Chamfered is set to yes.
Grout Length
Displays the grout length. If this box is read-only and you want to specify the length
yourself, then you need to set Grout Sizing Rule to User Defined.
Grout Width
Displays the grout width. If this box is read-only and you want to specify the width yourself,
then you need to set Grout Sizing Rule to User Defined.
Grout Height

Place Footings
Specifies the grout height, which is the distance between the top of the pier and the bottom
of the supported member.
Volume
Displays the calculated volume of the footing (including all of the components).
Slab Length
Displays or specifies the slab length. If this box is read-only and you want to specify the
length yourself, then you need to set Slab Sizing Rule to User Defined.
Slab Width
Displays or specifies the slab width. If this box is read-only and you want to specify the width
yourself, then you need to set Slab Sizing Rule to User Defined.
Slab Height
Specifies the distance between the bottom of the slab and the bottom of the pier.
Slab Shape
Displays the slab shape.
Slab Sizing Rule
Select how you want the size of the slab to be calculated.
 Select Clearance to have the software size the slab length and width based on the pier
size plus a clearance value that you specify. The maximum range of the pier is
automatically calculated and the slab length and slab width values are set using that
range plus the value you specify in Slab Edge Clearance.
 Select User Defined to specify the slab length and width values yourself.
Slab Orientation
Select whether the slab should be oriented relative to the local coordinate system or the
Slab Rotation Angle
in Slab Orientation.
Slab Edge Clearance
Specify the distance between the side of the slab and the maximum range of the pier for that
side. This value is used when Slab Sizing Rule is set to Clearance.
Slab Size Increment
Specify the step size to increase the slab length and width dimensions when the software
calculates them. For example, if the slab is 18.25 cm by 23.5 cm and you specify a 1 cm
size increment, then the software would round up the slab dimensions to 19 cm by 24 cm. If
you were to specify a 0.5 cm size increment, then the slab dimensions would be 18.5 cm by
23.5 cm.
Surface Area
Displays the total outside surface area of the slab, pier, and grout.
Grout Shape

Place Footings
Select the grout shape that you want to use.

Grout Sizing Rule
Select how you want the size of the grout to be calculated.
 Select Clearance to have the software size the grout length and width based on the
supported member's cross-section size plus a clearance value that you specify. The
maximum range of the cross-section is automatically calculated and the grout length
and grout width values are set using the cross-section range plus the value you specify
in Grout Edge Clearance.
 Select User Defined to specify the grout length and width values yourself.
Grout Orientation
Select whether the grout should be oriented relative to the local coordinate system or the
Grout Rotation Angle
in Grout Orientation.
Grout Edge Clearance
Specify the distance between the side of the grout and the maximum range of the supported
member's cross-section for that side. This value is used when Grout Sizing Rule is set to
Clearance.
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y
Dry CG Z
Dry WCG Origin

Place Footings

See Also
Footing Properties Dialog Box (on page 473)
Definition Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the footing properties as they are defined in the reference data. The
on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one footing and then selected the
properties command, only the common properties between the selected footings display.
See Also
Footing Properties Dialog Box (on page 473)

SECTION 30
Place Equipment Foundations

Places equipment foundations in the model. An equipment foundation
makes the installation of equipment easier. The foundation is typically
connected to the floor, deck, or wall, and the equipment is then bolted to the
foundation.
When you place foundations from the catalog, many properties of the
foundations are already defined in the reference data. However, the software
calculates some of the properties, including the length of its legs, when you
place the foundation in the model. For example, when you select a piece of
equipment, the software matches the bolt hole patterns of the foundation and
the foundation port and automatically orients and sizes the foundation and its legs accordingly.
You can place the foundation that is used to support the equipment either before or after you
have placed the equipment in the model.
When you place equipment in the model, you position it in space as required to serve the design
needs. Each piece of equipment is expected to have at least one foundation port with two or
more holes. The foundation port determines the placement of the foundation to appropriately
support the equipment. The foundation is then designed, using the bolt hole pattern from the
foundation port of the equipment, to support the equipment in the functionally required position.
Place Equipment Foundation Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the equipment foundation that you are placing or editing.
Properties
Activates the Equipment Foundation Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to
specify additional properties, such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on
the ribbon. For more information, see Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box (on
page 483).
Placement
Select By Equipment to place the equipment foundation by selecting an equipment or
equipment foundation port. Select By Point to place the equipment foundation at a selected
point in space.
Select Equipment
Select the equipment for which to place a foundation. You can select more than one piece of
equipment to place a single foundation under all the selected equipment.
Select Support Surface
Select the surface to support the foundation, and thus the equipment.
Finish
Places the foundation.

Cancel
Accept
Confirms that the selected object is the object that you want to use.
By Rule
Select to allow the software to select the equipment foundation to use based on the default
foundation defined for the equipment part. The default foundation for the equipment appears
in the Type box. The default foundation for the equipment part is defined in the equipment
reference data. The foundation name specified in the equipment reference data must
exactly match an equipment foundation part defined in the equipment foundation reference
data.
System
Select the system in which to place the foundation.
Type
Select the type of foundation to place. Select More... to select from all available equipment
foundations in the catalog.
Name
Type a name for the foundation.
Select Equipment Foundation Dialog Box

Allows selection of the type of equipment foundations to be placed. This dialog box appears
when you select More in the Type list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any
equipment foundation in the Catalog database. After you select an equipment foundation, the
software returns you to the model, where you can finalize placement.
Back
Returns you to the previously selected equipment foundation type or node. Use this
command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific type that you need.
Forward
Sends you to the last selected equipment foundation type or node that you moved away
from by using the Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the
specific type that you need.
Up One Level
Properties
Displays the properties of the selected equipment foundation. Because you cannot modify
any properties until the equipment foundation is placed, all properties on the dialog box are
read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected equipment foundation. The image file must be assigned to

the equipment foundation in the reference data.
List View
Sets the dialog box to display equipment foundations in a list view.
Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display equipment foundations in a spreadsheet-style grid view.
Address

 Place an equipment foundation (By Equipment) (on page 481)
 Place an equipment foundation (By Point) (on page 482)
 Edit an equipment foundation (on page 483)
 Edit equipment foundation properties (on page 483)
 Delete an equipment foundation (on page 483)
Place an equipment foundation (By Equipment)

1. Click Place Equipment Foundation on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select By Equipment as the placement type.
3. Select the equipment for which to place a foundation.
4. Click Accept .

5. Select the supporting plane for the equipment foundation.
6. Click Accept .
7. Verify that the Type and System options are set to your satisfaction. Clear the By Rule
option if you want to manually select the equipment foundation that you want.
8. Click Finish.
Place an equipment foundation (By Point)

1. Click Place Equipment Foundation on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select By Point as the placement type.
3. Select the type of foundation you want to place.
4. Select the system in which to place the foundation.
5. Click on a point in the model where you want to place the foundation.
6. Select the supporting plane for the equipment foundation.
7. Click Accept .
8. Verify that the Type and System options are set to your satisfaction.
9. Click Finish.

Edit an equipment foundation

1. Click Select .
2. Select Foundations in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the foundation to edit.
4. Using the ribbon, edit the selected foundation as needed.
Edit equipment foundation properties

2. Select Equipment Foundations in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the equipment foundation to edit.
5. Edit the properties as needed.
Delete an equipment foundation

1. Click Select .
2. Select Equipment Foundations in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the foundation to delete.
4. Click Delete .
Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the equipment foundation that you are editing.
See Also
Definition Tab (Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 487)
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 484)

Occurrence Tab (Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog

Box)
The Occurrence tab displays in a grid the equipment foundation properties that you can edit or
that are automatically determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on
the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the
grid. If you selected more than one equipment foundation, and then selected the properties
command, only the common properties between the selected equipment foundations display.
When viewing properties for a single equipment foundation, the following properties display.
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on properties. You can access this
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the equipment foundation. Equipment
foundation properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Weight and
CG, Fabrication and Construction, and Position and Orientation. You select the category to
define values for by using the Category option.
Standard
Name
Displays the name of the equipment foundation. The equipment foundation name is based
on the Name Rule selection. If you want to type a new name for the equipment foundation,
in the Name Rule box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the equipment
foundation in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this equipment foundation.
 Default Name Rule - Names the equipment foundation using the format "<equipment
foundation type>-<location>-<index>" where <equipment foundation type> is what you
select in the Type box on the ribbon, <location> is the global workshare location ID, and
<index> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, BlockEqpFndn-1-
0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the equipment foundation using the format "<system>-
<equipment foundation type>-<location>-<index>" where <system> is the name of the
parent system to which the equipment foundation belongs, <equipment foundation
type> is what you select in the Type box on the ribbon, <location> is the global
workshare location ID, and <index> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For
example, Structure System-BlockEqpFndn-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the footing name yourself in the Name box.
System
Select the system to which the equipment foundation that you are placing belongs.
Block Material
Select a material for the equipment foundation. Materials are defined in the AllCommon.xls
workbook or in the Catalog task.
Block Grade

Select a material grade for the equipment foundation. Material grades are defined in the
AllCommon.xls workbook or in the Catalog task.
Block Length
Specifies the length of the equipment foundation.
Block Width
Specifies the width of the equipment foundation.
Block Height
Specifies the height of the equipment foundation.
Block Sizing By Rule
Set to True to allow the software to select the equipment foundation to use based on the
default foundation defined for the equipment part. Set to False to enter the dimensions of
the equipment foundation.
Block Edge Clearance
Specifies the clearance between the equipment and the equipment foundation.
Reporting Type
Volume
Displays the volume of the equipment foundation (length  width  height).
Surface Area
Specifies the surface area of the equipment foundation (top surface plus the bottom surface
plus the side surfaces × length).
Weight and CG
Dry Weight
Dry CG X
Dry CG Y

Dry CG Z
Dry WCG Origin

Fabrication Type
Construction Type

East
east direction. You can change this value when the equipment foundation is placed by point,
whereas when placed by equipment, it will be set to read only.
North
north direction. You can change this value when the equipment foundation is placed by
point, whereas when placed by equipment, it will be set to read only.
Elevation
origin. You can change this value when the equipment foundation is placed by point,
whereas when placed by equipment, it will be set to read only.
Bearing
Displays the bearing angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the
X-axis of its local coordinate system. The local X-axis is the default axis of primary
symmetry for all symbols in the catalog. This option sets the reference in the model to the
active coordinate system North axis. The bearing measurement direction is clockwise from

the active coordinate system north looking in the negative active coordinate system
direction. That is, down from 0 to 360 degrees. You can enter negative bearing angles, but
the software will automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to
+/- 90 degrees, then the bearing measure displays 0 degrees. You can change this value
when the equipment foundation is placed by point, whereas when placed by equipment, it
will be set to read only.
Pitch
Displays the pitch angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the X-
axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that
is the intersection of the vertical plane through the X-axis of the local coordinate system and
the active coordinate system horizontal plane. The angle is measured in the positive
direction from the horizontal plane in the active coordinate system up direction regardless of
the current bearing. Pitch angles are limited to between -90 degrees and +90 degrees with 0
indicating horizontal. You can change this value when the equipment foundation is placed
by point, whereas when placed by equipment, it will be set to read only.
Roll
Displays the roll angle for the shape. This angle sets the reference on the object to the Y-
axis of its local coordinate system. This option sets the reference in the model to a line that
is perpendicular to the local coordinate system x axis and in the horizontal plane. Roll
angles are measured clockwise from horizontal to the y-axis of the local coordinate system.
The roll angle is between 0 and 360 degrees. You can enter negative roll angles, but the
software will automatically convert them to the positive equivalents. If the pitch is set to +/-
90 degrees, then the reference in the model is the North axis. You can change this value
when the equipment foundation is placed by point, whereas when placed by equipment, it
will be set to read only.
See Also
Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box (on page 483)
Definition Tab (Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog

Box)
The Definition tab displays the equipment foundation properties as they are defined in the
property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one equipment
foundation, and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between
the selected equipment foundations display.
See Also
Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box (on page 483)

SECTION 31
Member Autoconnect
Connects existing built-up or standard members using a pre-defined set of rules and
tolerances. You can either let the software locate supporting objects, or select them manually.
Generally, when the software locates the supporting members, supporting members must be
within 25 cm of the end of a supported member. If more than one supporting candidate is found,
built-in selection rules decide which supporting member to use considering axis directions and
relative position along. Member type and cross-section size is ignored. If you selected the
supporting objects, the selection is simply based on the nearest one.
The software operates only on Frame Connections that are Unsupported and have no
supporting object. Best results occur by using the Collinear module first, then the Point On
module, and then End module for braces. Collinear requires the supporting member to be
collinear with the supported one. In automatic mode, this module will search for collinear
members successively. If they are within 10 degrees of vertical, locate only the top so that the
upper ones use the lower as their supporting.
Member Autoconnect Ribbon

Select Member or Frame Connection to Connect
Select the members, or the frame connection of the members, to connect. These members
are the supported members and will be extended or shortened if you select the Extend
Members option.
Select Target Object

Select the members, grid lines, slabs, or walls to which to connect. These objects are the
supporting objects.
Connection method
Select how to search for possible target objects.
 Collinear - Search for target objects within 25 cm that are collinear to the selected
members. This option places axis-end frame connections. You typically use this option
for columns that are stacked on top of each other. This option transverses members
successively until all collinear members are connected. This option ignores horizontal
and near-horizontal members from consideration allowing it to process vertical braces
and columns.
 Point on - Search for target objects within 25 cm that are not collinear to the selected
members. This option places axis-along frame connections. You can manually select
the target supporting object or have the command automatically select the supporting
objects. If the member is horizontal and the selected target is vertical and an elevation
plane is found, the elevation plane is included in the connection.
 Surface - Search for surfaces of slabs, walls, and plates within 25 cm to the selected
members. This option places surface-default frame connections.
 Grid - Creates a relationship between the selected member and the selected grid lines.
The grid line must intersect the end of the member.

Member Autoconnect
 End - Search for member ends in the model within 25 cm of the supported member
frame connection. This option places axis-end frame connections or vertical-corner-
brace connections. You typically use this option for braces.
Filter out connected connections

Click to remove connected frame connections from the selection set. Only unsupported
frame connections will remain in the selection set after you click this option.
Accept Selection
Click to confirm that the objects you have selected are the ones to use.
Reject Selection
Click to clear the object selections that you have made.
Finish
Updates the frame connections on the selected members.
Extend Members
Select to have the software automatically extend or shorten the selected members to make
the required connection possible.

 Apply axis-end frame connections to stacked columns (on page 489)
 Connect beams to columns (on page 490)
 Connect horizontal braces and beams to supporting beams (on page 490)
 Connect members to slabs, walls, and plates (on page 491)
 Connect braces to members (on page 491)
 Connect Members to Grids (on page 492)
Apply axis-end frame connections to stacked

columns
1. Click Member Autoconnect .
2. Set Connection Method to Collinear.
3. Select the columns to process. You only have to select the topmost or bottommost column
in the stack. This command transverses members successively until all collinear members
are connected.
4. Optionally, click Filter out connected connections to remove connected frame

connections from your selection. Only unsupported frame connections will remain in your
selection.
5. Click Accept .
6. Click Finish.

Member Autoconnect
The command processes the selected frame connections. Frame connections that were
modified display in white. Frame connections that were not modified display in red.
7. Click Yes to use the unmodified red frame connections as your starting selection set for the
next run of the command.
or
Click No to clear the unmodified red frame connections from your select set.
Connect beams to columns

2. Set Connection Method to Point on. This option places axis-along frame connections. You
can manually select the target supporting object or have the command automatically select
the supporting objects. If the member is horizontal and the selected target is vertical and an
elevation plane is found, the elevation plane is included in the connection.
3. Select the members to process.

selection.
5. Click Accept .
6. Click Finish.
or
Connect horizontal braces and beams to supporting

beams
2. Set Connection Method to Point on. This option places axis-along frame connections. You
can manually select the target supporting object or have the command automatically select
the supporting objects. If the member is horizontal and the selected target is vertical and an
elevation plane is found, the elevation plane is included in the connection.

selection.
5. Click Accept .

Member Autoconnect
6. Click Finish.
or
Connect members to slabs, walls, and plates

2. Set Connection Method to Surface. This option places surface-default frame connections.

selection.
5. Click Accept .
6. Click Finish.
or
Connect braces to members

2. Set Connection Method to End. This option places axis-end frame connections or vertical-
corner-brace connections. You would use this option typically for braces.

selection.
5. Click Accept .
6. Click Finish.

Member Autoconnect
or
Connect Members to Grids

2. Set Connection Method to Grid. This option creates a relationship between the selected
member and the selected grid lines. The grid line must intersect the end of the member.
4. Click Accept .
5. Select the grid line.
6. Click Accept .
7. Click Finish.
or

SECTION 32
Sketching in 3-D
To place handrails, curved members, and one of the methods for placing slabs and walls in the
model is to sketch a path in the 3-D environment. For handrails, the sketched 3-D path specifies
the handrail location. For curved members, the sketched 3-D path specifies the curved member
location. For slabs, the sketched 3-D path specifies the slab boundaries or a portion of the slab
boundaries. For walls, the sketched 3-D path specifies the wall location. You can use Tools >
PinPoint, Tools > Point Along, and the SmartSketch relationship indicators when defining the
path to help with precise placement.
Path segments can be straight lines or three-point arcs with the ability to switch between the two
types at any time using the Path Type option. In addition, you can define four types of corners
for your path using the Turn Type option. The following graphic shows examples of the
available turn types (paths display in the model as yellow lines (blue below) with yellow squares
(green below) at the vertices):
When placing a path for a handrail or curved member, the path can transverse multiple
elevations and not required to be a closed shape. However, when placing a path that defines the
boundaries of a slab or the path of a wall, the software limits the path to the plane defined for the
slab or wall.
Create Path Ribbon

Sets options for defining a new path. The path can be used to define the location of a handrail,
curved member, the boundaries of a slab, or the path of a wall.
Properties
Displays the Sketch Properties dialog box, in which you can view properties for the path.
For more information, see Sketch Properties Dialog Box (on page 506).
Finish
Displays the path in the active view and returns control to the activating command.

Sketching in 3-D
Cancel
Cancels the path placement, closes the ribbon, and returns control to the activating
command.
Show Cross Section View
Opens a new graphics window that is oriented normal to the sketch plane.
Edit
Allows you to modify and move the existing path. When you initially create a path, this
option is only available after you place at least two points in the path. You can select the
segment, turn, or multiple segments to which you want to make modifications.
Create
Allows you to sketch the path or add segments to an existing path.
First Point
Specifies that you are currently defining the first point of the path segment.
Second Point (Straight Line)
Specifies that you are currently defining the second point of a straight path segment.
Second Point (Arc)
Specifies that you are currently defining the second point of an arc. This option only appears
when Arc by 3 Points is selected in the Path Type list.
Third Point (Arc)
Specifies that you are defining the final point of an arc.
Insert Vertex
Allows you to add a vertex to a straight segment. After the vertex has been inserted, you
can move that vertex to edit the segment path. You cannot insert a vertex on arc path
segments.
Path Type
click a new type in the Path Type list. You can select from the following line types:
 Line - Defines the line type for the segment to be a straight line.
 Arc by 3 Points - Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc. To define the
arc, you must click three points in the view.
 No Line - This option is not available for handrails, walls, or slabs.
 Arc by End Points - Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc that you
have defined by the arc's end points. To define the arc, you must define the arc's two
end points and then a point along the arc.
 Elliptical Arc - Defines the line type for the segment to be an elliptical arc.
Plane
Activates options for selecting a working plane for the path. This option is disabled when
defining a path for a slab.

Sketching in 3-D
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active
end. You also can press 1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also
can press 2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
 Plane by Turn - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing turn.
You select the turn to set the plane. You also can press 4 to select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press 5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press 6 to select this option.
Lock Angle
Locks or unlocks the Angle box. Locking the corresponding angle value creates a constraint
along which the selected turn angle can be moved.
Angle
Specifies the angle for the turn.
Lock Length
Locks or unlocks the Length box.
Length
Specifies the length of the selected path segment.
Turn Type
Specifies the type of turn associated with the current path segment. The Turn Type option
is unavailable if you select Arc by 3 Points or No Line in the Path Type list. The following
turn types are available:
 None - Indicates that no special turn type will be applied to the turn.
 Bend - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a bend. You can specify
the angle of the bend in the Value box.
 Cornice - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a cornice. You can
specify the radius of the cornice in the Value box.
 Chamfer - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a chamfer. You can
specify the dimensions for setback value of the chamfer in the Value box. The
dimensions of setback A and setback B for the chamfer must be the same.
 Split - Specifies that you want to split the path you are defining into multiple individual
paths between each set of vertices. This option is only available when Path Type is set
to Line and the previous vertex is not the end vertex of an arc. Use this option when, for
example, you want individual handrails for each straight segment of the path.

Sketching in 3-D
Value
Edit Path Straight Segment Ribbon

Sets options for modifying a straight segment of an existing path. This ribbon appears when you
select a straight segment in the existing path.
Properties
Finish
Displays the path in the active view and returns control to the Place Handrail or Place
Slab command.
Cancel
Cancels the path placement, closes the ribbon, and returns control the activating command.
Edit
Allows you to modify and move the existing path. You can select the segment, turn, or
multiple segments to which you want to make modifications.
Create
Displays the Create Path ribbon bar to allow you to add segments to an existing path. You
cannot add segments to slab boundary paths.
First Point
Second Point

Sketching in 3-D
Insert Vertex
Allows you to add a vertex to the selected straight segment. After you define the location of
the vertex along the segment, click Finish to insert the vertex. After the vertex has been
inserted, you can move that vertex to edit the segment path. You cannot insert a vertex on
arc path segments.
Path Type
 No Line - This option is not available for handrails or slabs.
 Arc by End Points - Defines the line type for the segment to be an arc that you
defined by the arc's end points. To define the arc, you must define the arc's two end
points and then a point along the arc.
 Elliptical Arc - Defines the line type for the segment to be an elliptical arc
Plane
Activates options for selecting a working plane for the path. This option is disabled if you are
editing a path for a slab boundary. Six options are available:
Length Locked
Defines whether or not the length of the selected segment should remain constant while
moving.
When locked , the software automatically modifies the turn points, along with the length
and angle of adjacent segment, to remain connected to the moved segment. The length of
the moved segment does not change.
When not locked , the software extends or shortens the associated segments to connect

Sketching in 3-D
with the new position of the moved segment. The length of the moved segment can change.
Edit Path Arc Ribbon

Sets options for modifying an arc that is part of an existing path. This ribbon appears when you
select an arc in the existing path.
Properties
Finish
Slab command.
Cancel
Edit
Create
First Point
Second Point
Path Type
 No Line - This option is not available for handrails.
Plane
editing a path for slab boundaries. Six options are available:

Sketching in 3-D
Edit Path Turn Ribbon

Sets options for modifying a turn in an existing path. This ribbon appears when you select a turn
in the existing path.
Properties
Finish
Slab command.
Cancel
Edit
Create
First Point
Second Point
Plane
editing a path for a slab boundary. Six options are available:

Sketching in 3-D
Angle 1
Displays the first angle used in the turn, if one exits. This option is read-only.
Angle 2
Displays the second angle used in the turn, if one exits. This option is read-only.
Angle 3
Displays the third angle used in the turn, if one exits. This option is read-only.
Turn Type
Specifies the type of turn. You can change the turn type by selecting another type in the list.
The following turn types are available:
 None - Indicates that no special turn type will be applied to the turn.
 Bend - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a bend. You can specify
the angle of the bend in the Value box.
 Chamfer - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a chamfer. You can
specify the dimensions for the chamfer in the Value box. The dimensions of setback A
and setback B for the chamfer must be the same.
 Cornice - Specifies that the turn type between two segments is a cornice. You can
specify the radius of the cornice in the Value box.

Sketching in 3-D
Value

 Define a path (on page 501)
 Add segments to a path (on page 502)
 Add vertices to a path (on page 503)
 Move segments of a path (on page 503)
 Modify a straight segment in a path (on page 504)
 Modify an arc in a path (on page 505)
 Modify a turn in a path (on page 505)
Define a path
1. Click to place the first point for the path.
 You can use Pin Point, Point Along, and the SmartSketch relationship indicators when
defining your path.
 For handrails, you can change the path plane at any time by selecting a new plane in
the Plane list.
Path Type list, and then click 3 points to define the arc.
list.

Sketching in 3-D
2. Click the second point for the path.
 To change turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list and
define the angle or offset dimensions for the turn in the Value box
 Use the Split turn type to place individual walls or handrails for each straight segment of
the path.
3. Click to place other segments of the path as needed.
4. After you place all the points that define the path, click Finish.
 The software does not require that you close the path for a handrail. You can end the path
wherever you want.
 The software does require a closed shape for a slab boundary. If you do not define a closed
shape path, then you need to specify additional objects in the model for the missing
boundary sides.
 After you place a segment of the path by defining two points, you can click Edit on the
ribbon to change the segment.
Add segments to a path

1. Click Select .
2. Select the handrail for which you want to modify the path.
4. To add one or more segments to the path, click Create.
5. Click the point on the existing path where you want to insert the new segment.
 You can use Pin Point, Point Along, and the SmartSketch relationship indicators when
defining your path.
list.
Path Type list, and then click 3 points to define the arc.
list.
6. Click to place other points and add to the path as needed.
 To change turn type for the corner, click the new turn type in the Turn Type list and
define the angle or dimensions for the turn in the Feature Value box.

Sketching in 3-D
7. After you place all the points for the new segments, click Finish.
 You cannot add segments to slab boundary paths.

 You can click Edit on the ribbon to change the segment or modify the path further.
Add vertices to a path

1. Click Select .
2. Select the handrail for which you want to modify the path.
4. Select the segment to add the vertex to.
5. On the ribbon, click Insert Vertex .
6. Identify the location on the path segment for the new vertex.
7. Click Finish.
Move segments of a path

1. Click Select .
3. Select the handrail or slab for which you want to modify the path.
4. For handrails, click Path on the ribbon.
-OR-
For slabs, click Define Boundaries and then click Sketch 3D .
5. Select the segments to move.
6. If you want the length of a straight segment to remain constant while you move the segment
click Length Locked .
along with the length and angle of adjacent segments, to remain connected to the
7. Click to specify the starting location of the move vector.
8. Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.

Sketching in 3-D
9. Click Finish.
 The new path displays in dynamics when you click Finish.

 The new handrail or slab is actually created when you click Accept and then Finish on
the ribbon.
Modify a straight segment in a path

1. Click Select .
3. Select the handrail or slab for which to modify the path.
-OR-
5. Select the straight segment to modify.
You can select multiple segments by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking the
segments.
8. To delete the segment, click Delete .
9. If you want the length of a straight segment to remain constant when you move the segment
click Length Locked .
along with the length and angle of adjacent segment, to remain connected to the moved
segment. The length of the moved segment does not change.
10. Click Finish.

the ribbon.
 You can also move the segments of a path. For more information, see Move Segments of a
Path (on page 503).

Sketching in 3-D
Modify an arc in a path

1. Click Select .
-OR-
5. Select the arc to modify.
You can select multiple segments by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking the
segments.
8. To delete the segment, click Delete .
9. Click Finish.

the ribbon.
Path (on page 503).
Modify a turn in a path

1. Click Select .
-OR-
6. To delete the turn, click Delete .
7. To change the turn type, select a new type in the Turn Type list.
8. Click Finish.

Sketching in 3-D
the ribbon.
Path (on page 503).
Sketch Properties Dialog Box

Sets options for paths. You cannot edit the different applicable properties.
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box) (on page 506)
General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the points that make up a path, their X, Y, and Z coordinates, turn types, and turn type
dimensions.
Point No
Displays point number that identifies the selected point.
X
Displays the location of the point on the X-axis.
Y
Displays the location of the point on the Y-axis.
Z
Displays the location of the point on the Z-axis.
Turn Type
Displays the type of turn associated with the point. Turn types include none, bend, chamfer,
and cornice.
Value
Specifies dimensions for the selected turn type. For bends and cornices, the value specifies
the radius of the bend. For chamfers, the value specifies the dimensions for setback A and
setback B of the chamfer.
See Also
Sketch Properties Dialog Box (on page 506)

Importing and Exporting Structure

Structural objects are imported and exported from Smart 3D using the CIMsteel Integration
Standards 2.0 (CIS/2). You can only export concrete slabs, walls, structural systems, openings
on slabs and walls, footings, equipment foundations, and design equipment (with an equipment
classification of civil elements or structural elements) to the Industry Foundation Class (IFC)
format. Steel members can be exported only through the CIS/2 format. You can also export
objects to IGES, ACIS, and neutral XML formats using File > Export commands available when
in the Molded Forms or Structural Detailing tasks.
Object CIS/2 CIS/2 IFC bocad

Export Import Export Import
Grids Yes No No Yes
Linear Member Yes Yes No Yes
Curved Member Yes Yes No No
Built Up Member Yes Yes No No
Slab Object Yes Yes Yes No
Wall Object Yes Yes Yes No
Fireproofing No No No No
Traffic Items (stairs, ladders, handrails) Yes Yes1 No Yes1
Footing Object No No Yes No
Equipment Foundation Object No No Yes No
Designed Solid - Structural No No Yes No
Openings Yes Yes Yes Yes
Marine Planar Plate Yes Yes No Yes
Marine Linear Profile Yes No No No
1 - A parent item with parts
Importing and Undo

Because of the system resources required to support Undo, it is possible for you to import a file
where you cannot undo the import. The ability to undo is driven by the number objects in each
object type being imported. The undo limit can be calculated with this formula:

roundUp(members/100) + roundUp(slabs/100) + … + roundUp(stairs/100) 

10
where:
members, slabs, stairs, and so forth are the number of objects in the import file
segregated into these object types:
 member  stair
 slab  stair member part
 opening  stair planar part
 ladder  structure system
 ladder member part  structure system member part
 ladder planar part  structure system planar part
 handrail planar part
roundUp - Round up the result of (members / 100) to the next whole number. For example, if
you have 45 members in the import file, 45 / 100 = .45, so members count as 1. However, if you
have 367 members in the import file, 367 / 100 = 3.67 so members count as 4.
The sum total of all object types must be 10 or less for Undo to be available.
Example: Your import file has 432 members, 25 slabs, 15 ladders, 69 openings.
roundUp(432/100) + roundUp(25/100) + roundUp(15/100) + roundUp(69/100)
roundUp(4.32) + roundUp (.25) + roundUp (.15) + roundUp(.69)
5 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 8
8 is less than 10 so you will be able to Undo your import if needed.
Industry Foundation Class

Industry Foundation Class (IFC) was developed by buildingSMART (International Alliance for
Interoperability, IAI) to facilitate interoperability in the building industry. For more information
about IFC, go to http://www.buildingsmart.com.
Smart 3D provides limited support for IFC by exporting only concrete slabs, walls, structural
systems, openings on slabs and walls, footings, equipment foundations, and design equipment
(with an equipment classification of civil elements or structural elements) to the Industry
Foundation Class (IFC) format. Linear and curved concrete members cannot be exported to
IFC. We recommend the CIS/2 format for transferring linear and curved members.
CIS/2 Import and Export

CIS/2 was authored by The Steel Construction Institute and the Computer Aided Engineering
Group School of Civil Engineering at the University of Leeds to facilitate a more integrated
method of working through the sharing and management of information within and between
companies involved in the planning, design, analysis, and construction of steel framed building
and similar structures.
Smart 3D provides limited support for:
 importing of manufacturing models

 partial importing and exporting the analytical model (available only in the Structural
Analysis task)
 importing and exporting the design model
CIS/2 Limitations
There are some limitations when importing and exporting the design model and analysis model
through CIS/2:
 Members imported from a design model CIS/2 file are standard or designed Smart 3D
members depending on the cross-section specified in the CIS/2 file. Frame connections are
created during import and are set to Axis-Along with X, Y, and Z offsets defined if the
connection information is provided in the CIS/2 import file. Assembly connections are
created during import if the connection information is provided in the CIS/2 import file.
 According to the LPM/6 schema, both the AXIS2_PLACEMENT_3D and its associated
location (CARTESIAN_POINT) are GEOMETRIC_REPRESENTATION_ITEM entities. As
such, either or both can be assigned a unit through the REPRESENTATION entity. Smart
3D first attempts to retrieve the units assigned to the AXIS2_PLACEMENT_3D entity. If
none are found, Smart 3D uses the units assigned to its associated CARTESIAN_POINT
entity. If units are not assigned to either entity, then the units are considered to be in
standard MKSAR (meters) units. If units are assigned to the AXIS2_PLACEMENT_3D entity,
any units assigned to CARTESIAN_POINT are not used.
 When importing members from a CIS/2 file exported from FrameWorks Plus, ® tapered
members are ignored. Members with workpoint offsets are read in at the physical location of
the workpoint offset, but no analytical information is retained. In addition, all member end
releases are set to User defined - Free. However, the FrameWorks Plus member name is
assigned to the Smart 3D member, and the rotation and reflection settings of the member
are maintained.
 FrameWorks Plus solids are ignored. FrameWorks Plus slabs are imported with bottom face
orientation regardless of the face setting in FrameWorks Plus.

 Only member section size changes can be imported from an analytical model CIS/2 file.
 The software exports only the operation geometry for handrails, stairs, and ladders to the
design model.
 The path of curved members that are exported and then re-imported lose any constraints
that may have been applied to the original path.
 Slabs are always read into the model using a sketch 3-D path. You can edit the slab path
after the import, if needed. No grid lines associated with the slab are imported, and there are
no constraints assigned to the slab.
The assembly_design_structural_member_planar entity is used to represent a slab or plate
if it’s planar_member_type is “plate” (and Smart 3D is installed); otherwise, it is imported as
a slab. Plate Systems are bounded by a single, continuous and closed 2-D curve
 Designed members (members composed of individual plates) are not exported to CIS/2
using the individual plates. However, the designed members are exported to CIS/2 as
standard members of the same size.
Based-on CIS/2 Statement for Import

Application Name: Intergraph SmartTM 3D
Application Version: Version 2016 (11.0) Date: Monday, September 12, 2016
Translator Version: Version 2016 (11.0) Date: Monday, September 12, 2016
Software Vendor: Intergraph Process, Power & Marine

300 Intergraph Way
Madison, Alabama 35758 U.S.A.
The translators for this application have been implemented in accordance with the second
release of the CIMsteel Integration Standards (CIS/2.0) for the following (combination of)
Conformance Classes:
 CC312+CC110+CC118+CC249, CC312+CC111+CC118+CC259, CC278
Type of CIS Basic | DMC | IDI | PMR-enabled

Translator:
Data exchange Import | Export | Import & Export

capabilities:
Level of File Exchange | In memory | DBMS |

implementation: KBS
Flavors supported: EU | US | UK
Unit Systems SI | US Imperial

supported:
The vendor places the following riders on the operation of the translators:
 No riders.

Date of Monday, September 12, 2016

Statement:
Statement made Intergraph Process, Power & Marine

by:
Based-on CIS/2 Statement for Export

Application Name: Intergraph SmartTM 3D
Application Version: Version 2016 (11.0) Date: Monday, September 12, 2016

300 Intergraph Way
 CC312, CC110, CC118, CC255, CC331, CC100, CC308
Type of CIS Translator: Basic | DMC | IDI | PMR-enabled
Data exchange Import | Export | Import & Export

capabilities:
Level of implementation: File Exchange | In memory | DBMS | KBS
Unit Systems supported: SI | US Imperial
 managed_data_deleted, managed_data_creation, and managed_data_transaction are not
exported.
Date of Statement: Monday, September 12, 2016
Statement made Intergraph Process, Power & Marine

by:
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph support. You
can find support information on our web site: http://support.intergraph.com.
Be sure to check the Compatibility Matrix before you import or export data. Open
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com https://smartsupport.intergraph.com, select View
Downloads at the top, and then select Product Compatibility under Useful Links on the right.

See Also
Import Structure (on page 516)
Import bocad (on page 526)
Export Structure (on page 512)
Export Structure
The File > Export > Structure command exports the structural physical model to a CIS/2 or IFC
file. For more information, see Importing and Exporting Structure (on page 507).
Exporting User-defined Properties

You can map user-defined Smart 3D properties to third-party software attributes and export
those properties/attributes to the CIS/2 file using the UserAttribute_Map.xml file. A sample
UserAttribute_Map.xml file is delivered with Smart 3D in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
Export Structure Model

1. Click File > Export > Structure.
2. Select the filter to use to select the objects to export.
3. Type a description.
4. Type your name in the Author box and your company name in the Organization box.
5. Specify the file name and folder for the export file.
6. Define a mapping file, if needed. For more information on mapping files, see New Mapping
File (on page 535).
7. Define a log file name and folder.
8. Click OK.
 You must create the filter before you can export the physical model.
 You can create a mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command that can be
used when exporting the physical model.
 You can also use the delivered mapping files located in the [Product
Export Structure Dialog Box

Controls how objects are written to the export file. You can export to the CIMsteel Integration
Standards 2.0 (CIS/2) or to the Industry Foundation Class (IFC) file format.
 You can export only concrete objects such as slabs, walls, structural systems, openings on
slabs and walls, footings, equipment foundations, and design equipment (with an equipment
classification of civil elements or structural elements) to the IFC format.

 Linear and curved concrete members cannot be exported to IFC. We recommend the CIS/2
format for transferring linear and curved members.
 The International System of Units (SI) is used in the exported CIS/2 file regardless of the
settings on the Tools > Options > Units of Measure tab.
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph Support. You
Be sure to check the Compatibility Matrix before you export data. Open
Export Standard
Select the industry standard to export.
IFC Options
Defines data, display, and organizational information for the IFC file. For more information,
see Export Options Dialog Box (on page 514).
Filter
Select the filter to use to identify the model objects to export.
Description
Type a description of the model. This description is included in the export file.
Author
Specifies the person who created the export file. The default is the current system user
name.
Organization
Specifies your company or organization name to use in the export file.
Export file
Define the file name and folder path of the export file to write. CIS/2 files have a .stp
extension while IFC files have an .ifc extension.
Include mapping file
Select this option to use a mapping file when exporting the members to the CIS/2 file. You
use a mapping file to:
 Swap the third-party software name for a section (for example, L3.5X2.5X1/4) with the
Smart 3D name for a section (for example, L3-1/2X2-1/2X1/4). You must create the
section mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command before you can use
the mapping file in this command. Sample mapping files for the FrameWorks Plus AISC
table are delivered with the software in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder. For more
 Swap the third-party material and material grade name with the Smart 3D name. A
sample material mapping file for AISC is delivered with the software in the [Product
 Specify the user-attributes that need to be exported and to swap the Smart 3D property
names with the third-party user-attributes (properties) names. A sample user attribute

mapping file is delivered with the software in the [Product

Mapping file
Specify the mapping file to use if Include mapping file option is selected.
Log file
Specify a log file name. You can view the log file by clicking View Log.
Submit Job
Activates the Schedule [Task] dialog box, which is used to define the batch export of files
using SmartPlant Batch Services. For more information on the batch settings, see Schedule
[Task] Dialog Box (on page 524).
View Log
Displays the export log file. You must click Apply when exporting to view the log at the end
of processing. If you click OK, the dialog box is closed at the end of processing, and you are
not able to click View Log.
Export Options Dialog Box

Defines properties for the IFC file and the data contained in the export file.
Data Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 514)
Presentation Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 515)
Organization Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 515)
Data Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the format and accuracy of the data contained in the export file.
Boundary Representation (Brep)
Objects are represented by a series of faces that the software stitches together. For
example, a design solid is exported as one object with a series of faces.
Constructive Solid Geometry (CSG)
Objects are represented by a series of solids (cylinders, cubes, and so forth) that the
software constructs to create the entire solid. This option only applies to design solids. All
other solids (slabs, walls, footings, and so forth) are always written out in boundary
representation format.
Include Object's Range
Select to include the overall range of an entity in addition to the geometry of each of their
components. In general, the entities do not have representation (footings and foundations).
Tessellation or Stroking Tolerance
Specifies the accuracy to use when tessellating nonplanar surfaces or stroking nonlinear

curves.
Presentation Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box)

These properties specify how exported objects should render in other software.
Slab
Select a color for slabs.
Wall
Select a color for walls.
Footing
Select a color for footings.
Foundation
Select a color for foundations.
Design Solid
Select a color for foundations.
Organization Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box)

These properties give a brief description about the organization that owns the data and is used
in the IfcOrganization element.
Name
Type the name of the organization.
Role
Select the role played by the organization.
Description
Type a brief description of the organization.
Role Description
Give a detailed description about the organization and the role it plays. If Role is set to
User-defined, then this field is required.
Address

Specify the address information of the organization.
Import Structure
The File > Import > Structure > CIS/2 command imports a CIS/2 file into the model. This
command recognizes Global User Identities (GUIDs) to uniquely identify objects and manages
the electronic exchange with the other software package.
Members imported by this command are either standard or designed members depending on
the cross-section specified in the import file. Assembly connections are created if that
information is provided in the CIS/2 file and the appropriate import option is selected. Frame
connections are always created and connect the members in the import file if the connection
information is specified. Otherwise, the frame connections are set to "Unsupported".
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph Support. You
Import of Attributes/Properties
User-defined attributes that were defined in the third-party software and exported from that
application to the CIS/2 file can be mapped and imported to Smart 3D properties using the
UserAttribute_Map.xml file. A sample UserAttribute_Map.xml file is delivered with Smart 3D in
the [Product Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
If the third-party attribute that you want to map does not have an equivalent property in Smart
3D, you need to add that property to Smart 3D (using bulkload) before you can map to it in the
xml file.
If the third-party attribute does not have an entry in the mapping files but a property with the
same name exists in the Smart 3D, then that third-party attribute will still import and populate the
Smart 3D property even though it is not in the mapping file.

 Import Structure Model (on page 516)
 Preview a CIS file (on page 517)
Import structure model

1. Click Tasks > Structure.
2. Click File > Import > Structure > CIS/2.
3. Select the system in which to place the imported objects. You can create new systems in
the Systems and Specifications task.
4. Select the coordinate system to which to associate the imported objects. You can create
new coordinate systems in the Grids task.
5. Specify which objects to import by selecting the New box or which items to update by
selecting the Modified box.
6. Click Defaults and define the default properties for imported objects that do not have
recognized properties.

7. Specify the file name and folder for the CIS file.
8. Define a mapping file, if needed.
10. In the Action box, select Import.
11. In the Option box, select whether the software should use default properties.
12. Click Apply to import the CIS file.
13. Click View Log to review the log file.
You can use the File > New Mapping File command to create a section name
mapping file to use when importing a structural model, or you can use one of the delivered
mapping files in the [Product Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps
folder.
Preview a CIS File

1. Click Tasks > Structure.
2. Click File > Import > Structure > CIS/2.
3. Select the system in which to place the previewed objects. You can create new systems in
the Systems and Specifications task.
4. Select the coordinate system to which to associate the previewed objects. You can create
new coordinate systems in the Grids task.
5. Specify which objects to preview by selecting corresponding New or Modified boxes.
6. Click Defaults and define the default properties for imported objects that do not have
recognized properties.
7. Specify the file name and folder for the CIS file.
8. Define a mapping file, if needed.
10. In the Action box, select Preview.
11. In the Filter box, select the preview option to use.
12. Click Apply to preview the CIS file.
13. Click View Log to review the log file.
You must create a mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command
before you can use that mapping file when importing a structural model.
Import Structure Dialog Box

Controls how objects are imported from the CIS/2 import file. Be sure to check the Compatibility
Matrix before you import data. Open https://smartsupport.intergraph.com
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com, select View Downloads at the top, and then select
Product Compatibility under Useful Links on the right.
System

Select the system to which to assign the objects being read. You can define new systems in
the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see "Select System Dialog Box" in Place
Coordinate System
Select the coordinate system to which to assign the objects being read. If needed, you can
create a new coordinate system in the Grids task.
New
Loads any object in the CIS/2 file that is not in the model. Use the All On or All Off
commands to select or clear all check boxes.
Modified
Loads any object that exists in both the CIS/2 file and the model that has changed in the
CIS/2 file. Use the All On or All Off commands to select or clear all check boxes.
Members
Select to read into the model the members defined in the CIS/2 file. Openings on members
are not imported. Members defined with a built-up cross-section are imported as designed
members with these limitations:
 The member must be linear.
 The material and dimensions are defined by the build-up cross-section defined in the
catalog. Any material or dimension values specified in the import file are ignored.
 The designed member parts must be imported along with the parent member system.
Stand-alone designed member parts (such as connection parts and clip angles) are not
imported.
Slabs/Plates
Select to read into the model the slabs and plates defined in the CIS/2 file. Slabs are always
read into the model using a sketch 3-D path. You can edit the slab path after the import, if
needed. No grid lines associated with the slab are imported, and there are no constraints
assigned to the slab.
Walls
Select to read into the model the walls defined in the CIS/2 file. All walls are imported as
slabs.
Openings
Select to read into the model the openings (holes) defined in the CIS/2 file for slabs, walls,
grating, and checker plates.
Connections
Select to read into the model the gusset plates, clip angles, and other plates and standard
sections used to connect members. The detailing software marks these objects as
connection parts in the CIS/2 schema during export.
Assemblies
Select to read into the model the assemblies defined in the CIS/2 file.
All On

Click to activate all New and Modified check boxes.

All Off
Click to clear all New and Modified check boxes.
Defaults
Activates a dialog box where you define properties to use when the object being imported
does not have a recognized property.
Default Properties Dialog Box

The Default Properties dialog box defines properties to use when the object being imported
does not have a recognized property. You activate this dialog box from the main Import
Structure dialog box by clicking the Defaults button.
Member Defaults
Type Category
Select the type category to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized
type category. You can define a custom member type category on the Structural Member
Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.
Type
Select the type to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized type.
The properties change depending on the member type that you select. You can define a
custom member type on the Structural Member Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls
workbook.
Section Name
Select the cross-section to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized
section. Sections are defined in the reference data. See the Structure Reference Data Guide
for more information about reference data.
Material Name
Select the material to use when a member being imported does not have a recognized
material.
Material Grade
Select the material grade to use when a member being imported does not have a
recognized material grade.
Slab Defaults
Type
Select the slab type to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized slab
type.
Composition
Select the slab composition to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized
slab composition.
Material Name

Select the material to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized material.
Material Grade
Select the material grade to use when a slab being imported does not have a recognized
material grade.
Plate Defaults
Type
By default, all plates are imported as General plate systems. You cannot change this value.
Naming Category
Select a category for the plate system. Categories specify the role of the plate system in the
model. The category is also used by the naming rule to name the plate part that is a child to
the plate system.
Tightness
Select the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Continuity
Select the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
should react when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate
that the plate system should penetrate the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that
the plate system should be penetrated by the other system.
Priority
Specify the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
penetrated when two plate systems intersect, but have the same Continuity value. Plate
systems with a lower continuity priority (1, 2, 3, for example) penetrate plate systems with a
higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9, for example).
Material
Grade
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Specification
Select the structural specification for the plate system.
Export file
Define the file name and folder path of the CIMsteel Integration Standard file to read. We
recommend using a UNC path (\\server\share\filename.stp) in this box if you are going to
batch import the file so that the batch computer can locate the file.
Include mapping file
Select this option to use a mapping file when importing the members from the CIS file. You
use a mapping file to:

 Swap the third-party software name for a section (for example, L3.5X2.5X1/4) with the
Smart 3D name for a section (for example, L3-1/2X2-1/2X1/4). You must create the
section mapping file using the File > New Mapping File Command before you can use
the mapping file in this command. Sample mapping files for the FrameWorks Plus AISC
table are delivered with the software in [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps. For more
 Swap the third-party material and material grade name with the Smart 3D name. A
sample material mapping file for AISC is delivered with the software in [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps.
 Swap the third-party user-attributes (properties) with the Smart 3D properties names. A
sample user attribute mapping file is delivered with the software in [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps.
You must bulkload (create) properties in the Smart 3D catalog for those third-party
attributes that you want to map. For example, the third-party application has an attribute
called "Expected Service Life" for members. Because Smart 3D does not have a
property called "Expected Service Life", you need to add that property to members using
reference data bulkload. See the Reference Data Guide and the Catalog User's Guide
for more information on bulkloading.
Mapping file
Specify the mapping file to use if Include mapping file option is selected.
Log file
Specify a log file name. You can view the log file after processing by clicking View Log.
Action
Select whether to import or preview the contents of the CIS/2 file.
 Select Import to import objects from the CIS/2 into the model. This option checks the
unique identification numbers in the CIS/2 file with the identification numbers of the
model objects finding matching objects. This option allows you to update model objects
that had been imported previously. Plate objects in the CIS/2 file are imported as slabs.
 Select Import Ignore IDs to import objects from the CIS/2 into the model. This option
does not compare identification numbers in the CIS/2 file with the identification numbers
of model objects. This option allows you to import the CIS/2 objects as new, unique
objects to the model. In marine or material handling modes, plate objects in the CIS/2
file are imported as plates. In plant mode, plates in the CIS/2 file are imported as slabs.
 Select Preview to identify problems with the CIS/2 file before the actual import is
attempted. Objects in the CIS/2 file that have not been imported cannot be previewed.
Filter
Specifies how you want to preview the CIS/2 file. This option is only available when Action
is set to Preview.
 Objects in CIS file with unknown sections, material, or type - Select this option to
help identify potential problems with the CIS/2 file before you attempt the import. After
using this option, you can add unknown sections, materials, and types to the mapping
file.

 Objects in DB that exist in CIS File - Select this option to identify objects that are in
both the model workspace and the CIS/2 file.
 Objects in DB that are modified in CIS File - Select this option to identify objects that
are in both the model workspace and in the CIS/2 file but have different attributes (such
as section size) in the CIS/2 file. This option is useful when "round tripping" between
Smart 3D and another software package when you want to see which objects were
modified in the other software package.
 Objects in DB that do not exist in CIS File - Select this option to highlight objects in
the model workspace that do not have a corresponding object in the CIS/2 file. This
option is useful when the CIS/2 file was originally exported from Smart 3D and you are
"round tripping" between Smart 3D and another software package. Using this option,
you can locate members in the model that may have been deleted in the other software
package (and therefore, were not exported to the CIS/2 file.) This option is also useful
for verifying that all members in the other software package were exported to the CIS/2
file.
 Objects in DB that are not modified in CIS File - Select this option to identify objects
that are in both the model workspace and in the CIS/2 file that have the same attributes
(such as section size). This option is useful when "round tripping" between Smart 3D
and another software package when you want to see what objects in the Smart 3D
model were not modified by the other software package.
Option
Specifies how you want to import objects from the CIS/2 file. This option is only available
when Action is set to Import.
 Use no defaults - Select this option to import only those objects known to Smart 3D
(known either in the software or in the specified mapping file) sections. Objects with
unknown sections are not imported into the model but are noted in the log file.
 Use defaults if needed - Select this option to import all objects in the CIS/2 to the
model. Objects with sections not found in the software or in the mapping file will be
given the sections defined in the Defaults dialog box. Objects imported with default
sections are noted in the log file.
Submit Job
Activates the Schedule [Task] dialog box, which is used to define the batch import of CIS/2
files using SmartPlant Batch Services. For more information on the batch settings, see
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box (on page 524).
View Log
Displays the import log file. You must click Apply when importing in order to view the log at
the end of processing or to use the Preview option. If you click OK, the dialog box is closed
at the end of processing and you cannot click View Log.
Understanding the Log File

File name : C:\CIMSteel\cis2_out.stp ---- SHOWS HEADER INFORMATION FROM CIS/2
FILE
Mapping file used : C:\CIMSteel\AISC_Master_Physical_Map.XML
Intergraph Smart 3D Structure Version : 09.00.10.0003
CIS/2 Version : Tekla Structures Version : Next Build: 4232 Revision : 26.1.2009
File imported on : Tue Jan 19 16:26:34 2010

Parent System : Import

Coordinate System : Global
Importing with : Use no default sections
Processing Options : ---- SHOWS HOW THE OPTIONS WERE SET ON THE DIALOG BOX
New : On or Off
Members : ON
Slabs and Plates : ON
Walls : ON
Openings : ON
Connections : ON
Assemblies : ON
Modified : On or Off
Members : ON
Slabs and Plates : ON
Walls : ON
Openings : ON
Connections : ON
Assemblies : ON
*********************************Summary********************************
Linear Members................. 333 ---- LISTS SUCCESSFULLY IMPORTED OBJECTS TOTAL
Curved Members................. 0
Slabs.......................... 0
Walls (imported as Slabs)...... 0
Plates......................... 6
Openings....................... 48
Stair Assemblies............... 8
Stair Parts............ 18
Ladder Assemblies.............. 3
Ladder Parts........... 0
Handrail Assemblies............ 76
Handrail Parts......... 249
Assy Connections............... 0
Connection Parts....... 0
Embedment Assemblies........... 0
Embedment Parts........ 0
Total Number of Objects Imported: 741
Total Number of CIS Entities in the import file... 1133
Total Number of Items not found in the catalog......... 360
************************************************************************
CROSS SECTIONS --- LISTS ANY MISSING AND MAPPED CROSS-SECTIONS
Cross Sections Encountered Mapped To
-------------- ----------- ---------
PL9.525*127 65 Not Found
W8x13 109 W8*13
W13*56 9 W8x13 (Default)

MATERIALS --- LISTS ANY MISSING AND MAPPED MATERIALS

Materials Encountered Mapped To
-------------- ----------- ---------
ANTIMATERIAL 30 A36
Import structure completed successfully on: Tue Jan 19 16:29:40 2010.

*************************DETAILED SUMMARY**********************
Plates Using Default material
2331884
2331863
2331842
1873861
1873822
Linear Members with Missing Cross Sections
2354361
2354229
2013930
2013876
Handrail Parts with Missing Cross Sections
2154615
1995739
1995257
1994775
1994293
Stair Parts with Missing Cross Sections
1908086
1908063
1908040
Zero Length Ladder Parts
2265509
2264060
1880386
Ladder parts with Missing Cross Sections:
1880370
1880231
1880223
1880213
****************************************************************
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box

Queue
Displays the name of the queues configured by an administrator for the job. For more
information on configuring the queues, see Configure Queues for Jobs in the Project
Management User's Guide.
Run job
Sets the frequency with which the job runs. Jobs can be scheduled to run once or on a
regular interval (daily, weekly, or monthly). Depending on the job frequency selected,
additional controls display. These controls allow you to define more specific scheduling

information. The scheduling controls can be changed only at job submission.

Run on
Sets the time to start running the job.
Options
Opens the Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box (on page 526) that you can use to
define a start and end date.
Run on box
Contains a calendar from which you can select the run date. This option is available when
you select Once from Run job.
Every X days
Specifies how many days pass between job runs. This option is available when you select
Daily from Run job.
Every X weeks
Specifies how many weeks pass between job runs. In addition, you can select on which
days the job runs. This option is available when you select Weekly from Run job.
Day X of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. This option is available when you select
Monthly from Run job.
The X Y of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. For example, you can select the last
Monday of the month. This option is available when you select Monthly from Run job.
Job Start
Notifies you when the job starts, if Outlook is set up.
Job Completion
Notifies when the job completes, if Outlook is set up.
Job Abort
Notifies you if the job aborts, if Outlook is set up.
Address Book
Selects the name of the person to be notified by e-mail of the job status, if Outlook is set up.
If Outlook is not available, this option does not work. You can also type the address
manually. The person you define here receives an email with the job log files after the job
finishes.
 The Batch Services SMTP option must be configured on the batch server for this to work.
For more information, see the Intergraph Smart Batch Services documentation.
 The WinZip application is no longer required on the batch server to compress any emailed
attachments. Compression is now done with functionality included in Smart 3D.

Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box

Provides more options on the Schedule Backup dialog box. This dialog box opens when you
click Options.
Start date
Sets an optional start date.
End date
Sets an optional end date, if checked.
Import Bocad
The File > Import > Structure > Bocad command imports a Bocad® .bti file into Smart 3D.
Import of Attributes/Properties
Attributes that were defined in bocad and exported can be mapped and imported to Smart 3D
properties using the sample UserAttribute_Map.xlm file. These attributes are included in the
BOCAD_Master_Physical_Map.xml file. This file is delivered with Smart 3D in the [Product
If the bocad attribute that you want to map does not have an equivalent property in Smart 3D,
you need to add that property to Smart 3D (using bulkload) before you can map to it in the xml
file.
If the bocad attribute does not have an entry in the mapping files but a property with the same
name exists in the Smart 3D, then that third-party attribute imports and populates the Smart 3D
property even though it is not in the mapping file.
Member Orientation and Member Type

The physical orientation of the member determines the member type during import.
 If the bocad member name exactly matches an existing member type defined in Smart 3D,
then the software sets the member to that member type regardless of orientation. For
example, if a member has an orientation greater than 10° from vertical but is named
"Column", the software imports that member as a column despite the member having an
orientation of a vertical brace.
 Members that are vertical or within 10° (1/10 slope) of vertical import as columns.
 Members that are horizontal or within 10° of horizontal import as beams.
 Members that are between 10° of horizontal and 10° of vertical import as vertical braces.
 Members are never imported as horizontal braces as there is no way to distinguish
horizontal braces from beams. You must manually edit the members that are horizontal
braces after import and set the correct member type.
 All curved members import as beams.
Limitations
 Curved members are imported using the resolution defined in the import file.

 Built-up members are imported if the mapping file is defined to do that.

 Previously imported structure is not updated on subsequent imports. In this situation, either
that structure is skipped, replaced, or imported as a copy depending on the import option
chosen.
How to Import a bocad File

1. Select File > Import > Structure > Bocad.
2. Select the system and coordinate system to use for the imported objects.
3. Select whether to import members (with or without openings) and plates (with or without
openings).
4. Define the .bti file to import.
5. Select the mapping file.
6. Define the location and name for the log file.
7. Select the action to perform when you click Import.
8. Click Import.
bocad Import Dialog Box

Controls how objects are imported from the bocad .bti file. Be sure to check the Compatibility
Matrix before you import data. Open https://smartsupport.intergraph.com
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com, select View Downloads at the top, and then select
Product Compatibility under Useful Links on the right.
System
Select the system to which to assign the objects being imported. You can define new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined
in the workspace or the model.
Coordinate System
Select the coordinate system to use for the imported objects. All objects are placed relative
to this coordinate system.
Members
Select to import members in the import file. Clear this option to not import members in the
import file.
Plates
Select to import plates in the import file. Clear this option to not import plates in the import
file.
Openings
Select to import opening in members and plates. Clear this option to not import openings.
Import File
Define the file name and folder path of the bocad .bti file to read and import.

Mapping file
Specify the mapping file to use. A sample mapping BOCAD_Master_Physical_Map.xml file
is delivered with Smart 3D in the [Product
Log file
Specify a log file name.
Action
Select whether to import or preview the contents of the bocad file.
 Select Import to import objects from the bocad into the model. This option checks the
unique identification numbers in the bocad file with the identification numbers of the
model objects finding matching objects. Matching objects from the bocad file are
skipped during import because they already exist in the model. Only new members in
the bocad file are imported into the model.
 Select Import as copy to import objects from the bocad into the model. This option
does not compare identification numbers in the bocad file with the identification numbers
of model objects. This option allows you to import the bocad objects as new, unique
objects to the model.
 Select Import and replace to import objects from the bocad into the model. This option
checks the unique identification numbers in the bocad file with the identification
numbers of the model objects finding matching objects. This option deletes the existing,
matching model object and places a new model object from the bocad file. Because of
this delete and replace, other objects connected to the deleted and replaced object must
be reconnected using Member Autoconnect (on page 488).
 Select Preview to identify problems with the bocad file before the actual import is
attempted. Objects in the bocad file that have not been imported cannot be previewed.
All cross-sections, materials, and plate stocks found in the import file are written to the
log file.
View Log
Opens the log file.

Exporting from FrameWorks Plus

The CIS/2 translator for FrameWorks Plus is delivered as part of a FrameWorks Plus. To use
this command, open the model that you want to export to Smart 3D. Be sure to attach all
reference models that are needed. Then, type mdl load SPExport in the MicroStation key-in
field.
You can also run the CIM Steel export application, spexport, from a command line. For more
information, see CIM Steel Export Key-in (on page 533).
FrameWorks Plus does not write generic solid members to the CIS/2 file.
Criteria
Activates a dialog box used to select what members to write to the CIS/2 file. For more
information, see Member Criteria (on page 531).
Description
Enter a description for the CIS/2 file.
Author
Enter your name.
Organization
Enter your organization name.

File
Enter a name and location for the CIS/2 file.
Log file
Enter a name and location for the log file.
Units
Specify the units for the CIS/2 file.
OK
Writes the CIS/2 file and closes the dialog box. You cannot review the log file using the
View Log command if you click OK. Click Apply if you want to review the log file at the end
of the process.
Cancel
Exits the dialog box without writing the CIS/2 file.
Apply
Writes the CIS/2 file without closing the dialog box. Use this command if you want to review
the log file at the end of the process.
View Log
Opens the log file for review.
Status
Displays the CIS/2 writing progress.
Based-on CIS/2 Statement for Export

Application Name: Smart 3D
Application Version: Version 2016 Date: Monday, September 12, 2016

(11.0)

300 Intergraph Way
 CC312, CC110, CC118, CC255, CC331, CC100, CC308
Type of CIS Translator: Basic | DMC | IDI | PMR-enabled
Data exchange capabilities: Import | Export | Import & Export
Level of implementation: File Exchange | In memory | DBMS | KBS

Unit Systems supported: SI | US Imperial
 managed_data_deleted, managed_data_creation, and managed_data_transaction are not
exported.
Date of Statement: Monday, September 12, 2016
Statement made by: Intergraph
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph support. You
See Also
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus (on page 532)
Member Criteria (on page 531)
CIM Steel Export Key-in (on page 533)
Member Criteria
The Criteria > Member Criteria command defines which members you want to write to the
CIS/2 file. Because you define the criteria for what members to write to the file here, the settings
in the Select Filter Settings command are ignored.

Type
Toggle on the member design types you want to write to the file.
Class
Toggle on the member classes you want to write to the file.
Include Reference Model
Defines whether to write members from attached models to the file in addition to the
members in the active model. You can attach models using the File > Attach Models
command. You can detach models using the File > Detach Models command.
Criteria
Defines whether to write members from a selection set or to write all the members in the
model to the file.
All On
Toggles on all Design Type and Member Class settings. The default is that all settings are
selected.
All Off
Toggles off all Design Type and Member Class settings.
OK
Saves any changes you have made and exits the dialog box.
Cancel
Ignores any changes you have made and exits the dialog box.
See Also
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus (on page 529)
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus (on page 532)
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus

1. Start FrameWorks Plus.
2. Open the model that you want to export.
3. Attach all reference models that are needed.
4. Type mdl load SPExport in the MicroStation key-in field.
5. Define the Criteria for member selection.
6. Type a description for the file.
7. Type your name and your organization's name.
8. In the File box, enter a name and location for the CIS/2 step file.
9. In the Log file box, enter a log file name.
10. Select whether to write the SI units or Imperial Units to the file.
11. Click Apply.
12. Click View Log.

13. Carefully review the log file for errors.

See Also
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus (on page 529)
Member Criteria (on page 531)
CIM Steel Export Key-in

You can export an individual model or all the models in a project using a command line key-in.
The command line export model program verifies the validity of each model before processing
that model. Invalid models are not processed. Possible invalid models include models from older
software versions or corrupted models where a database file is missing.
Error messages are written to a log file created in the user TEMP environment variable folder
and is named FWCIMSteelExport.log.
Before running this command line utility, you must create a text file,
inputoptions.txt, which describes all input options based on the following file format.
File Format
# Models List
# This section contains a list of models with complete path.
\\pdsserver\cimsteel\mod\model1
\\pdsserver\cimsteel\mod\model2
# Project information
# This section includes information about author, organization and
unit.
# For Unit, 1 indicates US_IMPERIAL and 2 indicates SI system of units.
Author = FWP Developer

Organization = Intergraph
Unit = 1
# Member criteria selection for type

# 1 indicates that an item is selected, while 0 not selected.
Beam = 1
Column = 0
VB = 1
HB = 1
Slab = 1
Wall = 1
Hole = 1
# Member criteria selection for class

# 1 indicates that an item is selected, while 0 not selected.
Class0 = 1
Class1 = 0
Class2 = 1
Class3 = 1
Class4 = 1

Class5 = 0
Class6 = 1
Class7 = 0
Class8 = 0
Class9 = 1
The command syntax is:

<prod_dir>\bin\FWCIMSteelExport.exe <file_path>\inputoptions.txt
Where <prod_dir> is where FrameWorks Plus is installed and <file_path> is the path to
inputoptions.txt. For example, if FramesWorks Plus is installed under c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus
and inputoptions.txt is under d:\temp, then the command is
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus\bin\FWCIMSteelExport.exe
d:\temp\inputoptions.txt.
This utility creates separate step files for each model and all these step files are created in the
project\int folder. The name of the file is the model name appended with _export.stp. For
example, if the model name is model1.mod, then the step file name is model1_export.stp.
You can also run this utility from the PD_shell CIM Steel Export Batch command. In
this case, PD_Shell creates input options file before running this utility.
Exporting from Tekla Structures

You can export CIS/2 files from Tekla Structures to import into Smart 3D. When exporting from
Tekla Structures, we recommend that you setup View Filters in Tekla specifically for isolating
only the objects to be exported from Tekla Structures. Also, be sure to select the Select Object
in Components command to include parts from components in the model, like stairs, in the
CIS/2 file.
Be sure to check the Compatibility Matrix before you import or export data. Open

 Export Structure Model from Tekla Structures (on page 534)
 Import Structure Model into Tekla Structures (on page 535)
Export Structure Model from Tekla Structures

1. Select the parts that you want to export.
2. If you want to include parts from components in the model, select the command.
3. Click File > Export > CIM Steel > Manufacturing Model.
4. Select Properties.
5. Select the Parameters tab.

6. Type a name for the CIM/Steel file in the Output File box.
7. Set CIS/2 Model Type to Design.
8. Select metric or imperial units, depending on your needs.
9. Type the structure name in the Structure Name box.
10. Type a path for the profile conversion file, if needed.
11. Type a path for the material conversion file, if needed.
Smart 3D uses mapping files when importing CIS/2 files, so creating these profile
and material conversion files may be redundant.
12. Set Export globally Unique IDs to Yes.
13. Select whether to include concrete in the CIS/2 file, depending on your needs.
14. Select the Design Model tab.
15. Set Export design connections to Yes.
This allows Smart 3D to read in the member connectivity of beams, columns, and
braces at their work point intersections while still recognizing member cut backs at bracing
connections.
16. Save the attribute settings so that you can use them next time.
17. Click OK.
Import Structure Model into Tekla Structures

1. Click File > Import > CIMSteel.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Parameters tab.
4. Set Model type to Design.
5. Set CIS Version to CIS/2.
6. For the Input file, browse to and select the CIS/2 file that you exported from Smart 3D.
7. Select the Conversion tab, if needed, and browse for the conversion files.
8. Click Apply.
9. Click OK.
Tekla has a limit of 21 characters for a part name. If you use a Smart 3D naming rule
that creates a part name that is longer than 21 characters, Tekla truncates that name during the
CIMSteel import into Tekla. This truncation can cause all your member parts to have the same
name in Tekla because Smart 3D naming rules have the unique index at the end of the name.
New Mapping File

The File > New Mapping File command creates an XML mapping file for the section names,
and optionally material names, used in the software and third-party application. Many times, the
software and the third-party application use different names for the same section or material.
The mapping file solves the naming conflicts by mapping section names in the software to

section names in the other applications. The mapping file must contain each section standard
table that you have used in the model.
The mapping file created by this command is a template. The software does not
write known-to-be-different section names to the mapping file. You are responsible for verifying,
editing, updating, and maintaining the third-party application section names in the file.
New Mapping File Dialog Box
Section standard
Select the section standard table for which to create a mapping file.
Include material
Select to include material name mappings in addition to the section name mappings.
Mapping file
Specify a name and folder path for the XML mapping file.
Mapping File Format

The mapping file is an XML-formatted file with which you can define mappings for section
names, material names, member types, slab types, and user-defined attribute/properties
between Smart 3D and the third-party software. The format for each mapping is given below.
You can include all five mappings in a single XML file, or you can define the mappings in
separate XML files and reference the five files in a single master XML file using include
statements. Using separate files that are pulled together using include statements might be a
better workflow as it allows you to quickly mix and match files for different requirements.
You cannot nest include files. Only the master XML mapping file can call an include file. You
cannot call another include file inside an include file. An example of a master XML mapping file
is shown below:

<xml>

<IncludeXML href="SectionStandard.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="Material.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="MemberTypes.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="SlabTypes.xml" />
<IncludeXML href="UserAttribute_Map.xml" />
</xml>
Section Mapping
The <SectionStandard> area maps the software section names to the third-party section names.
The software section names are labeled section name. The third-party section names are
labeled externalname. When the XML file is created, the software section name is duplicated
for the third-party section name. You must verify that the correct third-party section name is
defined for externalname by manually editing the XML file.
<xml>
<SectionStandard>
<Standard name="AISC-LRFD-3.0" externalname="AISC" externalorganization="user"
externaldate="2002" externalversion="1.0" />
<Sections>
<Section name="W10x39" externalname="W10x39" />
...
</Sections>
</SectionStandard>
</xml>
Material Mapping
The <MaterialStandard> area maps the software material grade names to the third-party
material grade names. You must have selected the Include material option when you created
the XML file to see the material grade name mappings. The software materials are labeled
Material type and grade. The third-party material names are labeled externalname. You must
verify that the correct third-party material grade name is defined for externalname by manually
editing the XML file. You must provide the external material standard name information by
manually editing the XML file.
<xml>
<MaterialStandard>
<Standard name="" externalname="" externalorganization="" externaldate="" externalversion="" />
<Materials>
<Material type="Steel - Carbon" grade="A36" externalname="A36" />
...
</Materials>
</MaterialStandard>
</xml>
Member Type Mapping

The <MemberTypes> area maps the software member types to the third-party member types.
You must create this section in a text editor. The software member types are labeled Member
type. The third-party member types are labeled externaltype and externalrole.
<xml>
<MemberTypes>
<Member type="Beam" externaltype="Beam" externalrole="" />
<Member type="Girder" externaltype="Beam" externalrole="gantry_girder" />
<Member type="Joist" externaltype="Beam" externalrole="joist" />
...
</MemberTypes>
</xml>

Slab Type Mapping

The <SlabTypes> area maps the software slab types to the third-party slab types. You must
create this section in a text editor. The software slab types are labeled Slab type and
composition. The third-party slab types are labeled externaltype.
<xml>
<SlabTypes>
<Slab type="4" Cast in Place" composition="CIP_4"_Fc3" externaltype="slab" />
<Slab type="4" Cast in Place" composition="CIP_4"_Fc4" externaltype="flat_slab" />
<Slab type="5" Cast in Place" composition="CIP_5"_Fc3" externaltype="wall" />
...
</SlabTypes>
</xml>
User Attribute Mapping

The <UserAttributes> area maps third-party software attributes to Smart 3D properties. You
must create this section in a text editor.
<xml>
<UserAttributes>
<Object type="CSPSMemberSystemLinear" externaltype="assembly_design_structural_member_linear" role="" >
<Interface name="IJUAStructuralFrameItemAttributes" externalname="IJUAStructuralFrameItemAttributes" >
<Attribute name="item_number" externalname="item_number" />
<Attribute name="item_name" externalname="item_name" />
<Attribute name="item_description" externalname="item_description" />
<Attribute name="life_cycle_stage" externalname="life_cycle_stage" />
</Interface>
<Interface name="IJUAStructuralFrameProductAttributes" externalname="IJUAStructuralFrameProductAttributes" >
<Attribute name="life_cycle_stage" externalname="life_cycle_stage" />
</Interface>
<Interface name="IJUAAssemblyAttributes" externalname="IJUAAssemblyAttributes" >

<Attribute name="assembly_sequence_number" externalname="assembly_sequence_number" />
<Attribute name="complexity_level" externalname="complexity_level" />
</Interface>
<Interface name="IJUAADSMAttributes" externalname="IJUAADSMAttributes" >

<Attribute name="key_member" externalname="key_member" />
<Attribute name="structural_member_use" externalname="structural_member_use" />
<Attribute name="Floor Thickness" externalname="Floor Thickness" />
<Attribute name="structural_member_class" externalname="structural_member_class" />
</Interface>
</Object>
...
</UserAttributes>
</xml>
Create a Mapping File

1. Click File > New Mapping File.
2. In the Section standard box, select the section standard for the mapping file.
3. Optionally, select Include material to write material names to the mapping file.
4. Click Browse, and then specify a name and folder location for the mapping file.
5. Click OK.
6. Edit the mapping file using a text editor such, as Notepad, and define the third-party
standard section, material names, member types, and slab types.

Glossary
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.
ACI
American Concrete Institute.
Active Template Library (ATL)
Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can
use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the
Component Object Model (COM) model. Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft
Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more
closely tied to the COM model.
AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)
An organization responsible for defining American steel construction standards.
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
anchor bolts
Bolts used to connect structural members to concrete footings.
angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.
anisotropic material
A material that has heterogeneous material properties represented by a material property matrix
in three directions.
approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and
govern your ability to alter specific data about a product.
arc element
A structural member of constant radius used to model curved elements.
arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.

Glossary
arrangement (outfitting)
Outfitting structure arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation.
assembly
Unit composed of a collection of parts or other assemblies. Assembly creation consumes the
individual part names and provides the unit a unique identification in the fabrication process.
associativity
A model architecture where the integrity and consistency of the model is guaranteed by the
relationships between model entities.
attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.
axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms
of an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the
center or axis for rotations.
bar
A steel rod used to reinforce concrete.
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.
bay
The distance between two trusses.
BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork Association)
An organization responsible for defining British steel construction standards.
beam
A structural member type typically placed with the member axis in a nominal horizontal
orientation.
bearing plate
A steel plate used to distribute a load over a larger area. Usually used at the base of a column.
bent
A vertical framework usually consisting of a truss or beam supported at the ends on columns.
bill of material (BOM)
Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).

Glossary
boundary condition
A property that defines the restriction on the allowable direction of movement (degree of
freedom) at a particular node.
brace
A diagonal member used to stiffen a framework.
built-up member
A member built from multiple standard shapes to create a single, usually stronger, member.
bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.
camber
Slight upward curve given to trusses and girders to avoid the effect of sag or self-weight.
cans
A reinforcing connection piece placed at member intersections.
cantilever
A beam, girder, or truss that overhangs one or both supports.
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.
Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each model database can reference a different
Catalog database.
chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.
change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.
change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For
example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need
updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model.
change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.

Glossary
channel
A structural shape referring to a three-sided member type with each of the sides joined at a right
angle.
chord
The principal member of a truss. Can be on either the top or bottom of the truss.
circular tube
A structural shape referring to a hollow cylindrical member type or pipe.
CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
An organization responsible for defining Canadian steel construction standards.
class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.
classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.
clip angle
A small angle-shaped piece of steel used for fastening members together.
codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.
column
A vertical structural member usually attached to a footing and extending to the roof of a building.
commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.
commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).
component
Physical part that a feature generates.
concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of
a model.

Glossary
consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a set of
drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.
constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.
construction profile
Principal structural plan for the plant that generally includes a cross section; also an initial
structural plan.
contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.
coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by
traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin
defined as 0,0,0.
cope
To cut out the top or bottom flanges and possibly the web so that one member frames into
another.
cover plate
A plate used in building up flanges, in a built-up member, to give greater strength and area, or
for protection.
cross section
The shape of a member when viewed along the member line.
cutback
An axial offset that typically represents the distance from a member centerline to its face.
Cutbacks are used to account for the difference between how a structure is modeled and
constructed in terms of lengths of members and quantities of materials.
cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.
damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a plant.

Glossary
data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or
movement to another computer software system.
database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.
database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after
the date that the last complete copy was created.
database break and recovery
Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.
database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another
design project.
database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.
database monitor record
Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with
a minimum of lost data.
degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree
1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.
degree of freedom
An allowable direction of movement, either translation or rotation. There are six possible
degrees of freedom (DOFs): translation X, Y, and Z, and rotation RX, RY, and RZ.
design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or
customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquely
refer to the design alternatives.
design approval log
Record of review and approval of parts of the design.
design data auto input
Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.

Glossary
design documents
Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design
phase.
design object
Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more
contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.
design progress check
Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of
completion.
design review
Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.
design service
Any general system services related to the design function.
design standard
Feature or object used in plant design that has been determined to the normal or approved way
of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to
computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.
detail schedule
Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.
diagonals
A member used for stiffening and wind bracing.
distributed systems
Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes
distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).
distribution systems
Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.
documentation
Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the
design.
drawing tool
Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are
PinPoint and SmartSketch.
driftpin
A tapered steel pin used to align bolt or rivet holes when assembling steel.

Glossary
easting
A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.
edge
A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.
edge distance
The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.
end releases
Physical member properties that define the connection between a member and its nodes. End
releases (degrees of freedom) are used to simulate pinned members as well as other special
modeling situations.
The member will not contribute stiffness to the node if the degree of freedom (end release) is
released. Similarly, the node will not transfer forces or moments to the member through a
release degree of freedom. End releases can be defined in any valid degree of freedom for the
model.
equipment
Pieces that a foundation supports. Examples are engines, generators, pumps, fans, consoles,
large valves, large strainers, and winches. Usually, you can find these pieces on a machinery
arrangement plan. Equipment is most often associated with a system.
equipment catalog
Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and
visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total
specification and ordering data for the object.
erection clearance
The amount of space left between members to ease assembly.
fabricate
To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.
face-to-face
The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.
fasteners
Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.
element
Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.
fence
Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.

Glossary
field adjustment
Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for fit up in the
case that extra material is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and
construction process.
finite element
A simple geometric shape defined by a specific number of nodes in a specific order. Elements
are dependent on all the nodes defining their shape; if any node is deleted, the element is also
deleted. Elements are the building blocks of finite element models. Elements can be one of
three types: linear or one-dimensional, plate or two-dimensional, or solid or three-dimensional.
flange
The projecting portion of a beam, channel, or column.
flavor
A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.
flexure
A term used for describing bending behavior.
focus of rotation
A point or line about which an object or view turns.
footing
An enlargement at the base of a column, or at the bottom of a wall, that distributes the load over
a greater portion of ground and thereby prevents settling.
footprint
A graphical cross-section of a structural member. Footprints are used to represent members that
intersect a model view plane at or near a perpendicular angle of intersection.
frame connection
A way of establishing connectivity between member parts to represent physical relationships
such as work point offsets, and logical relationships such as end releases. A placement
positioning mechanism to represent physical relationships between member systems that
establishes and maintains connectivity.
framing plan
A structural drawing plan view, drawn to scale, providing an overhead view of the structural
components of a building. Columns, beams, and girders, roof members, floor members, and wall
members all require separate framing plans.
Fu
Ultimate strength.
full penetration weld
A type of weld in which the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the
components being joined.

Glossary
function points
Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a
requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.
functional block diagram
Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and
their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting
network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network
illustrate the function of the system.
furnishings
Parts such as movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for
example, a chair).
Fy
Yield strength.
gap element
An analytical element used to simulate one-way compression-only behavior. A gap can be
closed and in compression. In addition to the compression, it can then conduct (or not conduct)
shearing stress depending on whether or not the gap is sliding. When open, the gap does not
participate in the structure stiffness. Typical uses of gap elements in modeling include beams on
elastic foundation and the contact of two initially unconnected regions.
generic specific
Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example,
International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can
provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. See
also specific and specific object.
girder
A horizontal support member similar to a beam. Some people maintain that girders span from
column to column, and beams span from girder to girder. Other people maintain that beams
span column to column and girders span from beam to beam.
girt
A beam, usually bolted to columns, to support the side covering or to serve as a window lintel.
grade
The material grade of the structural member.
GUIDs
Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the
GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The
purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been
loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a
replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.

Glossary
gusset plate
A plate used to connect various members, such as in a truss.
hook element
An analytical element or boundary condition used to simulate one-way tension-only behavior. A
hook element is a backwards gap with the ability to resist tension only when the hook is closed.
It resists neither tension nor compression when it is open. Typical uses of hook elements in
modeling include structural bracing, cables, tension, bolts, and the separation of two connected
regions.
host location
The first location created for a Site. This host location is defined when the Database Wizard
creates the Site database.
host server
The database server on which the Site database was created using the Database Wizard.
Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the
Site database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for
the Site, Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project
Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.
initial design
Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and
provide a rough concept of the intended plant. Contains information relating to a plant created
during its initial (concept) design period.
initial structural plan
Principal structural plan for the plant; also called a construction profile.
instantiation
Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.
interference checking
A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the
model.
I-Section
A structural shape referring to any member type in the form of an I.
isotropic material
A material that behaves with the same material properties in all direction. An example of an
isotropic material is steel.
jacket
A three- or four-faced vertical or sloped tower.
job order
Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.

Glossary
joist
A horizontal structural members that support the floor or roof of a building.
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.
kips
Kilo pounds.
knee brace
A corner brace used to prevent angular movement.
ksi
Kips per square inch.
leg length analysis
Preferred term is welding length analysis.
library
Resource of reference information that you can access in developing a plant design.
life cycle database
Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered plants.
link
Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that
changes in the file appear in your document.
lintel
A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.
load (structure)
A force vector applied to a member.
load group
A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics.
For example, if a pipe clamp from load group 5 has a maximum nominal load of 20kN, then so
does a threaded rod from load group 5.
location
A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID,
and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and
created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can
be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other
Plants within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Plants are configured for
Workshare.

Glossary
logical member
An object in the model used to represent the design topology.
machinery
Major pieces of equipment installed in a plant.
macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro,
the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual
Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware
programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.
maintenance envelope
A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.
maintenance records
Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.
material analysis
Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called
material lists.
material list
An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.
material properties
Properties of the material useful in the analysis process.
member name
A user-definable alphanumeric code used to uniquely identify individual members in the model.
member part
A model object derived from the logical model that represents the manufactured physical
member parts.
member system
A logical collection of member parts that can be moved as a single entity.
methods
Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a
plant.
move from point
Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From
point determines the point of origin for the move.

Glossary
move to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To
point determines where you want the move to stop.
MTO neutral file
A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material
Take-Off.
node
 One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph.
 A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a
network.
 An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more
branches.
northing
A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.
nozzle
A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.
nozzle standout
The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a
turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.
NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)
The diameter of a pipe.
object
A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.
occurrence (of part or equipment)
Instantiation of a part of equipment in the model that refers to the part library; an instance of a
specific object. The design can be built several times, and therefore the occurrence can apply to
more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its
complete definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the
case of a steel plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the
catalog and places it at a location in the space of the plant, the software creates an occurrence
of that object in the plant design.
occurrence property
A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are
designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence
properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on
the object, some occurrence properties are read-only.

Glossary
orientation vector
A vector used to define the local y-x plane of a physical member when combined with the local
x-axis defined by the start and end nodes.
origin
In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.
origin point
The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system
with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin
point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values.
orthogonal
The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree
angles. A square is an orthogonal element.
orthographic
A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular
to the plane.
orthotropic material
A material that has two material directions that are orthogonal to one another. An example of an
orthotropic material is wood.
P&ID
Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping
system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.
package
Set of closely related classes. (UML)
painting
Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.
panel
The space between adjacent floor supports, or purlins, in a roof.
parameter
A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.
part class
A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can
have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers with
different dimensions.
part number
Unique identifier of a part.

Glossary
PDS (Plant Design System)

A comprehensive, intelligent, computer-aided design and engineering application for the
process, power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that
correspond to engineering tasks in the design workflow.
physical member
A concept that helps to eliminate modeling errors by providing a straightforward method for
defining structure geometry by placing members in a model in much the same way that they
would be framed in the field. During analysis pre-processing, physical members are split into
finite elements (segments) while still maintaining the collective status of the physical member
during model revisions. The software assigns member releases at each end of the true physical
member, while preventing release assignments from being made to interior nodes of the finite
elements.
PinPoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.
pitch
The ratio of rise to run for roofs. Pitch is also the center distance between bolts or rivets, parallel
to the axis of the member.
plate
A flat, rectangular steel shape.
post tensioning
A method of pre-stressing concrete, by stressing the steel strands after the concrete has been
poured and allowed to harden.
precast concrete
Concrete members that are poured in forms at a plant or factory and allowed to harden. Two
types of precast products exist: pre-stressed products and reinforced products.
pre-stressed concrete
Concrete products that are stressed by passing high-strength steel strands through the form and
applying stress to the strands either before or after the concrete is poured.
pretensioning
Stressing the steel strands in a pre-stressed member before the concrete is poured into the
form.
primary member
A main structural support member.
principle of superposition
The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can
be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.

Glossary
Product Data Management (PDM) System

Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data.
Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business
rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing
or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.
product structure
Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units.
(For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)
production planning
Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a plant.
promotion
Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its
existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval
state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be
carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more
promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to
represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.
purlin
Horizontal structural member extending between trusses, used as beams for supporting the
roof.
query select sets
Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.
rafters
Beams or truss members that support the purlins.
rebar
A term for steel reinforcing bars that are used to reinforce concrete.
rectangular bar
A structural shape referring to a four-sided solid bar.
rectangular tube
A structural shape referring to a four-sided hollow member type.
reference data
The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes
graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical
dimensions and piping specifications.
reflect
A parameter that affects the placement orientation of member cross sections. At your option, the
sections can be placed with their geometry reflected or mirrored about the local section y-axis.

Glossary
reinforced concrete plan

A framing plan that identifies all beams and slabs by letter and number. The slab, beam, and
bend schedules give all details for preparation and placement (number, size, spacing, bending,
and location) of the reinforcing steel.
resource estimation
Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of
the plant.
retaining wall
A structural wall, either gravity or cantilever, used to hold back dirt or other materials.
route
1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2)
The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.
rule-based joint
A feature that enables you to offset the work point of two members that intersect at a node. The
rules vary depending on the structural type, member orientation, and construction practices.
Ruled joints are typically used when a connection detail calls for the physical member ends to
be noncoincident with the centerline of an intersection member.
sag ties
Tie rods between purlins in the plane of a roof, used to carry the component of the roof load
parallel to the roof. Tie rods are used to support girts.
SAISC (South African Institute of Steel Construction)
An organization responsible for defining South African steel construction standards.
satellite server
The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server
is not used unless Workshare is activated.
schema
A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the
queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.
schema update utility
Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database
structure after you modify or add to the database structure.
secondary member
A member that is not a significant load-bearing member.
section
A structural member whose parameters are defined in a table.

Glossary
section name
An alphanumeric code used to refer to a particular member in a table; for example W18X35.
section orientation
The position of physical member cress section relative to the physical member local coordinate
system.
section table
A library of standard structural shapes containing the necessary parametric properties of each
section size, such as depth, width, and inertias.
shear stiffness
A physical member property that indicates whether to include shear stiffness in the analytical
element stiffness matrix of a member.
shear walls
A wall designed to resist lateral loading from winds, underground disturbances, or blasts.
site
The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several
Catalogs, each shared by multiple Plants.
site administrator
Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given plant site
within a Site database.
site setup
Functionality associated with establishing a new plant site or hull for design development.
sketch and trace
User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D
mode.
skewed member
A structural member that is not at right angles to its connecting members.
slab
A flat concrete area usually reinforced with wire mesh and rebar.
span
A group of contiguous physical members that are not intersected by a brace- or column-type
physical member.
specifications
Contracted requirements for the plant.

Glossary
splice (structure)
To fasten together two physical members, usually columns end-to-end, to form a single
continuing length.
steel reinforced concrete
An association of concrete and steel where the concrete is there to stand the compression
forces and the steel the traction forces. The resulting structure can withstand traction and
flexion.
stiffener
An angle, plate, or channel fastened to a member to prevent buckling.
stress
Forces acting on structural members due to various types of loads. These forces can be shear,
tension, compression, or torsion.
stringer
A longitudinal member used to support loads directly.
structure analysis
Analysis routines that provide stress and deflection data for structural designs. Loading
conditions can be both static and dynamic. Finite element analysis is the most common type of
structure analysis.
strut
A compression member in a framework.
stud
A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.
suspended floor
A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.
symmetric node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side
of the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.
system
A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system
represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type,
properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.
tag number
User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve,
HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).

Glossary
target point
The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point
anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.
tilt-up walls
Concrete walls that are poured in forms on the ground and then tilted up into place by cranes or
hoists.
tolerant geometry
A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and
requires special handling.
transition
A cross-sectional type that results in a tapered length of member and involves a gradual change
in section size. See also uniform.
trimmed surface
A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the "natural" geometric definition of the
surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.
trunk
Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a
path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system
membership.
truss
A rigid framed structure consisting of straight members joined to form a pattern of
interconnecting triangles for carrying loads.
uniform
A cross-section type that results in a uniform length of member and involves an abrupt change
in section size. See also transition.
unit/module modeler
Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single
identifiable object.
user attributes
A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel
workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part
class sheets.
version control
Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control
should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features
among hulls within a plant site.

Glossary
vertex
A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.
viewset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership
or lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored
representation of the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current
scenario.
web
The center section separating the flanges of an I-section, tee, or channel.
weight and CG analysis
Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for
example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of
material and equipment, as well as the complete plant.
welding
Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required
weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.
wirebody
A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.
wizard
Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to you to
complete one of the functionalities of the application.
work content
Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the
various construction units.
work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.
working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.
workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.

Glossary
workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.
workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.
Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.
X-section
Cross section; a graphically placed cross section representing the member section size.
yield strength
The stress beyond which a material sustains permanent deformation.

Index
bocad Import Dialog Box • 524
A boundary condition • 538
abstract part • 536 brace • 538
ACI • 536 built-up member • 538
Active Template Library (ATL) • 536 bulkload • 538
Add a transverse member to a can • 157
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly C
connection • 182
Add column to a combined footing • 467 camber • 538
Add end segment to existing wall using 2-D Can Properties Dialog Box • 159
sketch • 250 Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) •
Add end segment to existing wall using 3-D 164
sketch • 263 cans • 538
Add fillet corner to existing wall using 2-D cantilever • 538
sketch • 252 catalog • 538
Add middle segments to existing wall using Catalog database • 538
2-D sketch • 254 chain • 538
Add segments to a path • 355, 499 Change a recess opening to a through
Add vertices to a path • 500 opening • 380
AISC (American Institute of Steel Change a through opening to a recess
Construction) • 536 opening • 380
AISI • 536 change history • 538
anchor bolts • 536 change management • 538
angle • 536 change propagation • 538
anisotropic material • 536 channel • 539
Apply axis-end frame connections to chord • 539
stacked columns • 486 CIM Steel Export Key-in • 530
approval state • 536 circular tube • 539
arc element • 536 CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel
arrangement (accommodation) • 536 Construction) • 539
arrangement (outfitting) • 537 class • 539
assembly • 537 classification folder • 539
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog clip angle • 539
Box • 184 codelist • 539
associativity • 537 column • 539
attribute • 537 commodity code • 539
axis • 537 commodity item • 539
component • 539
concurrent access • 539
B Configuration Tab • 64
bar • 537 Connect beams to columns • 487
basic design • 537 Connect braces to members • 488
bay • 537 Connect horizontal braces and beams to
BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork supporting beams • 487
Association) • 537 Connect Members to Grids • 489
beam • 537 Connect members to slabs, walls, and
bearing plate • 537 plates • 488
bent • 537 Connection Tab • 297
bill of material (BOM) • 537 consolidated tasks • 540

Index
constraints • 540 Definition Tab (Equipment Foundation

construction profile • 540 Properties Dialog Box) • 484
contract • 540 Definition Tab (Equipment Properties Dialog
Convert a member part • 58 Box) • 296, 312
Convert handrail to individual members • Definition Tab (Footing Properties Dialog
420 Box) • 475
coordinate • 540 Definition Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog
coordinate system • 540 Box) • 454
cope • 540 Definition Tab (Insulation Properties Dialog
Cope a member web • 202 Box) • 217
Copy framing members • 136 Definition Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog
cover plate • 540 Box) • 416
Create a basic solid • 321 Definition Tab (Stair Properties Dialog Box)
Create a Mapping File • 535 • 397
Create gap in existing wall using 2-D sketch Definition Tab (Trim Feature Properties
• 259 Dialog Box) • 204
Creating Customized Shapes • 337 Definition Tab (Wall Connection Properties
cross section • 540 Dialog Box) • 276
Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog degree • 541
Box) • 170 degree of freedom • 541
Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Delete a footing • 469
Properties Dialog Box) • 82 Delete a handrail • 421, 459
Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Delete a ladder • 403
Properties Dialog Box) • 73 Delete a member system • 57
Cross-Section Tab (Prismatic Shape Delete a member trim • 203
Properties Dialog Box) • 335 Delete a slab • 234
cutback • 540 Delete a Stair • 389
cutting plane • 540 Delete a wall • 265
Delete an assembly connection • 182
D Delete an equipment foundation • 480
Delete an opening • 380
damage records • 540 Delete fireproofing • 212
data interchange • 541 Delete free end cut • 184
Data Tab (IFC Export Options Dialog Box) • design alternative • 541
511 design approval log • 541
database • 541 design data auto input • 541
database backup • 541 design documents • 542
database break and recovery • 541 design object • 542
database copy • 541 design progress check • 542
database management • 541 design review • 542
database monitor record • 541 design service • 542
Define a path • 498 design standard • 542
Define cross-sectional properties for a Designed Equipment Properties Dialog Box
prismatic shape • 352 • 304
Define Plane as Coincident • 242 Designed Member Properties Dialog Box •
Define Plane using Angle to Plane • 243 78
Define Plane using Offset from Plane • 242 detail schedule • 542
Define Plane using Three Points • 243 diagonals • 542
Define Plane using Vector and Point • 243 distributed systems • 542
Define the path for a prismatic shape • 349 distribution systems • 542
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection documentation • 542
Properties Dialog Box) • 189 drawing tool • 542
driftpin • 542

Index
E F
easting • 543 fabricate • 543
edge • 543 face-to-face • 543
edge distance • 543 fasteners • 543
Edit 2-D drawn slab boundaries • 232 feature • 543
Edit 3-D drawn slab boundaries • 233 fence • 543
Edit a frame connection • 57 field adjustment • 544
Edit an equipment foundation • 480 finite element • 544
Edit assembly connection parts • 183 flange • 544
Edit assembly connection properties • 182 flavor • 544
Edit cross-section properties for a prismatic flexure • 544
shape • 354 focus of rotation • 544
Edit designed equipment properties • 302 footing • 544
Edit designed equipment reference Footing Properties Dialog Box • 470
coordinate system • 303 footprint • 544
Edit equipment foundation properties • 480 frame connection • 544
Edit equipment properties • 286 Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box •
Edit equipment relationships • 287 99
Edit footing properties • 469 Frame Connections • 24
Edit free end cut properties • 183 framing plan • 544
Edit handrail placement • 420, 459 Fu • 544
Edit handrail properties • 420, 459 full penetration weld • 544
Edit ladder placement • 403 function points • 545
Edit ladder properties • 403 functional block diagram • 545
Edit member part properties • 57 furnishings • 545
Edit member system properties • 57 Fy • 545
Edit multiple walls • 264
Edit prismatic shape properties • 333 G
Edit shape properties • 332
Edit slab object boundaries • 232 gap element • 545
Edit slab properties • 234 General Tab • 94
Edit stair placement • 389 General Tab (Frame Connection Properties
Edit wall properties • 264 Dialog Box) • 99
end releases • 543 General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog
equipment • 543 Box) • 381
equipment catalog • 543 General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog
Equipment Foundation Properties Dialog Box) • 96
Box • 480 General Tab (Sketch Properties Dialog Box)
Equipment Properties Dialog Box • 287 • 362, 503
erection clearance • 543 General Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) •
Export Options Dialog Box • 511 234
Export Structure • 509 General Tab (Split Connection Properties
Export Structure Dialog Box • 509 Dialog Box) • 199
Export Structure Model • 509 General Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog
Export Structure Model from Tekla Box) • 269
Structures • 531 General Tab (Wall System Properties
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus • 526 Dialog Box) • 265
Exporting from Tekla Structures • 531 generic specific • 545
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus • girder • 545
529 girt • 545
Extended User Attributes Tab • 98 grade • 545
GUIDs • 545
gusset plate • 546

Index
H location • 547
logical member • 548
Handrail Properties Dialog Box • 421
hook element • 546
host location • 546 M
host server • 546 machinery • 548
macro • 548
I Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box) • 85
Import Bocad • 523
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)
Import shape to designed solid • 322
• 94
Import Structure • 513
maintenance envelope • 548
Import Structure Dialog Box • 514
maintenance records • 548
Import structure model • 513
material analysis • 548
Import Structure Model into Tekla
material list • 548
Structures • 532
material properties • 548
Importing and Exporting Structure • 504
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System
initial design • 546
Properties Dialog Box) • 88
initial structural plan • 546
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog
instantiation • 546
Box) • 95
Insulation Properties Dialog Box • 213
Member Assembly Connections • 29
Insulation Tab • 297, 312
Member Autoconnect • 485
interference checking • 546
Member Criteria • 528
I-Section • 546
member name • 548
isotropic material • 546
member part • 548
Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog
J Box • 67
jacket • 546 Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic
job order • 546 Properties Dialog Box) • 67
joist • 547 member system • 548
Member System Prismatic Properties
Dialog Box • 61
K Member System Tab (Member System
kinematics analysis • 547 Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) • 61
kips • 547 Members • 22
knee brace • 547 methods • 548
ksi • 547 Modify a sketched cross-section • 353
Modify a straight segment in a path • 359,
L 501
Ladder Properties Dialog Box • 404 Modify a turn in a path • 360, 502
Layer Tab (Slab Properties Dialog Box) • Modify an arc in a path • 502
241 Modify an Arc in a Path • 359
Layer Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog Box) Modify fireproofing properties • 211
• 273 Modify the angle of a member • 59
Layer Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog Modify the cardinal point of a member • 58
Box) • 267 Modify the cross-section of a member • 59
leg length analysis • 547 Modify the end releases of a member • 58
library • 547 Modify the material grade of a member • 59
life cycle database • 547 Modify the material of a member • 59
link • 547 Modify the type of member • 60
lintel • 547 Modify wall cross-section • 264
load (structure) • 547 Modify wall length using 2-D sketch • 257
load group • 547

Index
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate Occurrence Tab (Shape Properties Dialog
System Properties Dialog Box - Designed Box) • 334
Member) • 89 Occurrence Tab (Solid Properties Dialog
Move a member • 60 Box) • 324
move from point • 548 Occurrence Tab (Stair Properties Dialog
Move one end of a member • 60 Box) • 389
Move segments of a path • 500 Occurrence Tab (Wall Connection
Move Segments of a Path • 357 Properties Dialog Box) • 274
move to point • 549 Opening Properties Dialog Box • 381
MTO neutral file • 549 Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box •
523
N Order shapes in designed solid • 323
Organization Tab (IFC Export Options
New Mapping File • 532 Dialog Box) • 512
node • 549 orientation vector • 550
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog origin • 550
Box • 84 origin point • 550
northing • 549 orthogonal • 550
Notes Tab • 65 orthographic • 550
nozzle • 549 orthotropic material • 550
nozzle standout • 549
NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 549
P
O P&ID • 550
package • 550
object • 549 painting • 550
occurrence (of part or equipment) • 549 panel • 550
occurrence property • 549 parameter • 550
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection part class • 550
Properties Dialog Box) • 184 part number • 550
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog PDS (Plant Design System) • 551
Box) • 159 physical member • 551
Occurrence Tab (Designed Equipment PinPoint • 551
Properties Dialog Box) • 304 Pitch • 551
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Place a combined footing • 466
Properties Dialog Box) • 78 Place a combined footing by point • 467
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Foundation Place a curved member • 110
Properties Dialog Box) • 481 Place a handrail • 419
Occurrence Tab (Equipment Properties Place a handrail as individual members •
Dialog Box) • 288 419
Occurrence Tab (Feature Properties Dialog Place a handrail by member • 458
Box) • 204 Place a ladder • 401
Occurrence Tab (Footing Properties Dialog Place a member using finish mode • 56
Box) • 470 Place a prismatic shape • 347
Occurrence Tab (Handrail Properties Dialog Place a shape • 331
Box) • 421 Place a single footing • 463
Occurrence Tab (Insulation Properties Place a single footing by point • 464
Dialog Box) • 213 Place a single footing without an associated
Occurrence Tab (Ladder Properties Dialog plane • 465
Box) • 404 Place a slab by drawing 2-D boundaries •
Occurrence Tab (Prismatic Shape 228
Properties Dialog Box) • 335 Place a slab by drawing 3-D boundaries •
230

Index
Place a slab by selecting boundary objects • Place Linear Member Systems • 35

226 Place members using contiguous
Place a slab by selecting objects and placement • 55
drawing 2-D boundaries • 230 Place members using discrete placement •
Place a slab by selecting objects and 54
drawing 3-D boundaries • 231 Place Opening • 367
Place a stair • 387 Place Shape • 328
Place a stub-end can • 156 Place Slabs • 220
Place a wall by 2-D sketch • 248 Place split walls by 2-D sketch • 251
Place a wall by 3-D sketch • 261 Place split walls by 3-D sketch • 262
Place an assembly connection • 181 Place Splits • 191
Place an end can • 155 Place Stairs • 383
Place an equipment foundation (By Place two types of fireproofing on a single
Equipment) • 478 member • 212
Place an equipment foundation (By Point) • Place vertical chevron bracing • 121
479 Place vertical cross bracing • 117
Place an Imported Shape • 364 Place Vessel Supports • 142
Place an in-line can • 152 Place Walls • 244
Place an in-line can on cross bracing • 153 Place windows from the catalog • 285
Place an opening by boundaries • 371 plate • 551
Place an opening by drawing • 374 Plate Part Properties Dialog Box • 94
Place an opening by shape • 372 Position framing members at equal spacing
Place an opening on a leaning wall • 378 • 135
Place an opening on a sloped wall • 376 Position framing members using best fit •
Place Assembly Connection • 174 132
Place Bracing • 113 Position framing members using count
Place Can • 148 method • 133
Place columns at grid intersections • 140 Position framing members using number
Place Columns at Grid Intersections • 138 and spacing method • 136
Place Curve Members • 109 post tensioning • 551
Place designed equipment • 301 precast concrete • 551
Place Designed Equipment • 298 Preface • 12
Place designed equipment component • Presentation Tab (IFC Export Options
315 Dialog Box) • 512
Place Designed Equipment Component • pre-stressed concrete • 551
314 pretensioning • 551
Place Designed Solid • 317 Preview a CIS File • 514
Place doors from the catalog • 284 primary member • 551
Place Equipment • 278 principle of superposition • 551
Place Equipment Foundations • 476 Prismatic Shape Properties Dialog Box •
Place equipment from the catalog • 282 334
Place Fireproofing • 207 Product Data Management (PDM) System •
Place fireproofing automatically • 210 552
Place fireproofing manually • 211 product structure • 552
Place Footings • 460 production planning • 552
Place Framing Members • 127 promotion • 552
Place free end cuts • 183 purlin • 552
Place Handrails • 417
Place Handrails by Member • 455 Q
Place horizontal chevron bracing • 124
Place horizontal cross bracing • 120 query select sets • 552
Place Imported Shape from File • 363
Place Ladders • 398

Index
R shear stiffness • 554

shear walls • 554
rafters • 552
site • 554
rebar • 552
site administrator • 554
rectangular bar • 552
site setup • 554
rectangular tube • 552
sketch and trace • 554
reference data • 552
Sketch Properties Dialog Box • 362, 503
reflect • 552
Sketch the cross-section for a prismatic
reinforced concrete plan • 553
shape • 351
Relationship Tab • 63
Sketching in 3-D • 490
Remove a split • 199
skewed member • 554
Remove a transverse member from a can •
slab • 554
158
Slab Assembly Connections • 33
Remove column from a combined footing •
Slab Properties Dialog Box • 234
468
Solid Properties Dialog Box • 324
resource estimation • 553
Solve ambiguous boundaries • 232
retaining wall • 553
span • 554
Rotate an existing wall using 2-D sketch •
Specification Tab (Insulation Properties
260
Dialog Box) • 219
route • 553
specifications • 554
Routing Tab • 98
splice (structure) • 555
rule-based joint • 553
Split a cross brace • 196
Split a handrail • 420
S Split a member at a point along member •
sag ties • 553 198
SAISC (South African Institute of Steel Split a member that intersects another
Construction) • 553 member • 195
satellite server • 553 Split an existing wall using 3-D sketch • 263
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box • 521 Split columns at a plane • 197
schema • 553 Split Connection Properties Dialog Box •
schema update utility • 553 199
secondary member • 553 Stair Properties Dialog Box • 389
section • 553 steel reinforced concrete • 555
section name • 554 stiffener • 555
section orientation • 554 stress • 555
Section Tab (Wall Part Properties Dialog stringer • 555
Box) • 273 Structure • 14
Section Tab (Wall System Properties Dialog structure analysis • 555
Box) • 267 Structure Common Tasks • 17
section table • 554 Structure Workflow • 17
Select Insulation Material Dialog Box • 294, strut • 555
310 stud • 555
Selecting Objects • 19 Support vessels with 0 degree oriented lugs
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection • 146
Properties Dialog Box) • 189 Support vessels with 45 degree oriented
Set member split priority • 199 lugs • 147
Set positioning relationships for designed suspended floor • 555
equipment • 302 Switch add, subtract, or suppressed shape •
Set positioning relationships for equipment • 323
283 symmetric node • 555
Shape Properties Dialog Box • 333 system • 555
Share imported shapes between models •
366

Index
T Y
tag number • 555 yield strength • 558
target point • 556
tilt-up walls • 556
Toggle Wall Corner • 277
tolerant geometry • 556
Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 65
transition • 556
Trim Feature Properties Dialog Box • 204
Trim member to surface • 203
Trim Members • 201
trimmed surface • 556
trunk • 556
truss • 556
U
Understanding Plane Methods • 242
uniform • 556
unit/module modeler • 556
user attributes • 556
V
version control • 556
vertex • 557
viewset • 557
W
Wall Connection Properties Dialog Box •
274
Wall Part Properties Dialog Box • 269
Wall System Properties Dialog Box • 265
web • 557
Weight & CG Tab • 98
weight and CG analysis • 557
welding • 557
What's New in Structure • 12
wirebody • 557
wizard • 557
work content • 557
work order • 557
working plane • 557
workset • 557
workspace • 558
workspace document • 558
Workspace Explorer • 558
X
X-section • 558

StructureGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

StructureGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

StructureGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Structure

Version 2016 (11.0)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Structure User's Guide 2

Structure User's Guide 3

What's New in Structure ........................................................................................................................... 12

Structure Workflow ................................................................................................................................... 17

Place Linear Member Systems ................................................................................................................. 35

Structure User's Guide 4

Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 85

Place Curve Members ............................................................................................................................. 109

Place Bracing ........................................................................................................................................... 113

Place Framing Members ......................................................................................................................... 127

Place Columns at Grid Intersections ..................................................................................................... 138

Place Vessel Supports ............................................................................................................................ 142

Place Can.................................................................................................................................................. 148

Structure User's Guide 5

Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 164

Place Assembly Connection .................................................................................................................. 174

Place Splits .............................................................................................................................................. 191

Trim Members .......................................................................................................................................... 201

Place Fireproofing ................................................................................................................................... 207

Place Slabs ............................................................................................................................................... 220

Structure User's Guide 6

Place a slab by drawing 2-D boundaries ............................................................................................ 228

Place Walls ............................................................................................................................................... 244

Structure User's Guide 7

Toggle Wall Corner .................................................................................................................................. 277

Place Equipment ...................................................................................................................................... 278

Place Designed Equipment .................................................................................................................... 298

Place Designed Equipment Component ............................................................................................... 314

Place Designed Solid .............................................................................................................................. 317

Place Shape ............................................................................................................................................. 328

Structure User's Guide 8

Creating Customized Shapes ................................................................................................................. 337

Place Imported Shape from File ............................................................................................................. 363

Place Opening .......................................................................................................................................... 367

Place Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 383

Place Ladders .......................................................................................................................................... 398

Structure User's Guide 9

Place Handrails ........................................................................................................................................ 418

Place Handrails by Member .................................................................................................................... 458

Place Footings ......................................................................................................................................... 463

Place Equipment Foundations ............................................................................................................... 479

Member Autoconnect .............................................................................................................................. 488

Structure User's Guide 10

Connect Members to Grids ................................................................................................................. 492

Sketching in 3-D ...................................................................................................................................... 493

Importing and Exporting Structure ........................................................................................................ 507

New Mapping File .................................................................................................................................... 535

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 539

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 562

Structure User's Guide 11

What's New in Structure

Structure User's Guide 12

Structure User's Guide 13

Place Assembly Connection - Places assembly connections between linear member

Structure User's Guide 14

Place Shape - Adds additional shapes or equipment objects to an existing designed